Professional Documents
Culture Documents
materials
Part 3
January 1977
Radio
~---
Audio
Television
January 1977
FM tuners
Loudspeakers
---
Contents
==
::::::
::::::
::::::
---I
::::::
Our Data Handbook System is a comprehensive source of information on electronic cornponents, subassemblies and materials: it is made up . of three series of handbooks each
comprising several parts.
ELECTRON TUBES
SEMICONDUCTORS AND INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
COMPONENTS AND MATERIALS
BLUE
RED
GREEN
The several parts contain all pertinent data available at the time of publication, and each
is revised and reissued periodically.
Where ratings or specifications differ from those published in the preceding edition they
are pointed out by arrows. Where application information is given it is advisory an~ does
not form part of the product specification.
If you need confirmation that the published data about any of our products are the latest
available, please contact our representative. He is at your service and will be glad to
answer yo1:1r inquiries.
Thls information is furni shed for guidanc e , and with no guarantee as to its accuracy or
completeness; its publication conveys no licence under any patent or other right, nor
does the pu blisher assume liabilit y for any consequence of its use: spec ifications and
availab ility of goods mentioned in it are subject to change without notic e: it is not to be
reproduced in any way , in whole or in part without the writcen consent of the publisher.
December 1972
Part 1a
Part 1b
Part 2
Communica ti on magnetrons
Magnetrons for microwave heating
Klystrons
Travelling-wave tubes
Part 3
Part 4
Receiving tubes
Part Sa
Cathode-ray tubes
Part Sb
Part 6
December 1975
January 1976
May 1976
Diodes
Triodes
T-R Switches
Microwave semiconductor devices
Isolators - circulators
January 1975
March 1975
August 1976
May 1975
January 1977
Gas-filled tubes
TV Picture tubes
Part 9
Photomultiplier tubes
Phototubes (diodes)
August 1976
August 1975
Thyratrons
Ignitrons
Industrial rectifying tubes
High-voltage rectifying tubes
October 1975
June 1976
Rectifier diodes
Vo ltage regulator diodes (> 1, 5 W)
Transient suppressor d iodes
Part 1b
Rectifier stac ks
Th yr istors
T r iacs
October 1975
Diodes
March 1976
Low-frequency t ransistors
.Part 3
April1976
Part 4a
Special semiconductors
_June
Part Sa
1~76
July 1976
Phot ocouple rs
Infrar ed s ensitive devices
Photoconductive devices
November 1976
May 1976
LOCMOS HE fa mily
GZ fam ily
Part 2a
Part 5
Circuit blocks
C ircuit blocks lOO kHz-Ser ies
Circuit blocks 1-Series
Circuit blocks 10-Series
Part 8
October 1976
Ferroxcube potcores and square cores
Ferroxcube transformer cores
January 1977
Components for black an d white
television
Compon'ents for colour television
Soft ferrites
Ferrites for radio, audio an d television
Beads and chokes
Part 4b
April1976
Part 4a
February 1976
Negative temperature coefficient
thermistors (l\lTC)
Pos itive temperature coefficient
thermis tors (PTC)
Test switches
Capacitors
Electrolytic and solid capacitors
Paper capacitors and film capac itors
Part 3
Resistors
F ixed resistors
Variable resistors
Voltage dependent resistors (VDR)
Light dependent res istors (LDR)
Par't 2b
November 1975
Part 9
Part 1 0
Connectors
December 1976
July 1975
---F.M.
tuners
AP2157 /01
3122 U7 152:10
11
F.M. TUNER
with diode tuning
--------------------~
Supply
volte~ge
(d. c.)
15 V
Frequency ran ge
87 .5- JO R lVIHz
Interme di a te frequ e nc y
10 . 7 MH z
APPLICATION
This tun e r is inte nded for use in hi-fi radio sets .
The required range can be obtained by limiting the tuning voltage .
Th e tun e r s are prrl\/ide d with a fou r- fold i . f. c ircuit .
N r>vcmher 19 76
A.1
AP2157/01
F.M. TUN ER
11
MECHANICAL DATA
-
Dimehsions in mm
M2,5
15
~0. 02
L11.4
0,2
--
~
+ ~"---++---,.,JJ - t
0212xl
,___j,1
12.5
_,4.83 --.
. oo
olo
rear view
o
Fig.l
A4
Novembe r l 976
AP2157/0l
F.M . TUNER
11
ELECTRICAL DATA.
Unless otherwise specified all electrical values apply at an ambient temperature of
25 5 C, a relative humidity of 60 15% and a supply voltage of 15 I V.
Sem iconductors
r . f. amplifier
mixer
oscillator
tuning diodes
BF324
BF324
BF324
!31311013 (2x), BBllOG
0 to +55 <>c
- 20 to +70 C
+15 1 V
8, 75 0, 5 mA
+3 to +27 V
Frequency range
voltage
(V d . c.)
frequency
(MHz)
voltage
(V d. c.)
frequency
(MHz)
3,00
3,30
4,00
4,80
5,80
8,95
8,35
87
88
90
92
94
96
98
10 ,05
12 . 10
14,65
17,HO
2 1, 80
27,00
102
104
106
!OH
110
300 kHz
lOO
I
I
300kH z
Intermediate frequency
10,7 MHz
The oscillator fJ:equency is higher
than the signal frequency
180 kHz
typ. 27 dB
300
75
Output impedance
.100
~.350kHz
Power gain
typ. 20 dB
Noise figure
typ. 6, 5 dB
I. F . su ppress ion
Ima ge rejection
~SO
November 1976
~).
80 dB
dB
~ -~~-~~ __________,As
---
AP2157 /01
F . M. TUNER
11
i!
i!
75 dB
2!
60 dll
:s
lOO kf-I z
75 dB
:3. 5 dB
1 ) Supprc;;si on of a s igmll arising by conversion of harmonics of the osci ll ator sigmll and
those o f a strong aerial signa l. Reference vo lt age: lOfJV (aerial e. m. f.): aerial
impedance: 75 ~>. .
2
) Suppression of a signa l arising from t wo s tro ng aerial signals. Reference voltage :
lO f.! V (aerial e. m. f.): aerial impedance : 75 Q.
3
) Suppression of a signal arising from the harmonic o f t wo strong aeri<~l signa l s with a
frequency difference equal to the inte rmediate frequency.
A6
lovcmhcr 1976
F . M. TU l ER
AP2157 /01
--
"'
I l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
- - q-- - - - - - - J
"-----~~___J
November 1976
AP2157 /01
F.M. TUNER
11
ADDITIONAL INFOR MATION
Ali!,'lling of the i. f . circuit
---
r\
I. F.
GENERATOR
R; =son
~son
':"~
i.f.
inj ect ion
point
7Z74429
Fig . :l
\
:!. Adjust the i. f. coils in SCC]uencc I to -l (Fig. -lj to ma x imum output.
-J
0
0
L ~ Hf~~~~~~-I- ~ I16 15 14
10
I- f-H----If---'1
6
1
7Z741..27
rear view
Fig. -I
-1. Applv a generator signal (lOO m V, 10. 7 Mllz 500 kHz) to the i . f. inject ion point [or
checking the i. f. bandwidth; top of the curve a t 10.7 MHz 5 kH z .
Check the i. f. bandwidth 0 dfl) and S 300: th e ir val ues m ust be as specifie d i n
"Ele ct ric a l Data".
A8
AP2157 /Ol
F . M. TUNER
11
Measurement of power ga in
0
0
L_r16 15
0
0
oo
0
0
Vo
-+
(i.f) '
==
r-r-_j
r- r- r10
--
00
0
0
14
+-
7Z68768 . 2
WR;7Sfl
E aerial
Fig. 5
The r.f. input signal: 51 mV (r.m.s.)
h
.
i. f. vo ltage across R (= .390 Q)
T e gam = 20 1og
aer ial e. m . f.
November 1976
AY _ _ __
AP2158
11
F.M. TUNER
with diode tuning
1S V
10, 7. MI-l z
APPLICATION
1 ~-~11 _
All
AP2158
F.M. TUNER
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions in mm
- - - - - - - --+
i.f. injection
point
15
0,02
M2,5
L11.4
0,2
-~-<>--++-~ - t
I
02 2x
1. -
front view
I___j
12,5
0,1
._14+g.3 _..
50,1
.
oo
q
olo
o
7Z &8769.2
rear view
Fig . 1
A12
November 1976
I.
AP2158
F.M. TUNER
11
ELECTRICAL DATA
Unless otherwise specified all electrical values apply at art ambient temperature of '
25 5 oc, a relat ive humidity of 60 15% and a supply voltage of 15 1 V .
Semiconductors
r . f. amplifier
mixer
oscillator
tuning diodes
0 to +55 C
- 20 to +70 oc
BF324
BF.'324
BF324
'
+ 15 1 V
typ. 8, 75 0, 5 mA
+.3 to +27 V
Frequency range
voltage
(V d. c.)
frequency
(MHz)
3,00
3, .30
4,00
4. 80
87
88
90
92
94
96
98
~.so
6,95
8,35
voltage
' '
(V d. c . )
frequency
(MHz)
10,05
12, 10
14 .65
17,80
21,80
27,00
102
104
106
108
11 0
'
30QkH,
lOO
f <300 '"'
Intermediate frequency
10,7 MHz
The oscillator frequency is higher
than the signal frequency
I. F. bandwidth (3 dB)
220kHz
s .'300
typ. 16 dB
75
Output impedance
.300 Q
Padding deviation
s .350kHz
Power gain
typ . 30 ell
Noise figure
typ. 6, 5 dB
I. F. suppress ion
Image rejection
~50
80 dB
dB
'
November 1976
~-~~11 _
AP2158
F.M. TUNER
11
R e peat spot suppress ion (RSS) l)
<: 75 dB
<: 75 dB
;:: 60 dll
$ lOO kHz
:l, 5 dll
1
) Suppress ion of a s ign al a ri s ing by convers ion of ha rmon ics ~f the osc illa tor s ign al a nd
those of a stron g ne ri a l s igna l. Reference volt age : 10 ]-IV (aeri a l e . m. f.): aerial
impe dance : 75 Q .
2 ) Sup~ression of a signa l a risi ng from two str ong ae rial signals. Reference voltage :
10]-IV (ae rial e.m . f.}: ae rial impe da nce: 75Q.
:3) Suppression of a s ig11 nl ar is in g from the harmonic of two stron g aer ia l s ignals with a
A 14
No ve m ber 1976 . -
,-
- - - -.- ---1-r!
I
I
I
I
AP2158
F . M . TUNER
~~
11
11
~I
<0
I
I
I
I
I
"- +
-
I
I
I
I
I
Fo~
"'0..
I
I
I
I.
I '-
I
I
]
>
.:t..
"' -+
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
__ T ______ j
1opao
November 1976
------
! I
..!..
A15
AP2158
F.M . TUNER
I
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Aligning of the i. f . circuit
The tuner is fully h.f. and i.f. aligned in the factory.
However. if an adaptation to the receiver is necessary. aligning s hould be done in the
following way.
1. Adjust the tuning voltage to+ 8, .15 V.
2. Apply a gen erator sign:.~ I (!0 lOO mV, 10.7 MHz 2 kHz) to the i. f. inj e ction point
(Fig . 1) via the circuit shown in Fig ..3.
----
SnF
a---
I. F.
GENERATOR
R;
2son
=son
i.f.
injection
point
7Z74419
Fig . .1
.1 . Adjust the i . f. coils in sequence 1 to 2 (Fig. 4) to maximum output.
I
0
0
Lr16 15 14
0
o
d
do
0
0
0
0
0
0
10
~8
r-r-U
6
1
7274428
rear view
Fig . 4
4. Apply a generator s ignal (lOO m V, 10, 7 MHz 500 kH z) to the i . f. injection po int for
checking the i. f. bandwidth; top of the curve at 10. 7 MHz 5 kHz.
Check the i. f. bandwidth (8 dl1) and S .100: their va lu es must be as specified in
.. Electrical Data".
'
A 16
November 1976
AP2158
F . M . T UN ER
11
Measuring the power gain
0
Ll-
0
0
g'
>
+
>-
l l
>
I
>
+
1-_j
10
>-
0
0
16 15 14
0 0
0
0
0
~
+-
Vo -+
(i .f.)
717358?.1
Fig.5
The r.f. input signal: :!0 1 mV (r.m.s.)
Tl1
November 1976
~ ~~-........___L 1 _
A17 _ _ ___.
FDl
FDlA
11
F.M. TUNERS
with diode tuning
QUICK REFERENCE DATA
F , M. tuners for European and Ame rican ba nd
Tuner FD 1 without a. f. c,
Tuner FD lA with a. f. c.
Supply voltage (d. c . )
12 V
Frequency range
GENERAL
These tuners are intended for use in hi -fi radio sets, The advantage of these tuners is
the excellent big signal handling.
The wanted range can be obtained by limiting the tuning voltage.
The tuners are equipped with silicon transistors and silicon variable capacitance diodes.
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions in mm
_
_ _ _ 53 ,5 _ _ ___
52,5
oj
slot for
50,1 _ _____,
polarizing
49 ,8
1,5 X 9,6
,~!'~::.: ~ +
j__ 16 .......
:!:0,2
7Z73HIO
Fig.1
The tuner can be. fixed in a connector or soldered directly to a printed-wiring board.
May 1975
----
FDl
FDlA
F.M. TUNERS
4312 02 0 80030
ELECTRICAL DATA
Semiconductors
2X
1X
4x
1x
BF324
BF451
BB104
BB106 (only for FDlA)
0 to +50 C
-20 to +60 C
+ 12 1 V
Supply voltage
Current drawn from + 12 V supply
9mA
+3,8to+28V
Frequency range
Intermediate frequency
10,7 MHz
The oscillator frequency is higher
than the signal frequency
I. F. bandwidth
270kHz
60Q
240 Q
470
Gain at 98 MHz
0,35
I. F. suppression at 98 MHz
1)
2)
62 dB
1V
max. 30kHz
FDl
F.M. TUNERS
FDlA
see Fig. 5
Oscillator radiation
Graphs
'
30
--
7Z73177
FD1/FD1A
tuning
voltage
(V)
20
~~
10
::::l
Jl
-~
~~
-" ~ ~
~~ ~
0
85
90
95
100
110
105
frequency (MHzl
'
..
May 1975
.11
A '>1
FDl
FDlA
F.M. TUNERS
43 12 020 80030
?Z73 178
FD1/FD1A
s,
52
RSS
and
DBS
(dB)
50
DB 53
RSS1 DB 5 2
DBS,T RSS2
100
85
90
95
. c
100
110
105
frequency ( MHz)
Fig. 3. Location of transmitter frequenc ies, repeat spots and double beats. Reference
signals s and S2: 10 !JV .
1
7Z73179
FD1/FD1A
;,
CBS
(dB)
50
c:'Bs
100
85
90
95
100
~~
105
110
frequency (M Hz)
Fig. 4. Location of transmitter frequencies and measuring frequency for measuring the
continuous beat suppression (CBS).
A22
F.M. TUNERS
FDl
FDlA
oscillator
temp. coeff.
{ kHz /C) '
1--+-+--t-t-t--1--11-t-t-t-+-+-+-++++-+~;>:>.:
~+-+-+-+-~++-r-+-+-+-+~-1~~
90
110
105
frequency {M Hz)
100
95
d etu ni ng
1kHz)
1-t--t-+--t-++++-+--+-+--+-t--1--1-1-t-t-t--l--t--b++--t
90
95
100
110
105
frequency IMHz)
May 1975
. A2.'l
FDl
FDlA
detun i ng
(kHz)
F. M. TUI\lERS
1-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-H
frequency IMHz)
A24
11
_ _ _ II
,_. """
,_.
"""
"'""
"->
N
L9
'<
,_.
MP1
"->
"'
"'
-...]
:3
00
0
0
0
0
RJ
I IR4
I
I
I
I
I
I
:;:.....
'Tl
R9
I BB104G
L2
"->
00
,-
i.f.
C10
C15I
I IR6
p-
RB
+
C22J;
_ _ _ _ _ _ _L
v Vtuning
&
0.. ;s:
8:~
(D
c::
. ~
s :::<'
oq en
'1'~2~
I
R13
! JC21
I
FD1
a.f.c .
C25
+--I --+---{="1-~
FD1A
., ..,
..,
"
--
)>
cc
Fig. 8
)>
LIJJJJ.I
11- - -
loudspeakers
' '
Survey
Introduction
Data sheets
page B2
page BS
page Bl7
LOUDSPEAKERS
GE ERAL
11
SURVEY
The lJutl~peaker~ are listed in order o r their <.:<Jtalogue number. Conversion of catalogue
number to type number is g iven in th e list on page B I.J.
HIGH POWER(;;> I 0 watt) to DIN45500 requirements for hi-fi loudspeakers
~ize
cone
di,tml'ter
(inches)
overall
diameter
(mm)
shcqw
flf
fhmge
l).j
:il
round
l'O uncl
round
ro und
;;;)
squt.l re
-1 /K/ 15
.=, ~
-1 /H
-1 /H
-1 /H
-1 /H
166
round
squan:
octagotwl
octagonal
octagonal
0Cl<.lg"fli1;J I
.~
20S
ncUJ gon;_J]
s
s
20 .~
octagon ell
octagonal
t).j
J:).j
.~~~
129
129
](l(J
10
20:i
. 20.~
2SLJ
](]
2(11
12
12
;) ];)
;) ] .~
OCli.lg"Oil t.l i
round
l'ottnd
round
1'0\llld
impedance
mnximum
VCI~Si<ll1
powe 1
.J ji\
H/15
-1/H
-1 /K/ 1.5
.j
-1 /ii
-1 /:-1
-1 /H
.j
-1 /K
-1 /H
-1 /H
-1 /K
-1 /H
bus ic part
()f
(\V)
type number
20 / .JO
20/SO
.10
20/ -10
20/ .JO
10
JO
.JO
10
.JO
ADO I.JO(l- .
AD0162/T .
AD02 I OjSq.
AD2090/T .
AD2290/T.
AD2071/T .
AD227 1/T.
ADSO!JO/Sq.
AD :i061 fS(I
AD/066/MFB
AD7066/W.
ADH06 1/W.
ADH066/W.
ADH067 / Ml'13
ADH067/W.
ADI065/W.
ADIO IOO/W.
ADI265/W.
AD I 2 100 / W .
:l :>
:l()
.JO
:iO
.JO
:>o
-Hl
;l()
.JO
page
Ill/
1!21
132\l
B.J:l
B.J:l
B:l7
frl 7
fll l /
fll2.)
B ll:l
ll179
ll201
ll20.S
ll209
ll215
l l2:l.~
ll2:ll)
B2.J7
B2SLJ
~~
Ill
12
12
12
I
ll2
12\l
166
166
166
2 17
261
:l iS
:n5
:liS
ocwgonal
()<.:tagonal
>t:tagonal
()t:fctgonul
round
round
ro und
round
l'OUncf
-1 /H
-1 /H
10
' ;l[)
-1 /H
-1 /H
;JO
10/20
10
-1 /H/ 15
.J j :l j l.)
-1/H
-1 /H/ I.S
~11._~
I()
20
so
2:i
ADS06 1/ M.
AD7060/W'.
t\07062/M .
AD706:ljM.
9710/MC
i\01065/M.
AD !265/M .
AD 12 I 00 / IIP.
AD 12100 / M.
__
.11
812 I
Bioi
lll6.~
13169
ll227
ll2:3 1
B2.J:l
ll2S I
8255
LOUDSPEAKERS
SURVEY
GENERAL
11
si ze
cone
overall
diameter
diameter
(inches)
(mm)
4
4
5
5
6
6
6
5
X
X
7
7
9
7
7
8
102 X 154
102 X 154
129
13.) X 18.'3
1.1 .'3 X 183
161 X 2.'3 4
166
166
206
shape
of
flange
impe dance
version
ma ximum
power
(Q )
(W)
ova l
oval
round
oval
oval
oval
octagonal
octagonal
octagona l
4 /8/25
4 /8/ 15 / 25 /800
4 /8/ 15/ 25
4 /8/ 15/ 25
-1 /8
4 /8
4/8
4/8/800
4 /8
6
4
6
6
4
6
6
3
8
basic part
page
of
type number
AD46 81/ M .
AD4691 / M .
AD50 81/ M.
AD57 80/M.
AD5790/M .
AD69 80/M.
AD 70 80/M.
AD7091/M.
AD 80 81/ M.
13 89
13 10 1
13 129
ll ].)7
13 145
1315.'3
Ill R.3
1319 1
13219
--:
~
3
3
3
X
X
5
8
8
4
4
4
4
4
4X 6
4x6
4 X 6
4 X 6
4X 8
5
5 X 7
5X 7
6 X 9
7
7
8
Octobe r 1976
76 x 1.31
82 X 205
82 X 205
105
105
105
105
105
102 X 15-1
95 X 155
102 X 154
95 X 155
96x2 10 '
129
133 X 1S:l
133 X 183
161 X 234
166
166
206
oval
oval
oval
round
squa r e
round
squ a r e
square
ova l
oval
ova l
oval
oval
r ound
oval
oval
oval
octagonal
octa gonal
octagona l
3
4
4
.'3
3
3
3
8
6
6
4
4
8
6
6
4
6
6
.3
8
AD.3590/X.
AD3 880/ X.
AD.3 890/X .
AD40 80/X .
AD44 80/ X .
AD40 85/X.
AD44 85/X .
AD44 81/X .
AD46 81/X .
AD46 82/X.
A.D469 1/X.
AD4692/X .
AD4 890/ X.
AD50 81/ X .
AD5 780/X.
AD5790 / X.
AD69 80/ X.
AD70 80/X.
AD 709 1/X .
AD 8081/ X .
1357
1361
1365
13 73
1373
1377
1377
13 85
1393
139 7
13 105
13 109
13 113
B1.1.3
13141
13 149
131!)7
131 87
13195
1322 .3
1 1.~-~~J I _r,n-J
LOUDSPEAKERS
SURVEY
GENERAL
11
,)1
2
2~
.3
:3
4
4
4
50
64
81
81
105
105
105
s hape
of
flange
impedance
version
maximum
power
(2)
(W)
round
round
round
r ound
square
r ound
squa r e
round
25
25
4/8/ 15/2 5
4/8/ 15/25
4/ll/25 / 150
4/8/ 15/25
4/8/ 15/25
8/ 15
0,2
0,3
0,5
1
1
1
1
2/0,6
bas ic part
of
type nu mber
AD 0199/Z.
AD2099/Z.
AD2070/Z .
AD3070/Y .
AD3370/Y.
AD4070/Y .
AD 4470/Y .
AD4090/ X.
page
1325
1349
B3.3
BS.1
1353
1369
1369
B8 l
PASSIVE RADIATOR
8
205
octagona l
IAD8000
13199
basic part of
type number
page
ADF 1600/.
. ADI'2 -1 00/.
ADF500/4500 / .
1326S
13267
13269
CROSS-OVER NETWORKS
dimens ions
Jxwx h
(mm)
cross-over
fr equency
(Hz)
l OO
1600/ 1800
2400
500 / 4500
70
45
lOOx 70 x 45
105
70
-15
impeda n ce
version
maximum
power
(Q)
(W)
4/8
20
20
40
4 /8
4/H
ll
LOUDSPEAKERS
GENERAL
11
INTRODUCTION
CHOICE OF TYPE
(S 2 watt)
The high power series comprises t op-qu a lit y woofers, squawkers a nd tweeters intended
for use in specia l combinat ion s with appropriate filters and enclosures . Their excell ent
s ound r epr oduqion conforms in every respect to the high fid e lity standard s IEC 268 and
DTN45 500. The system power handlin g capacity is from 10 W to 250 W - the latter for
theatres a nd out-do or applicati on s. Full ra nge high power l oudspeakers are also
available. These speakers also conform to IE C 268 and DTN45500 but have been designed
to meet so mew hat less stringent requirements. They are specia ll y for juke boxes,
musical instr ument s . monitoring and public address systems.
The med ium power series (2 W to 10 W) may be subdivided according to t he applicat ion
into round a nd oval versions, usually for radio , audio and telev is ion . Loudspeakers
having a Ticonal magnet system - which keeps stray magnetic fields low - are pa rticularly recommended .for te levis ion .
The low power t ypes (< 2 W) are mainl y used in small radios, intercoms and portab le
te levis ion.
October 1976
--c:::::
--- -
LOUDSPEAKERS
GENERAL
INTRODUCTION
~-.- L
dome
dome (round)
dome
round
round
round
s quare
round
s quar e
oval
oval
round
sq ua r e
o va l
octagona l
oval
oval
octagona l
octagonal
= Sa me as Y , but a wider
fr equenc y range
Sq
HP
40
60/6 1/62/6.1
65 / 66 / 67
70 / 71
80 /8 1/82
85
90 /9 1/92
99
100
= Ferr oxdure,
90 mm c/J
30 mm c/J
53 mm c/J
= Ferroxdure.
46 mm c/J
= Sinterpol, Ticonal , 18 mm
=Sinterpot, Ticon al ' 10 mm
= Ferroxdure. 130 mm c/J
= Ferroxdure,
= Ferroxdure,
86
c/J
c/J
c/J
_H~' ~-~JI
GENERAL
INTRODUCTION
LOUDSPEAKERS
RESPONSE CURVES
For the medium and l ow power ra nge a curve of <~n unmounted loudspeaker. showing the
sound pressure-as a function of t.he frequency is given in the data sheets .
For the high power range curves are given of a l oudspeaker mounted on an IEC baffle
or mounted in an enclosure and, for the squawker. and tweeters. a directional response
curve is also g iven.
October 1976
LOUDSPEAKERS
GENERAL
INTRODUCTION
1
TEST METHODS AND MEASUREMENTS
The atmospheric conditions for m easure ment are:
Temperature
:
15 t o
35 oc
Relat ive humidity:
-15 to
75%
Pressure
: 860 to 1060 mbar
1
Impedance
Tl!e impedanc e is the modulus of the l owest va lu e of the electrica l impedance in the
freque nc y range above the bass resonance frequency of the loudspeaker as determined
by the method specified in para. :J below.
l. I Measuring apparatus
- Audio-frequency s in e -wave genera tor with a constant output voltage over the
range 0 to 20000 Hz.
- Linear a mplifier w ith a n output impedance not grea ter than 1/.'3 of the rated louds peake r imp edan ce and a power output of approx . 0,1 x the power-handling capacity
of the I oudspea ker.
-A 1 Q resis tor c onnected in ser ies with the loudspeaker.
- An electroni c voltmeter shunted across the 1 ~2 re,sistor .
l. 2 Condition s
R<tted impedanc e is stated on the data sheets . The measured impedan ce will not be
lower tha n 20% of the rated impedance .
Octobe
GENERAL
INTRODUCTION
[\LOUDSPEAKERS
11
3.
Resonance frequency
The resonance frequency is that frequency where the modulus of the electrical impedance has its first principal maximum in an ascending scale , the electrical input
being such as to have no significant effect on the resonant frequency.
3. l Measuring apparatus
=
3
The re sonance frequency is that frequency at which the voltmeter indicates the first
minimum deflection as the frequency is swept slowly from 0 Hz, the output voltage
of the amplifier being such that the voltmeter reads for the resonance fr .e quency:
40 to 60 mV for loudspeakers with a rated impedance
less than 20 Q;
15 to 25 mV for loudspeakers with a rated impedance
between 20 Q and lOO Q;
4 to
sat~s
4. l Test apparatus
- Generator supplying test signal in accordance with IEC268, para. 9. 3.
- Power amplifier with an output impedance not greater than 1/3 of the rated impedance of the l oudspeaker.
-Voltmeter indicating the r. m. s. value of the voltage.
October 1974
9- - - - - - - '
--
LOUDSPEAKERS
GENERAL
INTRODUCTION
11
4 . 2 Conditions
- A test voltage is applied to the loudspeaker for an W1interr upted period of 100 hrs .
The r . m . s . value of this voltage correspond s with the specified power handling
capacity of the loudspeaker .
- The test voltage has a frequency distribution corresponding with that of the output
of a filter as speci~d in IEC Publication 268 , part 5 para . 9 . 3 when fed from a
white noise sourc e .
-If the loudspeaker is designed to operate in a restricted frequency range, the cor responding ne twork ( filter) which is cormected to the loud s peaker during the test,
i s specified on the data s heet . The test voltage i s measured at the input terminals
of the network.
100
Ojo
......
so
......
......
...... ~
20
.........
10
"'
......
I" '
2
......
10
20
BlO
...... ~
30
I'-
dB
'
40
%distortion
Oc.t obe
74
GENERAL
INTRODUCTION
LOUDSPEAKERS
11
5. 1 Conditions
- The loudspeaker is mounted as specified on the data sheet.
- The power input to the loudspeaker is the operating power.
- The microphone distance is as specified on the da ta sheet. (See also definition of
"Operating power")
5. 2 Measurin,g result
The distortion curve with its limit of high power loudspeakers i s given on the data sheet.
6
Sweep voltage
The sweep voltage test involves the loudspeaker to receive a sinusoidal test signal of
specified constant amplitude. The frequency of this signal is swept through the specified frequency range.
6. 1 Test apparatus
- Audio-frequency sinus-signal generator with a constant output voltage over the
range from 0 to 20 000 Hz.
/
- Linear amplifier with an output power appropriate to the loudspeaker under test
and an output impedance not greater than 1/ 3 x the r a ted loudspeaker impedance.
For power see 6. 2.
- An e le ctronic voltmeter with high input impedance.
6 . 2 Conditions
- The loudspeaker i s tested unmounted.
- The input voltage is
a) for the medium and low power range- such that the power input to the
is 0, 5 x the specified power handling capacity .
b) for the High power range as specified on the data sheets.
,j
louds~aker
responding network (filter) which is connected to the loudspeaker during the test ,
is specified on the data sheet. The test voltage is measured at the in put terminal s
of the network .
6. 3 Test result
To pass this test the loudspeaker has to function 1~roperly during the test.
7
Flux density
This is the magnetic flux density measured in the air gap .
7. 1 Measuring apparatus
- Differential search coil
- Galvanometer
October 1974
Bll
---
LOUDSPEAKERS
GENERAL
INTRODUCTION
""'""
7. 2 Conditions
- The distance between the centres of the two coils is equal to .the air gap height
minus 1 mm.
- The two coils are put Jnto the air gap symmetrical with respect to the poleplate .
7. 3 Measuring result
The minimum flux density as measured on production samples is stated on the data
sheet.
8
Frequency response
The frequency response is the graph representing the sound pressure as a function
of frequency applying to the loudspeaker a constant sine-wave signal v.
Microphone
Microphone amplifier
Cathode follower
Sine/random generator
Level recorder
Bruel
Bruel
Bruel
Bruel
. Bruel
& Kjaer ,
& Kjaer ,
& Kjaer,
& Kjaer,
& Kjaer,
type
type
type
type
type
4131,4145
2606,2607,2608
2619
1024
2305, 2307
125 mm/s
3
mm/s
50 dB
10 Hz
r.m.s.
100 mm
300 dB/s
8. 2 Conditions
vv:;-:z;
- Sine-wave signal V =
where
- for anechoic rqom measurements W = 50 mW, unless otherwise stated on the data
sheets.
V = test voltage
Zr = rated impedance as specified on the data sheet
Bl2
October i974
GENERAL
INTRODUCTION
LOUDSPEAKERS
11
8. 3 Measuring result
A description of the sensitivity and the frequency response curve(s) are given on
the data sheet.
Direction of magnetization
The magnet is so magnet ized that the centre-pole is south for systems wit h a ring
magnet, and north for systems with a slug magnet.
10
Polarity
The cone of the loudspeaker will move outwards when a d. c. voltage is app lied to
the terminals so that the red terminal is positive.
The voltage applied does not exceed the "sweep voltage",
October 1976
B13
LOUDSPEAKERS
CONVERSION LIST
GENERAL
Con vers ion of cata logue number (for order ing) to type number.
cata logue number
type
type
AD4692/X4
XB
X15
X25
AD2090(f4
TB
T15
AD2290(f4
TB
T 15
AD4090/XB
X 15
AD5790/M4
X4
MB
MI5
X8
AD709 1/M80 0
X800
M40 0
M4
X4
XB
M8
AD207 1(f4
TB
AD3070/Y4
Y8
y 15
Y25
AD2070 / Z4
ZB
Z15
Z25
AD4070/Y 15
Y25
AD4085/X4
X8
AD4485/X4
X8
AD38BO/X4
XB
X 15
AD4681/X4
240:3256 1200 1
AD0 199/Z25
24 03 257 2200 1
22002
2370 1
23702
23704
23705
AD227l(f4
TB
AD3370/Y4
YB
Y25
Y 150
2404257 2420 1
24202
24203
24204
3430 1
34302
34303
4600 1
46002
AD4470 / Y4
YB
y 15
Y25
AD44BO/X4
X8
X 15
AD7062 / M4
MS
24042 5 8 4820 I
AD8000
AD2099 / Z25
AD3590/X4
B14
xso
X400
X8
X 15
X25
AD3890 / X4
XBOO
XB
X15
X25
X70
AD469 1/X4
XB
X 15
X25
M4
MBOO
MI5
MS
M25
AD4890/X4
XB
X 15
X25
October l971i
GENERAL
CONVERSION LIST
LOUDSPEAKERS
11
catalogue number
type
catalogue number
type
AD46S I /XS
XIS
X2S
M4
MS
M2S
A04682/X4
AD70SO/X4
October 1976
X8
XIS
X2S
AD126S/W4
W8
AD106S/W4
W8
Ab0210/Sq4
Sq8
ADOI40/f4
T8
AD0162/TS
T15
AD4080/X4
xs
X1S
X2S
AD4481/X4
ADS060/Sq4
Sq8
ADS061/Srt4
Sq8
M4
MS
ADSOS1/X4
X8
X15
X25
M4
MS
M 15
M25
A05780/X4
X8
XIS
X25
M4
MS
MI5
M25
xs
M4
MS
MI5
AD7063/M4
MS
AD7060/W4
W8
AD808l/M4
M8
X4
X8
AD8061/W4'
W8
ADS066/W4
ws
ADS067/W4
W8
MFB
AD69SO)x4
xs
M4
M8
AD 106S/M4
MS
MIS
AD126S/M4
MS
M15
AD10100/W4
WS
AD12100/W4
WS
AD7066/W4
W8
MFB
9710MC
AD12100/M4
MS
M15
AD12100/HP4
HPS
BI5
I LOUDSPEAKERS .
GEN ERAL
CONVERSION LIST
I
cata logue number
type
ADF500 / 4500/8
ADF 1600/ 4
ADF 1600 /8
ADF500 / 4500 / 4
ADF2400 /8
ADF2400/4
I '""
~
!::
'
'
'
13 16
AD0140/T.
11
11
APPLICATION
For the reproduction of audio frequencies from 1600 Hz to 22 000 Hz in multi -way highfidelity loudspeaker systems. Minimum recommended cross -over frequency 1600Hz
with 12 dB/octave slope.
.
version
TECHNICAL DATA
TB
T4
4
3,4
6,3
Rated impedance
Voice coil resi stance
1600 to 20 000 Hz
Hz
1200
Resonance frequency
J-IF
pF
J-IF
J-IF
0. 35 mH
0, 2 mH
0. 5 mH
0, 35 mH
20
40
20
40
Operating power
Sweep vo ltage (500 to 20 000 Hz)
4, 5 V
m]
59
Flux density
0,9
Air-gap height
mm
.2, 5
.3, 2 mm
2, 4
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
mass
25
mm
Ferroxdure
61
o. 1
mm
kg
0,25
Mass of loudsreaker
w
w
w
w
kg
The loudspeaker has a polycarbonate dome and a vo ice coil of alu minium wire.
Connection to the loudspeaker is by means of 3, 2 mm (0, 12 inc h) Fastons or soldering .
~____,
O,_,c=
tober
1976
11
11
1317
--
AD0140/T.
94,2
m ox
56
61,5
max max
Fig.l
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in-phase connection
Baffle hole diamete r 75 mm.
Face of loudspeaker s hou ld lie in lin e with pbne o f baffle.
AV AI LAB LE VERSIONS
t::::: 26
Curve c : 2nd and 31-d harmonic distortion , measured at the operatin g power of 4 Win
anechoic room. Loudspeaker unmounted.
i318
_____
AD0140/T.
LOUDSPEAKER
--
1-""'
..-:
CD
0
Lll
0
,._
N
,._
.,-
.......
.-
r-
<
>
U'1
_o\ .....
'T"""'
N-
-c
<..)c:::::
<.......
-- -
l"i::
I-
.....
1--
- -
_..
,./
.-
f...
r-~--.
---
r-
I
0
0
"
U'1
oil
ii: '
0
0
N
0
0
.-
0
U'1
0
N
.-
0
0
~
October 1976
(])
"0
0'>
CO
['-.
lD
_il
U'1
Bl9
for evaluation. It does not Conn part bf our data handbook: system and
does not necessarily imply that the device wUl go into production_
AD0162/T.
APPLICATION
For use in direct and indirect rad iating systems for reproduction of audio frequencies
from 2000Hz to 22 000 Hz with very low distortion in multi-way high fidelity loudspeaker
systems in accordance with DIN45500. Minimum recommended cross - over frequency
1600Hz. The loudspeaker has a very high sensitivity.
TECHNICAL DATA
version
Rated impedance
Voice coil resistance
'
T15
15
6,3
12 ,5
2000 to 22 000
Resonance freque"ncy
Power handling capacities ajb (see Fig. 1)
at2000HzC= 8f.!F L=0,5 mH
C = 3, 3 fJF L = 1 mH
at 4000Hz C = 3,2 fJF L = 0,35 mH
C = 1, 5 fJF L = 0 , 8 mH
20/4
4,5
75
2,5
Mass of loudspeaker
1,2
Magnet material
diameter
mass
5,5
50/6
F lux density
Core diameter
50/6
w
w
w
w
20/4
2,4
Hz
Hz
1000
Operating power
Sweep voltage
frequency range: 500- 20 000 Hz
high pass filter : 8 fJF - 0, 5 mH
T8
--
mJ
T
mm
3,4
mm
25
mm
Ferroxdute
72
0,24
mm
kg
0,5
kg
The loudspeaker has a polycarbonate dome and a diffusor integrated in the cover.
Connection to the loudspeaker by means of 2, 8 mm (0, 11 inch) Fa11tons or soldering.
Augilst
AD0162/T.
c
loudspeaker
unmounted
iZ7S0\4
69
73,5
max max
Fig.2.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
t=
B22
Augt!St 1976
AD0162/T.
LOUDSPEAKERS
(see Fig. 3)
August 1976
B2.1
AD0162/T.
LOUDSPEAKERS
::.
( 1-
('J
I<
~~
.--
'" l)
.....
"D
"0
......
~~
V
1- ~
-- _...
M
"0
--- --
.....
r-....
1-1-
'
N'
['....
0
0
LD
:--....
.,;
b{)
''
it:
' I'- ~
1'--.
I'
0
0
('J
......
0
0
LD
0
('J
0
0
B2 4
Ill
en
"0
11
eo
0
t--
LD
lD
11
August 1976
11
AD0199 /Z25
>2
19 , 8
>2
Rated impt;dance
Resonance frequency
700
Hz
0,2
Sweep voltage
1,6
Energy in airgap
5,3
m]
Flux density
0,5
Airgap height
2 ,5
mm
2,3
mm
10
mm
Ticonal
10
0,006
mm
kg
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
weight
Weight of loudspeaker
0,017
kg
October 1974
1325
:
:
AD0199/Z25
LOUDSPEAKER
Dimens ions(mm)
r--
r
I
I
I
I
I
I
T-
-I- - - - - -
1
1B
mox
27
I
I
I
I
L
,_
4,5
--
Fig .1
16 max - .
7Z68ll2S
1) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power
handling capacity.
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in-phase, connection .
r---( 0
AVAILABLE VERSION
Fig . 2
_ _ _ _ _R,?h
'
11
October 1974
AD0199/Z25
..:t
l- 1-
..:t
Cl)
"'
.....
t- 1- I-
......
I- I-
I- I-
1-'.....
""""'
::r
..><
r-..
..
..
'
r\
\
I
~loo.
:r:
1""-- '-
0
0
lt>
0
0
N
0
0
LO
N
0
0
.........
en
en
0
lt>
<(
l
ID
"C
0
0
en
0
CO
.....
"'
""
11
1327
-~
AD0210/Sq.
11
11
APPLICATION
For the repr oduction of audio. frequencies fr om 500 to 5000 Hz with very low di stortion
in mu lti-way high-fidelity lou dspeake r systems according to DIN45500.
The lou dspeaker has an excellent spherical r a diation pattern.
version
TECHNICAL DATA
Rated impedance
Voice coil resistance
Sq8
~>.
6, 6
~>.
3,4
Resonance frequency
370
w
60
w
V
6 ,3 V
m.J
0,8
Magnet ma teria l
diameter
mass
20
4,5
Flux de nsit y
Core diameter
Hz
60
Operating power
Voice co il he ight
Hz
550 to 5000
.....,
.....,
.....,
Sq4
T
mm
5
3,3
3,6 mm
50
Ferroxdure
102
0,42
mm
mm
kg
kg
The loudspeaker ha s a paper dome, textile rim and a sealed pot; no acoustic isolation
required .
Connection to the 1oudspeakeris by means of 5, 1 mm (0, 2 in c h) Faston s or solder ing .
October 1976
::::::l
AD0210/Sq.
-~
.
Dimensions (mm)
r- - - - - 1260,2 ----~
r- - - - - 134,2 max ---,,.-,, ,,-.~
Fig . 1,
1
AV AILABLE VERSIONS
r-- (0
,
.,
1.
2 =for bu l k packing
Input po~er 50 mW
Curve b: Sound pressure meas ured in anechoi c room, loudspeaker mounted on DIN baffle
at operating power.
Curve c: 2nd and 3rd harmonic distortion, measure d at t he operating power of 5 W in
anechoic room . Loudspeaker fr ~>nt mounted on DIN baffle.
- - - - -rl330
October 1976
AD0210/Sq.
LOUDSPEAKER
('J
(~
rD
rD
..:.:.
......
.--
......
--
I
0
0
l[)
L_
oil
~
1\.
....,
.D
' 1'-
~-
-- v ~
1'-
r--- r---
I'>
'
('J
I<
I
I
1\
0
0
"0
y
0
0
.--
"0
i'-..'
['..
::::,.. -
t--
...
'
......_
l[)
,' ...
0
('J
0
0
0
Octobe r 1976
ro
"'0
0
0'>
0
<X)
t--
0
ID
.Ir
0
l[)
RQ I
AD2070/Z.
11
11
r
TECHNICAL DATA
versi on
Z4
28
Z25
::::
15
25
3,5
7, 1
13,7
22,8
Resonance frequency
360
, 360
360
360
Hz
0,5
0,5
0,5
0,5
1, 4
1, 9
2,5
Energy in a irgap
12,7
12 , 7
12,7
12,7
mJ
0 , 74
0 ,74
0 , 74
0, 74
T
mm
Ra ted impedance
Sweep voltage
Airga p he ight
Voice coil he ight
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
we ight
Weight of loudspeaker
October .19..7.;,
4 _ _ _11
2, 5
2, 5
2,5
2,5
2, 7
2,2
3,6
mm
mm
10
10
10
10
Fxd
31
0,02
Fxd
31
0, 02
Fxd
31
0,02
Fxd
31
0,02
0,064
0,064
0 ,064
0 , 064
215
m m\Z'l
kg
kg
AD2070/Z.
Dimensions (mm)
I
I
I
I
I
I
f.-
I
I
I
I
----L-
r---f-
I
---
f--
I
I
I
I
I
I
-::::
f.-
--
I
I
I
1.5 m in
D31,4max-
.---- - - - - - - 64max
58
ma X
I._
!..-
- 9,2
-------~ 1
mox
._ 19,8 m a x---..
Fig. 1
7Z6S949
1) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone -movement at the s pec ified power
handling capacity.
O~e tag is indicated by a red m ark for in-phase connection.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
:ha. 2
'
'
f---- 2 = for
Fig. 2
'~ )
- - - ---"-'3.4
October 1974
AD2070/Z.
LO UDSPEAKER
,..,... V
'
~
0
,..,...
Lf)
"'
,/'
,/'
I
..Y
Lf)
U)
::;;
"'
'
1./
'
/
~.,..
Lfl
!...--' f.-
'r--.. r--..
~ 1--
"
--__,
~
!--....
I".
r-...
r'\ f\.
'
1\
0
0
I}
"'.;>,'l
Lfl
"'
(t- t-
t- t- t-
r- I- I-
0
0
,.
0
0
~
'
'
0
Lfl
'
0
~
0
0
~
en
'0
0
a>
CO
t--
lD
0
Lfl
..
October 1976
11
B3S
'
AD2071/T.
AD2271/T.
11
APPLICATION
vers ion
T8
T4
Rated impedance
3,5
7, 1
Resonance frequency
1000
1000
10
10
1,4
-~
Hz
'~)
12,7
12,7
mJ
740
740
mT
Airgap height
2,5
2,5
mm
2,7
2,2
mm
10
10
mm
Magnet m ateri a l
diameter
weight
Fxd
31
0,02
Fxd
31
0, 02
kg
Weight of loudspeaker
0 , 07
0,07
kg
m mr;D
October 1974
AD207l/T.
AD2271/T.
Dimensions (mm)
.....-_
52, 2
ma X
.__f.-
0 31,4max
57, 7 ma x
....
1...
2, 7m~x
-+-17,9max-.
28,4max
----____,~ 1
_____... 7l68222
52 ,2
m ox
'---1--
D31,4max 680,05 - - - - - -
-~
..-2,7max
-17,9max-.
......-- 28 4 max _....
Fig. l
1zsaz2J
'
-1338
October 1974
AD2071/T.
LOUDSPEAKER
AD2271/T.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
r-- (0 = stamped
AD 2071/T4,
I_
catalogue number 2422 257 220. 1
AD 2071/TS,
on loudspeaker magnet
not to be used for ordering).
AD 2271/T4,
AD 2271/TS,
'~)
October 1974
B39
AD2071/T.
AD2271/T.
LOUDSPEAKER
f
...-;
.,...
U)
L,...oo
,..,..- ,..-
< X)
U)
0
N
~~
J:
....
N
.,...
'J
......
Ll>
I
N
\
1\
I
"""
1"- "-
r- t- ~
J:
0
0
Ll>
0
N
I-- I-~~
0
0
r-:r-:
----
Ill
NN
I-- I--
DD
<{<{
'
0
~
m
~
01
CO
N
.,...
.:0
11'1
11
0
N
October 19J
zt inch
AD2071/T.
AD2271/T.
October 1974 _ _ _
I I~-~--------------"..:.____
;;.
B4o;,.:l;....._ _ _ __
'
AD2090/T.
AD2290/T.
A PPLICATION
F o r reproducti o n o f au dio fr equ e nci es up to 20 kllz with very low di s to rtion in multi- way
high fide lit y l o ud s pea ke ~ sys te ms in a cco rda nce with DI N 45500. Due to a bRen ce o f s tray
fi e ld fr o m th e twee te r ma gne t sys te m , thi s lou dspea ker may be use d in te lev i s io n set s .
TECHNIC AL DATA
Ra te d impedan ce
Vo ice co il r es is ta nce
T4
ve r sw n
T8
Tl5
15
.1 , :l
6, 6
1.1
:3000 to 20 000
12
Hz
1:30o
2
5
2, 7
4
5
.19
0. 85
J-LF
4, 7
2, H
12
llz
5,5
2, 7
V
JlF
mJ
T
.1
mm
2, 8
mm
18
mm
Ticona l
18
0 , 027
0, l
mm
kg
kg
Octobe r 1976
1343
----
AD2090/T.
AD2290/T.
Dimensions (mm )
-1
33
----.111
mox . .,______
51 mox
29 max - - - . . 1z6ez11.1
Fig. la
Fig. lb
Baffle hole diameter 44 mm
One tag is indica ted by a red mark for in-phase connection.
- - - - -1'!44
Occtnhf'r 1CJ7n
2 inch
~IGH
POWER
TWEET~~
~
LOUDSPEAKER
AD2090/T.
AD2290/T.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
320~
AD2090/T4 ,
AD2090/T8 ,
AD2290/T8,
'~)
Octobe.u2.7..i.
AD2090/T.
. AD2290/T.
LOUDSPEAKER
1-V
I - f-1-
....:
.....
I
.::
'
CO
(D
.....
I
'
Lf)
1\
'
---
_()D
N
V
......
M
'0
t--... !"'--
.. ..
~
!"'--
--
['
r---
......
0
0
LD
,,
"'-~"
u.
0
0
N
'
0 .
LD
0
N
0
0
(])
CO
(!)
0
Lf)
97
AD2090/l.
AD2290/T.
LOUDSPEAKER
Fig. 3
Fig.4
Fig. S
October 1974
' -~------------~"~1347~
11 AD2099/Z25
11
25
12
19 , H
12
Resonance frequency
420
1-iz
0, .'3
Sweep voltnge
2, 5
.),:3
111.1
Flux clensiry
0,5
2,5
111111
2, .)
111111
10
mm
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
mass
Mas s of lop dspeaker
Ticonal
10
0.006
kg
0, 021
kg
...,
-==
mm
I
The loud,pca ker has a paper cone and su 1rm~ncl ,
I
October 1976
IL ___~Il-~849_..
AD2099/Z25
Dimensions(mm)
r
I
I
I
I
I~
I
I
- - I-
.045,5 1)
---
I
I
I
I
L
- - - - - - 50max - - - - - --1
I~
- -
18
ma x
46 , 2
ma X
7
mox
- -1Bmax-+-
7Z68t..26
Fig .!
1) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power
handling capacity.
One tag is indicated by a 'red mark for in-phase connection .
AVAILABLE VERSION
1 (0
I
f-- 2
L 6
Fig. 2
October ...,lc<.9_,7""
_, 4 _ __
AD2099/Z25
LOUDSPEA KER
~~
(I-
-~
-t-"'
0
N
-~---
I
.:1::
.......
I)
_,.,...-
'
;:::;;;;
.......
.......
I-- I-1-"
....
lD
.........
:::
---
.......
'\
\
N
\:
1-
--
lD
1- 10
0
N
0
0
lD
0
N
0
0
0
October 1976
Cl)
\J
CO
['-..
lD
0
lD
11
BSl
.~
AD3070/Y.
AD3370/Y.
11
APPLICATION
version
Y4
Y8
Yl5
Y25
y 150
15
25
150
3,5
7,1
13,7
22 , 8
127
Resonance frequency
250
250
250
250
250
Hz
Rated impedance
Sweep voltage
2, 7
Energy in airgap
12,7
12' 7
12 , 7
12' 7
12,7
mJ
Flux density
0 , 74
0, 74
0 , 74
0,74
0, 74
Airgap height
2,5
2,5
2, 5
2,5
2,5
mm
2,7
2,2
3, 6
3, 5
mm
10
10
10
10
10
mm
Fxd
31
0, 02
Fxd
31
0,02
Fxd
31
0 , 02
Fxd
31
0,02
Fxd
31
0, 02
0 , 069
0,075
0,069
0,069
0,075
0,075
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
we ight
, , October 1974
11
3,5
8, 7
mm(tl
kg
kg
kg
-~
AD3070/Y.
AD3370/Y .
Dime nsions (mm)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
0 72 11-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~~
a
0
ov
-- f- - f.-
If
'-
16,7 ma x ._
4- 2,
7 2 ma x - .
51
71 ,6
mo x ma X
7Z6S947
/
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
o 31,4max -
1--- - - - - - - - - 0 81 ma x - - - - - - - - -_.1
f\
\Jr---
-- I-
ov
,---
-I-
'--
51
71,6
ma x ma X
If
'-
1,5 min1I__.
16,7 ma x ._
..._272
ma x ~
'1Z6 S9t..8
1) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power
handling c a pac ity .
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in-phase connection.
Octobe r 1974
AD3070/Y.
AD3370/Y.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
~(0
AD3070/Y4,
AD3070/Y8,
1-1---
~' )
October 1974
11_~~-11_
RSS.~-----'
AD 3070 / Y.
AD3370/Y.
1-"
1- !-"
N
L/l
1--I- 1-
en
L/l
<D
!-"
r- p
_:y;
!-"
!--.
r-
I..- 1-
I- f-1-'
r- t---.
U"l
r-
1le::: 1......
p~
1,...--
I'
I't'--. '
I....._
r--..
~
~
N
I
0
0
U"l
1\
.::.c
1!..
-- -----
0
0
r-
0
0
_ _ _ _gc;,;
U"l
0
N
0
0
(J)
CO
<.0
0
U"l
October 1976
AD3590/X.
APPLICATION
For use in portable radios , tape recorders and, due to absence of stray magnetic field .
this loudspeaker can al so be used in television sets. High, sensitivity.
TECHNICAL DATA
version
X8
X4
Rated impedance
Voice coil resistance
Resonance frequency .
Powe r handling capacity,
measured without filter
loudspeaker unmounted
Sweep _voltage
Energy in air gap
F lux density
Air- gap height
Voice coil height
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
mass
Mass of lc;JUdspeaker
'
Xl 5
X25
X 50
25
50
Q
Q
15
3,4
7, 2
13,8
22 , 6
45
180
180
180
180
180
Hz
w
'
2, 4
3, 5
4, 7
6, 1
8, 7
39
39
39
39
39
0 ,8
0 .8
0 ,8
0 ,8
0.8
1,8
2, 55
2 ,8
2,9
mm
18
18
18
18
18
mm
mJ
T
mm
0, 13
0 , 13
0 , 13
mm
kg
0, 13
kg
The loud speaker has a paper su rround and a foam plastic gaske t on the flange .
t
'
October 1976
RS 'Z
.--
AD3590/X.
Dimensions (mm)
Baffle hole
130,9 124,5
ma x 0,2
-+-
l--.45 max
75,9 ma x -
7Z68218.1
Fig.l
One tag i s indicated by a r e d mark for in-phase connection
1.
AD 3590/X4 ,
AD 3590/XS,
AD 3590/XlS ,
AD 3590/X25,
AD 3590/XSO,
Fig. 2.
Input power 50 mW
Sound pressure measured in anechoic room, loudspeaker unmounted , Above
100Hz the sensitivity may be , over the width of one octave , maximum 2 dB
lower than indicated..
B58
October 1976
AD3590/X.
LOUDSPEAKER
0
N
Cl)
r-
~..--' ........
Cl)
1---"f..--
!.--"
.:t:
<D
--
r-
1\..
lD
f\.,
--
vV
"I'.
"I'-
!'-...
I'.
'\
r\.
I
0
1\
'
'\
......
0
0
N
I'I'-
0
0
0
lD
0
N
0
0
0
October 1976
CO
-o
(J)
CO
[:'-..
\D
lD
11
B59
-~
AD3880/X.
APPLICATION
For use in portable radios and tape recorders
TECHNICAL DATA
version
X4
X8
XIS
15
3, 4
7, 1
13,8
Resonance frequency
120
120
12b
Hz
2,8
5,5
5,5
55
55
55
mJ
mm
2,4
3, 1
2, 5
mm
mm
Rated impedance
~
:::::
=-
18
18
18
Magnet material
dia meter
weight
Fxd
Fxd
Fxd
53
0,1
53
0, 1
53
0, 1
mm
kg
Weight of loudspeaker
0,3
0,3
0,3
kg
March 1974
1_
136_1
_.
AD3880/X.
-50,2max34,1r'nax27,3
max
,;asx-... I,._
205,4 197
max max
184
0,2
t i
54,5 60
max max
!
baffle hole
_I I_
- - 74max-
72 ._
1min 11
7Z69094
Fig.1
1) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement at specified power handling
capacity.
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in -phase conn ection.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
t= 6
FREQUENCY RESPONSE CURVE
_ _ _ _ B62
_ll ~-~11
March 1974
AD3880/X.
LOUDSPEAKER
0
N
I' ~
"'
C7l
C7l
. ..,. ~ ~
ID
.....
..
:I:
0
~
1\
'J
IJ
Ill
[)
----
(
1\.
-:::
"'
"'
1""'oo
lt"
....
.....
''
::t:
0
0
"'
'r\
0
0
N
\
1--1-I-- I--
1--1-1--1-t--'I--
""'1'-.1'-."""' .......
X
0
(()
(()
0
0
.....
"
~
0
"'
C"")
1--1--
0
<{
0
N
0
~
October 1974
ID
"0
N
C7l
N
CID
N
N
.....
ID
"'
136:3
.~
~
AD3890/X.
11
11
APPLICATION
--
vers ion
X4
Rated impedance
xs
X IS
X25
X70
xsoo
15
25
70
800 Q
3,4
7,1
13,5
22,7
58
600 Q
Resonance frequency
12 0
120
120
120
120
120 H z
2,8
5,5
7,1
11, 8
40 V
39
39
39
39
39
0.8
0, 8
0,8
0 ,8
0,8
3 mm
2,4
2,8
2,5
2 ,8
4,8
5, 1 mm
18
18
18
18
18
18 mm
Ticonal
18
0 , 027
Ticona l
18
0, 027
Ticonal
18
0,027
Ticonal
18
0, 027
Ticonal
18
0 , 027
Ticonal
18 mm
0 , 027 kg
0 , 21
0, 2 1
0, 21
0, 21
0 , 21
39 mJ
0,8 T
0, 21 kg
October 1974
HAS
AD3890/X.
Dimensions (mm)
- s 2 . 4 max -
205,4 197
max max
184 .
:t0,2
.____ 74 max---.
Fig. 1
l) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone move ment at specified power handling
Capacity.
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in-phase connection.
~
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
I I
AD:3890/X4,
AD.1890/X8,
AD3890/Xl5,
AD3890/X25,
AD3890/X70,
AD3890 /X800 ,
catalogue
catalogue
catalogue
catalogue
c atalogue
catalogue
number
number
number
number
number
number
2422
2422
2422
2422
2422
2422
256
256
256
256
256
256
305 . l
305. 3
:305 . 4
.105. 5
305.6
305.2
1--- 2
~11
LOUDSPEAKER
AD3890/X.
....
en
0
en
<D
....N
~~
....
0
N
J7
I
.X
1\
"
[,o-11
ll
L(l
=
-
::::::
::::::
"
"""'
I"'
'
1\
0
0
N
"'---
--
r- r--
'
'
.......
""
en
CO
L(l
('I")
I-- -
.~
p:..
0
0
L(l
~
rI--
:I:
4:
I
N
0
~
([)
"0
0
N
en
N
CX>
....
N
N
<D
N
Ll'l
'
October 1974
AD4070/Y.
11
AD4470/Y.
APPLICATION
vers ion
Y4
Y8
y 15
Y25
15
25
3,5
7, 1
13,7
22,8
Resonance frequenc y
200
200
200
200
Hz
1,4
2,7
3,5
12.7
mJ
T
Rated impedcince
Energy in a irgap
12.7
12.7
12 .7
Flux density
0,74
0,74
0, 74
0, 74
Airgap height
2,5
2,5
2,5
2 ,5
mm
2, 7
2,2
3,6
mm
mm
10
Hi
10
10
Fxd
Fxd
Fxd
Fxd
31
0,02
31
0, 02
31
0, 02
31
0,02
0,079
0,087
0,079
0,087
0,079
0, 087
mm!ZI
kg
kg
kg
October 1974
J369
:::
---
AD4070/Y.
AD4470/Y.
Dimens ion s (mm)
- 95,6
m ox
I
I
I
I
I
-E
031.4max
1.-----------
I IL-+--+--'-
__1_
1,5 min 11
105max ----------- .
._.
28,5max
1Z6S91.5
~5,6
m ox
031,4max
._.l_.
1,5 min 11
- . 18max ..-
._.
28,5max
7Z65946
1) Baffle hole and c learanc e depth required for cone m ove me nt at the specified power
han dlin g capacity.
On e ta ge is indi ca te d by a red m ar k for in-phase conn ec tion.
n7n
11
October 1974
AD4070/Y.
AD4470/Y.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
Round fla nge version
r---(0 =stamped on loudspeaker magnet,
not to be used for order ing)
I
AD4070/Y4
AD4070/Y8
AD4070/Y 15
AD4470/Y8
October 1974
AD4070/Y.
AD4470/Y.
"'
"'
"'"'N
......
V
I(
,..
0
N
I/~
.:.:;
0
lL
c~---'
!"-..
--
]'.t)
N
<""
I'-
r---.
"1'\.
I
0
0
1\
V
r-
---
0
0
N
1-
I-r- r-
t- t-
0
0
0
0
B72
CD
"0
CJl
CO
0
<D
October 1976
11
AD4080/X.
AD4480/X.
APPLICATION
TECHNICAL DATA
X4
Rated impedance
version
XIS
X8
X25
15
25
3,4
7,1
13,8
22,6
Resonance frequency
165
165
165
165
Hz
2,45
3,5
4, 75
6, 1
55
55
55
55
m]
mm
2,4
3, 1
2,55
2,8
mm
18
18
18
18
mm
Magnet material
diameter
weight
Fxd
53
0, 1
Fxd
53
0, 1
Fxd
53
0, 1
Fxd
53
0, 1
mm
kg
Weight of loudspeaker
0 , 25
0,25
0,25
0, 25
kg
October 1974
II37_3
----
AD4080/X.
AD4480/X.
Dimensions (mm)
~~
0
0
--
--
V)
...
1ZII1lU.1
43max
J.-_ _ _ __,10""5..,2_ma_x_ _ _ __
7"-9=-.ma_,'+----14--
~39max
Fig. la Round flange vers ion
8 0
,-o,z
~~ -
~~
r r
I\J
I~
IV
19
I
,_ _ _ _ 0 105,2max - - - -
61
95,6 103,4
11
7261300.1
4,3max
~7, 9max
17,2
max
54.5
1-
October 1974
AD4080/X.
AD4480/X.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
Round flange version :
AD4080/X4
AD40 80/X8
AD4480/X4
AD4480/X8
..-.
t=
Input power SO mW
Sound pressure measured in anechoic room, l oudspeaker unmounted.
Above 1000Hz, the sound pressure m ay be, over the width of one octave,
maximum 2 dB l ower than indic ated .
.,.
'
October 1974
1375,_~---~~
AD4080/X.
AD4480/X.
....
0
en
N
CO
ID
, ..,.,..
....
,. -
-~-- i""""
~~
0
N
~~
J:
~
....
IJ
;,. <
--
\
~
Ill
~~
r-....
""""
c~
r-....
I')
~
l"'oo..
l'olo..
' 1'\
"
f---- I--
'~
~ l'o..
0
N
I"' ~
-xx
'
oo
CX)CX)
o..j'
0
Lll
.;:t..;:j
Cl Cl
<(<(
0
N
B76
en
N
00
N
....
..,
N
N
Ill
October 1974
AD4085/X.
AD4485/X.
11
APPLICATION
version
X8
X4
Rate d impedance
Voice coil resistance
3,4
7, 1
Resonance frequency
Power handling capacity ,
measured without filter,
lou dspeaker unmounted
Operating power (sound l evel 90 dB, l m)
Sweep voltage (75 to 20 000 Hz)
Mass of loudspeaker
0, 7
w
V
3, 5
mJ
T
1, 1
mm
2, 5
Air-ga p height
Magne t material
diameter
mass
Hz
38
Core diameter
150
2,5
Flux density
Hz
80 to 14 000
4,1
3,5
mm
mm
14
Ferroxdure
46
0,053
mm
kg
kg
0, 16
The loudspeaker has a paper rim. Connections to the loudspeaker can be made by mean s
of Faston s or by soldering.
October 1976
B77
-:
AD4085/X.
AD4485/X.
Dimensions (mm)
\:~ -~
- ..-"
0
a
46
52 95.6 103.4
max max max ma
J J
1
...
- - - - 105,2max - -
4. :3max
...
17.2
max
14
36.3max -
~~~-~
_. m
0
9
1-
- - - - 105,2max - - - --.
Fig.
1?.
46
52 95,6 103,4
max max max ma
7Z7516l
l.-4,3max
17,2 ,__
max
- 36,3max
B78
October 1976
AD4085/X.
AD4485/X .
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
Round fl ange t vpe
'
1----
(l
= s tamped
not
to
on loudspeaker magnet ,
be used for ordering)
3 = for bu lk packing*)
7 = for s ingl e unit packing
----
October 1976
879
AD4085/X.
AD4485/X .
0
N
>
~
~ 1-- ~
""""
,:,{_
..-
11"
_)
l::>
,)
'
>
.....
I~
',-
.......
......
<::
_.;.
.s
1-- 1-- b
1'-
......
I
0
0
Ln
<..._
I"
' '
.,..->
......
'
.D
"0
.......
.....
\.....- /
......
.......
-...
-~
,.....
..- -;:
,
k r:-
"')
' ["-..
i'-
0
0
0
0
..-
"".,,
"'.~
r- ......... \
r-... .......
0
~
........
.......
\
Ln
r-..
'
.......
::r- r- 1-.......
,,
r--- r- "-
'
0
N
0
0
0
B80
01
CO
0
lD
0
Ln
Octobe r 1976
AD4090/X.
11
11
APPLICATION
For portable rece ivers.
TECHNICAL DATA
version
X15
X8
Rated impedance
15
7,2
13,8
Resonance frequency
190
190
Hz
2, 8
3,9
39
39
rnJ
0,8
0,8
mm
1, 8
2,55
mm
mm
18
18
Ticonal
Ticonal
18
0,027
18
0, 027
mm
kg
o. 125
0,125
kg
\
The loudspeaker has a paper cone and surround.
\
\
October 1974
1381
---
AD4090/X.
Dimensions (mm)
r
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
11
I
I
I
I
I
..:
I
I
I
,I
I
-~
1-4--------
lA
'
I\
(\
--
I
I
7247121.3
3,2 _. 1...
max
... 14,4 .....
max
.,..17,6_..
max
105 max - - - - - - - - - . 1
Fig.1
-370max--.
I
1 ) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power
handling capacity.
r--- (0
1
AD4090 /X8
~')
Input power 50 mW
Sound pressure measured in anechoic room, loudspeaker unmounted.
Above 1000Hz the sound pressure may be, ovE<r the width of one octave,
maximum 2 dB lower than indicated.
B82
October 197 4
AD4090/X.
I
....
0
~~
....
"'....
Cl)
,~
ID
N
t"-
'
1,.
-..... """"
~
L/1
---
~ .
r>
~ loo..
'
f.- I -
'
:I:
0
0
"'
r--.. r....
0
N
~
0
0
0
0')
..j"
!--
October 1974
\.
...._
....
"'
.
X
r-...
re:: r--.
f- r-f.- r--
I 'I;;
t>
r-... r....
,...._ -
I-- ~ '""""
~
"'
ID
"t:J
....
"'
....
Q)
....
t"-
.... ....
0
....
"'
ID
11
13!l.1
AD4481 / X4
11
11
APPLICATION
With its !excellent power handling capacity very suitable for car radios.
TECHNICAL DATA
Rated impedance
Voice coil resistance
Rated frequency range
Resonance frequency
Power handling capacity,
measured without filter
loudspeaker unmounted
Operating power (sound level 90 dB, 1 m)
Sweep voltage (80 to 20000 Hz)
Energy in air gap
Flux density
Air gap height
Voice coil height
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
mass
Mass of loudspeaker
The loudspeaker has a textile surround.
August 1976
3,4
90 to 14000
Hz
140
Hz
0,8
' 3, 5
50
0 , 95
3
m]
T
mm
4, 4
mm
18
mm
Ferroxdure
mm
54
0, 1
kg
0 , 25
kg
--
AD4481/X4
\'
Dimensions (rrim)
4minll
n
u
54,5 103 ,4
max max
09611 I
~~--~-.--+-~"~..~..~,
_...
--.
0105,2 max - - - --
4-43max
17,2 .,__
max
- - - 39max-
Fig. 1
1) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power
handling capacity.
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in-phase connection.
A V AILABLE VERSION
'
c=
1386
Amrust L97f\
AD4481/X4
~r-~r~-.~-r-r-r,-~~r~-.~~,-~~~~~~~-.-.-r~~
~r-~~~-+-+~~1~~~--+~4r~~1-+-+-+-~~-+-+-+~~1~
,_V
~
~~~~=+=+=t~~~~i=t=t=~~=i=t=t=t:tj====~tj~
r-...
0
0
'
l[)
.~
I(
0
0
_o\
u/
N
"U
........
......... ......
-~I
"'"U
.......
u
.........
.........
"
'\
........
0
0
0
l[)
'
........ ',
.........
'
......... '
.........
' '
.........
......
0
N
0
0
AlH!'US
976
"
11
0
Ol
0
a:>
0
["'..
0
<.0
0
l[)
AD4681/M.
11
11
APPLICATION
A full range loudspeaker for car and domestic radios, tape recorders and portable re cord players.
This speaker has an extended frequency response up to 20kHz .
TECHNICAL DATA
version
M4
MS
M25
25 Q
'3,4
7,1
22,7 Q
Resonance frequency
.135
135
2,8
55
55
Airgap height
3 mm
3,9
4 mm
Rated impedance
135 Hz
6
7, 1 V
55 mJ
T
Flux density
Core diameter
Magnet materia l
diameter
weight
Weight of loudspeaker
18
18
18 mm
Fxd
53
0, 1
Fxd
53
0, 1
Fxd
53 mm
0, 1 kg
0,26
0 , 26
0,26 kg
The loudspeaker has a paper cone and surround and a foam plastic gasket on the flange .
1 07 4._
II_ __
AD4681/M.
Dimensions (mm)
2min 1l
Baffle hole
-.1,-
l.-141:h
r
I
I
.I
I
Ir
'k
I
I
I
r-
t r
f- 54.5 59 ,5
_l
154 117,5
max 0,2
mox mox
I
I
I
I
I
::::::
::::::
I
I
I
920,2
F ig . 1
J_5max
-. m24
ox
102max
I._
- 4 7,5 max -.
7Z6B 220
1) Baffle hole and c learance depth required for cone movement at spec ified power hand ling capacity.
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in -phase connection .
_ II
11
AD4681/M.
LOUDSPEAKER
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
I_
~(1
I'
October 1974
139
AD4681/M.
0
N
I""'
C7>
.....
f\:
Cl)
"'
N
.....
,,.,_
~ 1--
I--
:z:
.X
C>
<;
c~
lt
<:
~~
' I'..
'
:z:
0
0
Lt>
'\
1\
892
~ r-.....
,__
' r\.
0
C>
N
0
0
,...,
--~
CO
<D
0
Lt>
..;:t
Cl
<(
lXI
"C
N
C7>
N
Cl)
.....
..,.
N
C>
N
Lt>
11
nrrnh,:.,.. 1 0'7.A
AD4681/X.
11
11
TECHNICAL DATA
version
Xl5
X8
X4
Rated impedance
X2 5
Q
15
3, 1
7,1
13,5
Resonance fr equency
140
140
140
140
Hz
3, 5
4, 9
6, 7
8, 7
55
55
55
55
25
22, 7 Q
V
m]
Airgap height
Voice coil height
mm
3,9
3,2
mm
18
18
18
18
mm
Magnet material
diameter
weight
Fxd
53
0, 1
Fxd
53
0,1
Fxd
53
0, 1
Fxd
53
0, 1
mm
kg
Weight of loudspeaker
0,26
0,26
0 , 26
0 , 26
kg
Core diameter
The loudspeake r has a pape r cone and s urround and a foam plastic gasket on the flange.
October 1974
1 ~--~11 _
1191
AD4681/X.
Baffle h ole
Dimensions (mm)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
154 117,5
max 0,2
1.-141
......--
1-
_!
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
--
t ::
...
--
102max
Fig. 1
:h
54.5 59 ,5
max mox
! l
If
1..-smax
24
max
1. .
47.5max - -
7Z68220
1) Baft1e hol e and clea r ance depth required for cone movement at specified power
han dling capacity.
One tag i s indicated by a red mark for in-phase connection.
AVAILABLE VERSIO NS
1(0
1_
AD 46Sl/X4,
AD 4681/X8,
= stamped on
l oudspeaker magnet,
not to be used for ordering)
.
L_ 6 for singl e unit packing
F REQU ENCY RESPONSE CURVE
Fig.2.
Input power 50 mW
Sound pressure measured in anechoic room , loudspeaker unmounted. Above
1000 Hz t he sensit ivity may be , over the widt h of one octave, m aximum 2 dB
lower than indicated.
- -- - - -
!.,______1394~11 _~~~''
October 1974
AD4681/X.
LOUDSPEAKER
0
N
.;~V
I.- 1.---
~~
j..;'
J:
.X
0
....
L.ooo'
l...o'
(
I'
~I--"
11'
'
1/
I\t""- r--..
~
1- ~
'
'-
l"''o...
N
'
:I:
0
0
'1\f\
"'
"
0
0
N
~~
~~
e.- 1--
October 1974
.
X
.............
r-...
"'"'
0
0
CD
<0
..:t
"'
Cl
~
N
CD
l _ _ _ _ _l _
NN
"'
l 'lS
AD4682/X.
APPLICATION
For car and domestic radios, tape recorder s, portable record players and intercoms.
TECHNICAL DATA
Rated impedance
Vo ice coil resistance
X4
version
X 15
X8
X25
15
25
3, 1
7' 1
13,5
22,7
voltag~
Hz
HO to 13 000
140
Hz
w
w
0, 7
3,5
4,9
Energy in a ir gap
6, 7
8, 7
55
V
m.J
Flux density
Air-gap height
mm
4,4
Core diameter
Magnet mater ial
diameter
mass
Mass of loudspeaker
3,9
3,2
mm
18
mm
Ferroxdure
54
0, 1
mm
kg
0,25
kg
October 1976
11
____ lj _
_.B~
97
::::::i
::::::l
AD4682/ X.
LOUDSPEAKERS
Dimensions (mm)
155
Baffle hole
140
- 54.2 59,2
max max
11
,___ _ 800,2 _ __
.......
2mm
11
+-5,2
1--- - - - 95max - - - -- .1
27max
, . _ 51 ma x - . .
7Z7Son
Fig.l
1) Cl earance depth required for cone movement at the specified power handling capacity.
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in-phase connection .
AV AI LABLE VERSIONS
~
AD4682/X4,
AD4682/X8,
AD4682/Xl5,
AD4682/X25,,
catalogue
catalogue
catalogue
catalogue
number
number
number
number
2422
2422
2422
2422
257
257
257
257
306. 1
306. 2
306. 3
306. 4
f.---
139H
August 1976
AD4682/X.
0
('J
C"l
......
~~---
.::s:
0
..-
,)
"'
......
f"
<: IJ
I-,.
I"'-~
r-....
~ ......
/
1/
I
0
0
L[)
11
0
0
('J
~~~
I\. r-....
"0
u,....-: ~
........
.......
f-;::
0
0
..-
C"l
"0
.........
u
,, '
.......
........
........
...... ~'
I" ~'
.......
0
L[)
1'--.
--
r...... ........
'-........_
0
('J
..-
August 1976
Cl)
"0
.~
0
0
CO
I'-
lO
0
L[)
11
1399
AD4691/M.
11
11
APPLICATION
A full r ange loudspeaker with an e xtended frequenc y response up to 20 kHz. Due to absenc e of stray ticon a l s interpot magnetic field , this loudspeaker can be used for bl ack
and white as well as col our television sets.
TECHNICAL DATA
--
version
M4
MS
MI5
15
25
800
3,4
7, 1
13",5
22 , 7
600
Resonance frequency
135
135
135
135
135
Hz
2,8
5, 5
7, 1
40
39
39
39
39
39
mJ
0,8
0,8
Rated impedance
0,8
0 ,8
0,8
Airgap height
3,9
3,2
18
18
18
3
4
18
T ic omll
18
0,027
Ticonal
18
0 , 027
Ticonal
18
0, 027
Ticonal
18
0, 027
0 , 16
0, 16
0, 16
0, 16
::::::!
MSOO
M25
T
mm
5, 1
mm
.18
mm
Ticonal
18 mm
0, 027 kg
0, 16
kg
The loudspeaker has a paper cone and s urround and a foam plast ic gasket on the flange.
October 1974
J_Qj,_ _ ____.
AD4691/M.
Dimensions (mm)
Baffle hole
o~g
I
I
I
I
I
I
r--
I
154 117,5
max 0,2
-fI
--
I
I
I
I
...-
102max
Y+
-. I
32,2 59 ,5
max mOX
,___ _j
I
I
920,2
1..-141
If
/_5max
24
m ox
1. . .
----51 ,3 ma x -
7 Z68 219
Fig. 1
. 1) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement at the spec ified power
handling capacity.
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in -phase connection.
11102
October 1974
AD4691/M.
LOUDSPEAKER
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
AD469 1/M4,
AD469 1/M8 ,
1 ,.,
AD4691/M.
.,..
N
CO
CO
ID
.~
....
...... ......
0
N
J
N
::t:
..:.:
......
_,. I'"l
~""'
'
/
-
-E
(
""'""
''
......
~
1"-
"\
I\
~
''
r-.rr- r- ::::E
r- r- ..r- r- (1)
U)
- r- ..j
--
- -
0
0
N
'
0
0
"""
0
11'1
0
<{
0
N
13104
lXI
"'0
"'
GO
....
N
N
ID
N
1.0
AD4691/X.
11
11
APPLICATION
Due to absence of stray magnetic ticonal s interpot field, the l oudspeaker can be used in
black ru1d white as well as colour television sets.
High sensitivity at 3000 I-Iz . Frequency response up to 12 kHz.
TECHNICAL DATA
version
X4
_ Rated impedru1ce
X8
X15
X25
15
25
3,4
7,1
13,5
22 , 7
Resonance frequency
140
140
140
140
Hz
2,8
5,5
7, 1
39
39
39
39
mJ
0, 8
0,8
0, 8
0,8
Airgap height
mm
3, 9
3,2
mm
18
18
18
18
mm
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
weight
Weight of loudspeaker
0,027
0,027
0,027
0,027
0, 16
0,16
0, 16
0 , 16
mm
kg
kg
The loudspeaker has a paper cone and s urround and a foam plastic gasket on the flange.
______Dctober 197 4
11
---
--
AD4691/X.
Dimensions (mm)
r
I
I
I
I
I
I
lk ~
154 117,5
max 0,2
-. i
r-
32,2 59 ,5
max mox
I- --
-'
I
I
I
I
I
I
--
l.-1 41 : n
_j
1--
If
...
I
I
I
...
920,2
102max
Fig. 1
l.. smax
24
max
--
1.-
51,3max ~
7Z68219
1) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power
handling capacity.
One tag is _indicated by a red mark for in-phase connection.
AV AI LAB LE VERSIONS
AD 4691/X4,
Input power 50 mW
Sound pressure measured in anechoic room, loudspeaker unmounted .
Above 1000Hz sensitivity may be, over the width of one octave, maximum
2 dB lower than indicated.
!3106
October 197
AD4691/X.
..::t
ell
ell
"'r-N
::;;,o
~
......
I)
IJ
--
11 ~
I\
~
['..
~ IJ
"
!'-...
.....
"'b()
:I:
- iZ
11'1
1\
''"'
0
N
I'~
X
..............
0 ')
<D
0
11'1
..j
0
<t
0
N
0
.....
October 1974
m
"'0
N
0>
11
N
CID
r--
"'
11'1
11
Il l 07
JY7
AD4692/X.
APPLICATION
For colour television sets. Low stray field and high sensitivity .
::l
---==
TECHNICAL DATA
X4
Rated impe dance
Voice coil resistance
version
X15
X8
8
15
25
3,1
7,1
13,5
22 , 7
80 to 13 000
Hz
140
Hz
2,8
5, 5
7, 1
39
Flux density
1\ir gap height
Voice coil height
X25
Core diameter
mJ
0,8
T -
mm
3, 2
3,9
Magnet material
diameter
mass
mm
18
mm
T i conal
18
0 , 027
mm
kg
0 , 14
kg
August 1976
13109
AD4692/X.
LOUDSPEAKERS
Dimensions (mm)
155
m ox
m ox
so0,2- - -...
-5.2
27max
.,....__ 54,8 max------+- n7so1s
Fig.1
1) Clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power handling
capacity .
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in-phase connection.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
AD4692/X4,
AD4692/X8,
AD4692/X15,
AD4692/X25,
catalogue
catalogue
catalogue
oa<ioi!"e
number
number
number
nombe<
2422
2422
2422
2422
256
256
256
256
r-:--
308. 1
308.2
308. 3
(0
308~
131 10
August 1976
AD4692/X.
l.--- ~
/
)
[S
!.- 1--
ll"'p
f'.
--
t-
I< !::::>
I-I)
/
1\
N
I
0
0
U"l
Jr11
.oil"'
1
...
r-....
""'""
... v
"
.......
~ ~
0
0
N
0
CO
0
0
!"--.
j--....
........ ........
r-..::. t-::.:
0
CJl
17v
~
""-::
August 1976
...
['-..
"'Cl
1/
"'Cl
ro
bC
~
j!/
r-... 1--
0
0
--
....... j--....
r--..
- - --
r- r-:
0
<D
U"l
r--
r-.... .......
0
U"l
1 _~_11 ~
B lll ~--
1-
AD4890/X .
APPLICATION
I
For colour television sets. Low stray field, low resonance frequency, high sensitivity in
bass region.
TECHNICAL DATA
X4"
Rated impedance
Voice coil resistance
version
XIS
X8
3,4
7, l
ss
m>
13,5 22, 7
to 13
cfoo
Hz
110
Hz
w
w
0, 7
4
5, 7
7,8
10
0,8
mm
3
4, 5
3,9
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
mass
Mass of loudspeaker
3,2
18
Ticonal
18
0,027
0 , 23
V
m]
39
Flux density
X25
25
15
mm
mm
mm
kg
kg
August 1976
Bl13
AD4890/X.
210
max
197
32,5
max
170
max 0.5
60
max
- i - 2 mm0
-..
!--max
5.2
--+-
31 max
I...._
J._s7.8max--
.,-~ ~
Fig.!
1
) Clearance depth required for cone move ment at the specified power handling capacity.
catalogue
catalogue
catalogue
catalogue
number
number
number
number
2422
2422
2422
2422
256
256
256
256
307. 1
307. 2
307. 3
307. 4
1--
13 11 4
August 1976
AD4890/X.
--
LJ')
<I)
e--
..... ~
c--
I- .-
...... ~
('J
I
~
0
'
.....
,./
I
.......
,,......
......
~ ;:
-(
I= >
.-
r-
1-= ~ ~
>
I
}
'
I
0
0
l[)
-~
I
.D
,_
v
V
0
0
('J
'
"0
u,..-
.......
/
.....
""""
.,.
--
........ vf--
f.-
~~~
::.0
0
M
"0
' '
'
r---.
r-...;
l[)
'
r--
~~
'
''
...
"'
.......
0
('J
0
0
August 1976
0
(J)
a:>
0
lD
0
l[)
I.
AD5060/Sq.
11
11
For the reproduction of audio frequencies from 500 to 4500 Hz with very low distortion in multi-way high-fidelity loudspeaker systems in accordance with DI'N45500 . The loudspeaker has an excellent spherical radiation pattern . Rated frequency range 500 to 5000 Hz.
TECHNICAL DATA
version
Sq8
Sq4
Rated impedance
:::::l
3,4
6, 4 . Q
Resonance frequency .
210
210
Hz
40
w
w
V
V
40
Operating power
Sweep voltage
frequency range : 400- 5000Hz
filter high pass : 72 iJF- 2,1 mH (4Q)
36 iJF - 4, 5 mH (8Q)
3,5
140
140
0,93
0 ,93
Air-gap height
mm
6,8
mm
25
25
mm
FXD
72
0,23
FXD
72
0,23
mm
kg
0,8
0, 8
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
mass
mJ
T
6,8
Mass of loudspeaker
kg
The loudspeaker has a rubber surround and a sealed pot; no acoustic isolation r equired .
Connectiop. to the loudspeaker is by means of 6, 3 mm {0 , 25 inch) Fastons or soldering.
October 1976
,, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 11
--
Bll 7
AD5060/Sq.
2min 1 '
- 1._
096
11
107max
-l__l___
,o
_.9__
max
1190.2
1 - - - - - - 128,4max ---------<~ 1
107max
--------<~ 1 7Z61795.1
Fig.l
1) Baffle hole and clearance depth r equired for cone movement at the specified power
handling capacity.
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in-phase connection .
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
(see Fig. 2)
R1 1R
_ll~--~11
October 1976
AD5060/Sq.
0
N
~ 1--"
~ :;::.
:r
.X
0
<lli
~
IJ
cp
~
\
:/
. . .v
1~
I
.a
N
"'C
lr ~
""'
CT
(J)
...... ......
\=........
......
""'~o...
l{)
..... .....
<{
"'
0
0
"'
0
0
: r-
-......~--..
'
..... .....
...-..
-,:_
"",-o ',
u, I
, !.D
- r-- 0
/"
...........
.~
N
:r
0
0
I'
r-....
"'
"'.::t
-az
0
0
I--
... ,~"
I.J
--
J'
('::
"'
~--
r-...
0
N
0
October 1974
en
N
CD
....
N
<D
"'
"'
13119
j:I;
AD5061/M.
11
11
version
M4
a l ~o
MS
4
3, 4
85
85
Hz
10
10
3. 2 '
4. 5
E nergy in a irgap
127
12 7
mJ
o. 87
o. 87
6,5
,6 , 5
mm
25
25
mm
Fxd
72
0. 26
Fxd
72
0 , 26
mm
kg
0,665
0 , 665
Flux de ns ity
Airgap height
Voice coil height
Core dia m eter
Magnet m aterial
di ameter
weight
Weight of loudspeaker
The loud s peaker has a textile surround and a foam plastic gasket on the flange.
October 1974
T
mm
kg
---
AD5061/M.
Dimensions (mm)
----1--
75
107
ma x
max
7Z68214 .1
_..,/.-4,95 max
-24,4max l.- - 5416 max--
1.------------121ma x
Fig . 1
1) Baffle hole and clearanc e depth required for cone movement at the specified power
handling capacity.
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in -phase connection.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
r1,
13122
October 1974
AD5061/M.
LOUDSPEAKE R
-11
[";;;
.oil
~~~'~+-+-~~-+-+-+~~~+-+-~~-+-+-+~~8
\~
~~~~~~~~~-~~j:t=t=t=~~==t=t=t~==t=~~
I'.
October 1974
BJ:,n
l. AD5061/Sq.
5 inch HIGH POWER SQUA WKER LOUDSPEAKER
APPLICATION
For the reproduction of audio frequencies from l:lOO to 5000 Hz with very low di s torti on
in mul ti-way high-fidelity loudspeaker sys tems in acc o rdance with DI N45500. The loudspeaker has an excellent spherica l radiation pa ttern.
,Rated imped:mcc
Voice coil resistance
version
Sq4
Sg 8
:::::l
~2
3,4
~~
Resonance frequency
680
Hz
1300 tO 5000
Hz
10
w
w
10
Operating power
Sweep voltoge
fr equency r ange : .300-5000 Hz
high pass filt e r: 24 !lF - 0, 4 mH
12 !lF - 0 , 8 mH
Energy in a ir gap
F l ux den-sity
Air- gap height
Voice coil height
Co r e di a meter
Magnet mate rial
dia meter
mass
Mass of lou ds peake r
3, 5
5
140
V
V
mJ
0 ,93
5
mm
6 ,8
mm
25
mm
Ferroxdure
72
0 , 23
mm
kg
0 ,8
kg
Octobe r I 976
Dl25
AD5061/Sq .
Dimensions (mm)
1TI
'""'
I
I
I
I
I
--
iI
r---1
--
76
96 12 9
max max ma
I
I
I
I
I
.L
7Z75164
'--5max
20,1
max
I_
-49,5max -
Fig.l
1
) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power
handling ea pacity . .
r---
'
Bf26
October 1976
AD5061/Sq.
LOUDSPEAKER
L.if"
- -..,.
.JJ
tl
~I)
L{)
L)
'-....
..,....
..
[7
::.
,_
'
"' ""'~
---
t>
" ""'r-...
'I'-~
f'..,
I-
..0
I
0
0
L{)
,-~
1'-
. .-- t-- - ..
,.,
1'-I'-
"0'
I"
--
i'...
"
t-
r-..... ~
f-..
('J
0
0
.......
0
L{)
0
('J
0
0
0
0'>
CO
0
tD
0
L{)
127
AD5081/M.
APPLICATION
Double cone loudspeaker for car and domestic radios, tape recorders, porta ble r ecord
players and intercoms.
TECHNICAL DATA
M4
Rated impedance
Voice coil resistance
version
M8
M15
M25
15
25
3,4
7, 1
13,5
22 , 7
Hz
70 to 20 000
3, 5
135
Hz
0, 7
4, 9
6, 7
8, 7
55
mJ
Flux density
Air-gap height
Voice coil height
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
ma s s
Mass of loudspeaker
mm
3
4, 4
3, 2
3, 6
18
Ferroxdure
53
0, 1
0 , 25
mm
mm
mm
kg
kg
The loudspeake r has a paper surround and a foam plastic gasket on the flange.
8129
AD5081/M.
Dimensions (mm)
105,6 120
max 0,2
7Z15016
1 . - - - - 0940,3 ----11
1 - - - - 0970,3 - - -- 1
Fig.!
1) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power
handling capacity.
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in-phase connection.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
AD508l/M4, catalogue number 2422
AD5081/M8, catalogue number 2422
AD508l/Ml5, catalogue number 2422
AD508l/M25,
''"'''""' nmnbe< 2422
r--
257 357 . 5
257 357. 6
257 357.7
257
m~
2 = for bulk packing*)
6 = for single unit packing
13 1:30
11
Aug!!st 1976
AD5081/M.
I
(X)
""
0
N
1.--"v
en
.;:t
c-N
c--
LOUDSPEAKERS
./
I
.:;{.
f...
f
I-
-,.
li)
'
"""'I
==
......,
'
)
)
I
0
0
li)
I"
1- f.-
_o)
, '
/
0
0
N
I
I
'
~~
"0
~
7
,u
'\
rr
0
0
........ .......
''
-f-
I
I
... ...
~~
--- u
"""0
...
_
... ...
li)
~""--
.........
........
r-.
...
---
0
N
I
0
0
~
August 1976
oil
~
ro
"'0
(]l
CO
1:'-
(!)
0
li)
11
131 :n
AD5081/X.
TECHNICAL DATA
X4
Rated impedance
Voice coil resistance
version
XIS
X8
8
15
25
3,4
7, l
13,5
22 , 7
Hz
60 to 14 000
Resonance frequenc y
Power handling capacity,
measured without filter,
loudspeaker unmounted
Operating power (sound level 90 dB, l m)
Sweep voltage (70 to 20 000 Hz)
X25
140
Hz
w
w
0, 7
3,5
4,9
6, 7
8, 7 -
ss
m]
Flux density
Air-gap height
Voice coil height
mm
3
4, 4
3,2
3,9
Core diamete r
Magne t material
diameter
mass
mm
18
mm
Ferroxdure
53
0, 1
mm
kg
0,25
kg
October 1976
11
-=
AD5081/X.
Dimensions (mm)
5,2:!:0,1
'
60
105,6 120
7Z75016
1---- 094.:!:0.3 - - - - .q
1---- - 0970,3 - - - - 1
-
31,7max
..__ 48,5 max __...
Fig.l
1) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power
handling capacity.
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in-phase connection .
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
r----
257 357.1
257 357 . 2
257 357 . 3
257 357b
2 =for bulk packing*)
6 = for single unit packing
w in
13134
August 1976
AD5081/X. ,
0
N
...... ~ V
1-
I
..X:
17
If
Lfl
1'- 1- ~
,\
~
1..,-
r-.... ...... ~
~
_. ~
1-- 1--
::::
N
1-- .......
........
I
0
0
Lfl
I/
[/
.0)
'
v- ~ v f/
vv- ~v
"0
.......
17
I'..
August 1976
l-':
0
a:>
Lfl
t- t-
"'
0
~":.:,
(j)
-~
"0
"~
t---
0
0
N
t-:::.: ~
'
t- tr-.;;:
t-
0
(!)
0
N
0
Lfl
13135
;:::
AD5780/M.
11
11
version
M15
MS
M25
15
25
3,4
7, 1
13, 5
22,7
Resonance frequency
100
100
100
100
Hz
2; 8
5, 5
8, 7
Rated impedance
53
53
53
53
Q,98
0,98
0, 98
0,98
V
mJ
T
Air-gap height
mm
3,9
3,2
mm
Core diameter
18
18
18
Magnet material
diameter
mass
18 , mm
FXD
53
0, 1
FXD
53
0,1
FXD
53
o. 1
FXD
53
0, 1
mm
kg
Mass of loudspeaker
0,32
0 , 32
0, 32
0,32
kg
The loudspeaker has a paper surround and a foam plastic gasket on the flange .
October 1976
Rl:n
:::
--
AD5780/M.
Dimension s (mm)
182,5
mox
-_:.. 1.._5,3 ma x
-+ 33,Sma xl.._
I..-----132,Smax - - - -..1
7Z68217.1
Fig.!
1) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power
handling capacity.
One tag is indicated by a r ed mark for in-phase connection .
AVAI LAB LE VERSIONS
AD 5780/M4 ,
AD 5780/M8 ,
1_
c2
"
for bulk packing')
6 for singl e unit packing
Input power 50 mW
Sound pressu:re measured in anechoic room , loudspeaker unmounted.
Above 1000Hz the sensitivity may be, over the width of one octave , maximum
2 dB lower than indicated.
131:3 8
,_ _ _o- ..
c _tober 1974
AD5780/M.
1..' ~
"'
CiD
"'.....N
CO
0
N
...
loo""
:r
:.0:
0
"'I
~
I<
111
"' ~
i'l
1,... l,...o-
......
" '--
'
'
"
f- ff-- f-
.........
f-- f--
CO
f- f-
0
0
f-- f--
f-- f--
1\
"~
..... loo..
!".
r--
""
LC')
Cl
<{
0
N
0
.....
'
October 1974
al
"C
N
C7>
11
N
CO
....
"'
""
11
81:39
AD5780/X.
11
TECHNICAL DATA
version
XIS
X8
X4
Rated impedance
X25
15
25
Q
Q
3, 4
7, 1
13,5
22, 7
Resonance frequency
llS
llS
llS
llS
Hz
3,4
3, 5
4,8
6, 1
55
55
55
55
0,98
3
V
mJ
0,98
0,98
0,98
Airgap height
3,9
3, 2
mm
18
mm
Flux density
T
mm
18
18
18
Magnet material
diameter
weight
Fxd
53
0, 1
Fxd
53
0, 1
Fxd
53
0, 1
Fxd
53
0, 1
mm
kg
Weight of loudspeaker
0,32
0,32
0,32
0 , 32
kg
Core diameter
The loudspeake r has a paper surround and a foam plastic gasket on the flange.
October 1974
11
8141
AD578Q/X.
Dimensions (mm)
182,5
max
..... l....
s,3max
--.. 33,5maxl....
.._ 57max --
7Z68217.1
Fig. 1
1) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power
handling capacity.
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in-phase connection.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
I
I.
AD 5780/X4,
AD 5780/XS,
(0
= stamped on
loudspeaker magnet,
not to be used for ordering)
c2
fo r bulk packing*)
P ig.2.
lnput power 50 mW
Sound pressure measured in anechoic room, loudspeaker unmounted.
Above 1000Hz the sensitivity may be, over the width of one octave, maximum
2 dB lower than indicated.
Bl42
11
_ _ _ II
October 1974
AD5780/X.
CO
Cl)
..,
V
1.-o"'
Cl)
.....
~
1-
,_
0
N
~~
:r
.X
0
~
"'
v j..)
!"-.. !'-...
r\
f'
1..... ~
.... .....
~
........
'-
1"\.
:r
0
0
...,
\.
~
f\
0
0
N
I\
1'f-- f-f-- f-f-- f--
-X
0
0
r--... ......
CO
"""'0
...,
['
Ln
0
<{
0
N
0
~
October 1974
"0
N
0>
11
N
CO
r--
..,
""
11
13143
AD5790/M.
11
11
APPLICATION
Due to abs ence of s tray magnetic ticonal sinterpot field, the loudspeaker can be used in
black and white as well as colour television sets . High sensitivit y at 3000Hz.
TECHN ICAL DATA
version
M8
M15
15
3,4
7, l
13,5
Resonance frequency
100
100
100
Hz
2, 8
5, 5
M4
Rated impedance
39
39
39
0,8
0,8
0, 8
m]
Airgap height
m1n
3,9
3,2
mm
18
18
18
mm
Ticonal
18
0,027
Ticonal
18
0 , 027
Ticonal
18
0,027
mm
kg
0 , 22
0 , 22
0 , 22
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
weight
Weight of loudspeaker
kg
The. loudspeaker has a paper surround and a foam plastic gasket on the flange.
October 197 4
Bl45
AD5790/M.
Dimensions (mm)
-.
182,5
- 32,5
m ox
m ox
_+
1------132,5 max
-+-
------<~1
33,5 maxi
-s1.Smax-
7Z68216 .1
Fig. 1
1) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power
handling capacity.
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in -phase connection .
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
t=
\
I
13146
October
a97 4
AD5790/M.
"'
CO
CO
ID
0
N
I
.:Jt.
0
N
r-
1/
~~
)~
~
\~
"""""
"""""
"
\.
:I:
0
0
1\.
' ' 1\
"'
...
'
'~
'
1-- I--
0
0
1">1..
"'-
0
N
'
.......
..........
~
0)
["--
"'
L{')
0
<{
N
0
October 197 4
ID
"'0
"'
N
CO
N
ID
"'
Bl47
.~
AD5790/X.
11
11
. APPLICATION
Due to absence of stray magnetic Ticonal sinterpot field, the loudspeaker can be use d in
black and white as well as colour television sets . High sensitivity at 3000 Hz.
TECHNICAL DATA
version
X8
X4
Rated impedance
Voice coil resistance
3, 4
7,1
Resonance frequency
Power handling capacit y,
measured withoot filter ,
loudspeaker unmounted
Operat ing power
Sweep voltage
' 115
Hz
0, 7
2, 45
0,8
mm
3,9
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
mass
Mas,s. of l oudspeaker
V
in]
39
mm
18
mm
T iconal
18
0, 027
mm
kg
0,22
kg
The loudspeaker has a treated paper .su rround and a foam pl astic gasket on the flange.
October 1976
11
B149
-:
AD5790/X.
--. \
182,5
max
- 32,5
max
_+
1)
,+~o
~sL .
'
max ,
_. 33,5max l..
--61.5max-
-----1100,2 - - -
------132 ,5 max
-..
------<~1
1. . . 5,3
. I
-160-
Fig . l
1
) .Baffle hol e and clearance depth r equ ire d for cone movement at the specified powe r
handling capacity .
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in - pha:;e connection.
AV AILABLE VERSIONS
(0
= stamped on
13150
October 1976
AD5790/X.
~
~ 1---'
N
('J
~~
a>
CD
I.D
I
.Y
<-
./
<
L[)
""'
........
~~
<~
........
'
('J
<::::: )
...... ......
<
IC:::
le:::::
I,-)
I
0
0
f'...
L[)
..D)
l/
c::::
1-- 1--
v
...- :.,...-
0
0
"0
t)
('J
.......
--
......
"0
t)
'
........
1"---
!'...
,
-t
'........
,-
',
-'
''
,,
0
0
-- -- .r---..
" I'
, ,
'
---
L[)
-- - -
0
('J
c:i
0
01
CO
October 1976
eo
iL:
0
lD
0
L[)
Bl51
AD6980/M.
11
11
TECHNICAL DATA
version
M4
Rated impedance
M8
4
3, 4
7, 1
Resonance frequency
77
77
Hz
3, 5
4. 9
53
53
0 ,98
0 , 98
V
mJ
T
mm
3,9
mm
18
18
mm
Magnet material
diameter
weight
Fxd
53
0. 1
Fxd
53
0, 1
mm
kg
Weight of loudspe.aker
0 , 36
0,36
kg
The loudspeaker has a papet s urround a nd a foam plastic gasket on the flange .
October 1974
B153
AD6980/M.
Baffle hole
3min11
_.. 1-
R144
'~+
~
t
54,2 72 ,5
max
--
max
7Z68221
1-
----
117,50.2
_I
160,6mox - - - - - - <.. 1
-s6,75mox_.
F ig.!
1) Baffle hole a nd clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power
handling capa.c ity.
One tag is indicat'ed by a red m a rk for in-ph as e connection.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
~
1~
F ig . 2. Input power 50 mW
Sound pressure measured in anechoic room , loudspeaker unmounted.
Above 1000Hz the se ns itivity m ay be . over the width of one octave, max imum
2 dB l ower than indicated.
- - - - HLE.<i
October 1974
AD6980/M.
0
N
....
j,...ooo
J.l'
0:
c;;
;;;
t~
"'.....N
.:.:
C)
~
.,.
!'\
~
~I>
'~
::;j
::;j
l"o...
I/
it
' I""K
N
N
I
0
0
"'
1\
I\
.
f-- f--
f-- +--
0
CO
i - +--
.....
i - +-
N
0
0
0
1,.
--
I- +-
'
0
0
N
lD
I-
"'C
October 197 4
"'
~t--
<(
ID
0
N
en
N
CO
.....
"'
"'
.11
8 155
.~
""
AD6980/X.
TECHNICAL DATA
version
X4
Rated impedance
X8
4
3. 4
7. 1
Resonance frequency
90
90
Hz
3.5
4,9
53
53
0.98
0,98
m]
mm
3,9
mm
18
mm
Magnet m aterial
diameter
weight
Fxd
53
0, 1
Fxd
53
0, 1
mm
kg
Weight of loudspeaker
0,36
0,36
kg
di amete:~;
18
Core
....
The loudspea ker has a paper surround and a foam plastic gasket on the flange.
October 1974
11~-~~11 _
815 7 _ _ __
AD6980/X.
Dimensions (mm)
144
'
220--=r-
233,6
54,2 72,5
max
m ox
---
max
7Z68221
c:::::
F ig. 1
,,.__ _ _ 160,6max
-+- --s,3max
-+- 43,4 maxi.-4-66,75max-+-
------<~ '
1). Baffle hole a nd clearance depth required for cone m ovement at the s pecified power
ha ndling capacity.
One tag is indic ated by a red m ark for in -phase connection.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
1------c- 2 for
~' )Minimum
lll_58
October 1974.
AD6980/X.
N
0>
CX)
' <D
N
....
-- -- _,
,...I-'
--::.
1-
0
N
...
:r
.
0
)
,..._
Ll>
j....o ~
f'. ~
<~
--"'
==
~~
~)
!oo..
...
0
0
Ll>
.:r
"~
-~
I\
~
-
- - - -- - -
.
X
0
0
N
'
0
0
'
............
0
CO
!-.....
0)
(0
0
<(
....... .......
....... ......
"'
'
N
0
October 1974
m
"'C
N
CID
....
N
"'
........
U'l
--~~~n
~ls 9
______
AD7060 / W.
version
W4
WB
4,3
45
45
Hz
30
Rated impedance
Voice coil resistal}ce
Resonance frequency
30
6,3
6,3
Sweep voltage
frequency range 35 - 5000 Hz
3,8
5,3
135
140
0,87
0,93
mm
11
11
mm
25
25
mm
Flux density
Air- gap height
Voice coil height
Core diameter
m]
Magnet material
diameter
mass
FX D
72
0,26
FX D
72 mm
0,26 .kg
Mass of loudspeaker
0,68
0,68
kg
11
B161
AD7060/W.
D1menswns (mm)
h c---,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
0141 11
I~
--
--
I
I
I
I
I
~a
I
I
l j
73,5 94 14
ma x max m ax
7l70289
1... 8,1max
33,9 max i ~
42,7 max
- 4 - 6 7,Sma x--+
--
Fig. I
1) Baffle hole and clearance depth r e quire d for cone movement at the specified power
handling capacity .
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in-phase connection.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
~
1
(1
= stamped
on loudspeake r magnet,
not to be used for ordering)
L_
L_
Bin2
October 97n
AD7060 / W.
0
N
0
0
CD
0
....
....N
17'
!..--'
~
v .....
l)
1<:
1\
i\
...,I/
[)
,' 1-'
/
-~
11
"
0
0
Lll
Lll
-::t
.Cl
~~
ul
1\
"' ~
-o
a>
11
, 1- '
- ,.,
-o
V
,,
0
0
<.0
CD
,
1\
<t
N
0
0
0
1\
['
1--1--
0
LO
~ I/
1-- ~
.,V
~
'- 1-'- '- ~
1-- 1--
:r:
, , !--
0
LO
'
1\..
hi
N
CO
,,
'
\rt---.1--t-......
0
N
o.D
Lll
11
BJ63
AD7062/M.
11
11
TECHNICAL DATA
M4
ve rsion
M8
4,3
Resonance frequency
45
45
Hz
30
30
Sweep vo ltage
3,8
5,3
Energy in a ir. ga p
135
140
0 ,87
0 , 93
Rated impedance
Operating power
Flux density
Air- gap he ight
Vo ice coil he ight
Core
diame~er
n
n
V
mJ
T
mm
11
11
mm
25
25
mm
Magnet material
cliamete1
mass
FXD
72
0,26
FXD
72
0,26
111111
0,68
0,68
kg
kg
.::
-"'"'
AD7062/M.
r "'""
h l
- -~
I~
0141 11
-----
--
+-
73,5 94 14
max max m QX
IQ
.......
l
7Z70289
1.-8,1 ma x
33,9 max i-.
4 2,7 max
67,5max
1--- - - - - 155,2max - - - - --
F ig. l
---
1) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement a t the specified power
handling capacity .
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in-phase connection.
AV AI LAB LE VERSIONS
~
(0
/,
AD7062/M4, catalogue number 2404 257 460. 1
= stamped
on loudspeaker magnet ,
not to be used for ordering)
L__ 6
= for
See Fig. 2
Cu rve b: Sound press ur e measured in a nechoic room at operat ing power. Loudspeaker
mounted in sealed 80 l enclosure, filled with 1 kg of glass wool.
Curve c : z!!_<:! and ~ harmonic distortion, meas ured at the operating power of 5 W in
anechoic room, loudspeaker mounted in sealed 80 l e nclosure, fill ed with 1 kg
of glass wool.
October 1974
AD7062/M.
....
CO
N
0
~~
....
....N
1- ~ ~
le...
~
:r
~
r'
'~
<'\.
,"
...
\\
le
.,..V
'
/ c.: .::
'
'
0
0
Lll
Lll
~
I"
:::: ~
p..
- - - -
>(
<.D
"'
October 1974
.,
!"
... _
f-.-
0
!:'"--
.........
..,
"0
I'
<{
... _.....
\..
'\
0
0
\
- - - -
Lll
~~
...
:I:
0
.0
-~
L,..ooi""
11'
en
N
Cl)
1,...
V
'
~:
--
"
~ '=--
...cI"
__ r,;T
..,
..
Lll
"'"0 I?
..,
....
N
NN
Lll
Bl67
AD7063/M.
11
11
TECHNICAL DATA
version
M4
MS
:I
3,4
Resonance frequency
. 55
55
Hz
15
15
2,2
2,2
Sweep voltage
4, 5
6,3
127
127
m}
0,87
0,87
mm
6,8
6 ,8
mm
mm
Rated impedance
Flux density
Air- gap height ,
Voice coil height
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
mass
Mass of loudspeaker
25
25
FXD
72
FXD
72
0,26
0,26
0, 745
0 , 745
---
mm
kg
kg
AD7063/M.
Dimens10ns (mm)
73 .5 94 142
max maxmax
f"""1----...r..---!-j
j
7Z45691 ,4
Fig . l
I.-7,Bmax
-43max+- - 69max -
(0
= s tampe d
on loudspeaker magnet,
not td be used for ordering)
(se ~
Fig . 2)
AD7063/M.
(If
--
I[)
CO
1-- 1-- ~
I[)
<D
,..._
1--
,_
--
I
~
-~
<.
L{)
(
~
(',/
le:;
>
//
----
'
1'.
b
L{)
L{)
biJ
-'
<::.: ~
1\
/
N
"0
........
l'o..
'
-
f-
N
0
October 1974
"""0
-....
--
\t
tD
'\
0
I:'
1".
~
("')
......
.........
0
<(
N
CJ)
N
<0
- - If
'
'
V
,
&::
t7
0
0
0
0
..
_,
0
L{)
......... \.
. .........
L{)
IJ
.D
1-- , 00
'
'-
"
........
0
N
lO
1317 1
AD7066/MFB
11
11
For application in small enclosures with very low bass Fesponse down to 40 Hz with
excellent distortion suppression.
The loudspeaker has a built- in acceleration sensor.
TECHNICAL DATA
Rated impedan~e
Voice coil resistance
4,3
Resonance frequency
39
Hz
40
Operating power
Sweep voltage
frequency range: 35-3000 Hz
7, 5
225
mJ
Flux density
1, 1
mm
11
mm
25
mm
Magnet material
diameter
mass
FXD
90
0,45
mm
kg
Mass of loudspeaker
1, 15
kg
October 1976
B173
:::
=I
AD7066/MFB
Dimen swns (m m)
45min 11
~~~-
-,
1..-------------~
I
I
I
I
!ll141 111
91,8
max
94 142
max max
j j
i::
7Z7Sl6S
<)
BFW11
voice c oil
c:::::::::J
72701120
: r e d ma r k fo r in -phase connection
accele r ation
sen sor
:
""'
e blue m a rk
Fig .l
1 ) Ba ffl e hole and moun ting clearance depth 1equ ire d fo r cune rr.f>VE'ment at the s pecified
power h<m dl ing capacity.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
I (O =s tamped on lou dspeake r magnet ,
1
not tci be use d for order ing)
number 2422 257 470 . 5
t--- 2 = for bul k packing* )
L_ 6 = for s ingl e unit packing
A D8067 /MFB,
c~ta l ogue
'-------B174
~"~~~~11
October 1976
AD706 6/MFB
-<
......
......
.....
I-Ir- i-" 1~
~ r-
i-"
I
.:::
.-
!-=
"'r---..
N
~
~
I
\
0
0
lD
r.;:
~~
1\
-1'
j_ V
'
--
,..,
r'\.
"0
l)
'
,-
'
1
I
, -- -- -- --
.-
:1
lD
/)
,-;:
_,
"0
l)
>
'
......
0
0
0
0
0
N
0
0
0
n rtnhP_r L971\
aJ
'0
""biJ
a>
CO
['-
0
<.D
0
lD
8175
AD7066/MFB
FEEDBACK LOUDSPEAKER
Test conditions:
Loudspeaker unmounted.
Inpu t at voice coil connections: 0 , 44 V (50 mW I 4 0 )
T est circuit
10kfi
sensor
7Z70e21 ..1
:I'
Fig.3
7Z74432
+20
dB
+10
-10
I
./
'I'-
11
/
-20
-30
10
20
50
100
500Hz
200
10kHz
20
Fig.4
13176
11
Q.ctQber 1276
AD7066/MFB
Phase rel ation between output voltage of acceleration sensor and inEut voltage on voice
coil
-- -: Vout lagging
I
+: Vou t leading
7Z7443 1
-90
I
I
-60
......,
--
-3 0
/
I
0
:::i
'-'
"""
1 //
/ V
+30
1/
+60
+90
I
1/
+120
/
1/
+150
V
+180
1--
10
50
20
100
500Hz
200
1 '
10kHz
Fig.S
Curve 1: loudspeaker unmounted: fres =.19Hz.
Curve 2: l oudspeaker mounted in seale d 9 1 enclosure: fres =lOO Hz .
,....
0"1~
11
l3177
20
AD7066/W.
11
11
APP LICATION
For. high fidelity reproduction in sealed acoustic enclosures in accordance with DlN45500.
Maximum enclosure volume 7 1.
Maximum recommended cross-over frequency 2000Hz. High power handling capacity
with very low distortion.
TECHNICAL DATA
version
W4
WB
Rated impedance
4,3
Resonance frequency
45
45
Hz
40
40
Sweep voltage
3,8
5,3
Energy in a ir gap
225
207
m]
1' 1
1, 2
mm
Operating power
F lux density
Air- gap height
Voice coil height
11
11
mm
Core diameter
25
25
mm
Magnet material
diameter
mass
FXD
90
0,45
FXD
90
0 ,,45
mm
kg
1, 15
1, 15
kg
IJ .
Jl~
B179
'
AD7066/W.
Dimensions (mm)
45 min 11
~,-
---, ~~~---------------------~
I
I
I
I
I
I
!2l141
I
111
91,8
max
94
142
max ma x
jj
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
7Z68781.2
Fig.1
1) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power
handling capacity.
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in -phase connection .
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
L_ 2
L_ 6
B180
October 1976
AD7066/W.
LOUDSPEAKER
Fig. 2
Curve b: Sound pressure measured in anechoic room , loudspeaker mounted in sealed 80 l
enclosure , filled with l kg of glass wool.
Curve c: Total non -linear distortion, measured at the operating power of 4 W in anechoic
room, loudspeaker mounte d in sealed 80 l e nclosure, filled with 1 kg of gl ass wool.
Loudspeaker front mounted on baffle , dimensions 640 x 540 mm.
:::::l
13181
AD7066/W.
0
N
0
(I)
.....
(I)
"'N
.....
..l<
~~
...... 1
.J
---
~~
--
V
./
~)
/V
,.
V
N
~~
'
"'bJJ
0
0
Ll1
Ll1
- I'\
0
0
.0
'
'\
'
......
""""
'-------'"'13
1K2
"'0
"'
(I)
0
Ll1
'
')
....
-o
'
0
0
<(
0
Ll1
['
,..--
3=
r-- r-- ....._
r-- r-- <D
<D
r-- r-- 0
1-- 1--
i\
1-- 1--
r
0
r-- r--
Nf-"'0
,,
0
N
......
"'
~~~ ~~~~~
N
Ll1
October 1974
AD7080/M.
11
11
For car and domestic radios, acoustic enclosures and public .address systems .
Frequency range up to 15 kHz .
TECHNICAL DATA
M4
version
M8
M15
15
3,4
7,1
13,5
Resonance frequency
105
105
105
Hz
2,8
6, 7
55
55
53
mJ
0,98
0,98
0,98
Rated impedance
=
:::
Airgap height
mm
3,9
3,2
mm
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
weight
Weight of 'loudspeaker
18
18
18
mm
Fxd
53
0, 1
Fxd
53
0, 1
Fxd
53
0, 1
mm
kg
0, 29
0,29
0,29
kg
The loudspeaker has a paper surround and a foam plastic gasket on the flange.
I
'
107 1.1
11_~-~.11
AD7080/M.
Dimenswns (mm)
3m in 11
_] 1-k- - -----,
I
I
11
0 141 :
54,5 8 3 142
mox mox mox
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
::
--
-r~-
. ...
7Z68212
~ 34,1~ a xl+-
155,2 mox
5emo x _ .
Fig. 1.
1) Baffle h ole and clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power
h andling capacity.
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in-phase connection.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
t=
Bl84
AD7080/M.
"'""00
~~
ID
0
N
.,.,.
.....
{
"""
......
...... ~
~
~"" [>
)
(
.....
\..
J:
"'\
0
0
lt>
''~
\
- - -
r-- -
f--
....
October 1974
-~
0
0
"'
''
(X)
0
0
...._
'
11'1
['
0
<(
ID
"0
"'
"'
00
N
.....
....
....
0
N
Ll>
ID
11
BIBS
AD7080/X.
11
11
TECHNICAL DATA
vers ion
X8
X4
Rated impeda nce
3, 4
7,1
Resonance frequency
115
115
Hz
Sweep voltage
3,5
4,9
Energy airgap
55
55
m]
0 ,98
0 ,98
mm
Flux density
Airgap height
Voice coil height
3,9
mm
18
18
mm
Magnet material
diameter
weight
Fxd
53
0,1
Fxd
53
0, 1
mm
kg
Weight of loudspeaker
0.29
0 , 29
kg
Core diameter
The loudspeaker has a paper surround and a foam plastic gasket on the flange.
nrtnh~r
1 Q7..d
13JH7
---
AD7080/X.
Dimensions (mm)
3 min 11
_]I-
0141
---
83
11
::::
142
max
-~~--51 max
34,1~ax l_.
~samax~
Fig. 1.
1) Baffle hol~ and clearance depth required for cone movement at the spec ified power
handling capacity.
One tag is indic ated by a red mark for on-phase connect ion.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
C 2
'~ ) Minimum
8188
October
74
.:t
"'a;
ID
.....
......
~
_,
AD7080/X.
POWER
,.,.
-""'
..,. ~
~I"""
J:
~
.....
Ln
.... ~
(~
"'-
::;j
--
'
,.,.~
......
~~
t"-
"'
.....
'
"~
:I:
0
0
Ln
[\
i\
0
0
\
r- r-- r-
- -
X
.............
'
.....
0
0
~
......
loo..
0
CD
-,-
.....
"""!"
0
Ln
['
- -
0
N
0
ID
.....
"Q
N
01
N
CID
N
ID
.....
Ln
October 1974
'
11
_ IJ18~
"!
.~
!I..
AD7091/M.
11
11
TECHNICAL DATA
version
M400
M4
MS
400
800
3,4
7, 1
330
600
Resonance frequency
105
105
105
105
Hz
2,45
3,5
24,5
34,5
39
39
39
39
0,8
0,8
0,8
0,8
Ra ted impedance
1,
Magnet material
diameter
we ight
Weight of l oudspeaker
M800
V
mJ
T
mm
2,4
3, 1
4,65
mm
18
18
18
18
mm
mm
kg
0 , 22
0,22
0,22
0 , 22
kg
The loudspeaker has a paper surround and a foam plastic gasket on the flange.
October 1974
[3 19 1
AD7091/M.
LOUDSPEAKER
Dimensions (mm)
3 m in 11
-~_1
---~
41 ,9 72 ,4
max max
11.2
max
-7Z6 8J 01
-.. 1+-5.1
Fig.1
1
max 1
- 3l , 1 m o x 1
!._. 3~ma x .1 .,.1.
_.., 42,2 max 1. -.
-
43,5 max
1-
) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone m ove ment at the specified power
handling capacity.
AD7091/M4
AD7091/M8
t=
Fig.2
Input power 50 mW
Sound pressure measured in anechoic room, loudspeaker unmounted.
Above 1000 Hz the sound pressure may be, over the width of one octave,
maximum 2 dB lower than indicated.
October 19 4
AD7091/M.
.....
en
N
CO
~~
ID
.....
If"
'-i-
0
N
1--' ~
....
J:
..ll:
0
,
j
I/
I\~
f\
--
I\.
"""" r\.
~
...._
'' I'-
....
J:
1\
o.n
\
0
0
N
~
t-- t--
I -I t-- t--
I - t-I -I -
--
t-- t--
"'
0
0
l"'oo..
--~
en
~""'
o.n
['
0
~
.....
October 197 4 .
en
ao
.....
...
N
"'
0
N
"'bil
iL:
AD7091/X.
version
X4
Rated impedance
X8
X800
800
3,4
7,.1
600
Resonance frequency
115
115
115
Core diameter
Magnet materia l
diameter
weight
Weight of loudspeaker
::'1
Hz
2,45
3,5
34, 5
39
39
39
0,8
0,8
0, 8
mm
2,4
3, 1
4,65
mm
18
18
18
mm
Ticonal
~
~
m]
T iconal Ticonal
18
0,027
18
0,027
18
0, 027
kg
0,22
0,22
0,22
kg
mm
The loudspeaker has a paper surround and a foam plastic gasket on the flange.
13 195
AD7091/X.
DimensiOns (mm)
72,4
142
mox
max
7l68 301
-... I._
max
-.. 34 1 ma x I'..
_...
Fig. 1
3~ max IJ
5,1
l.!.3.5 max
1I._
) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power
handling capacity .
/
catalogue number 2422 256 370.5
AD7091/X8
t=
Input power 50 mW
Sound pressure measured in anec hoic room, loudspeaker unmounted.
Above 1000Hz the sound pressure may be, ove r the width of one octave,
maximum 2 dB l ower than indicated .
13 196
(),.... t nN::>T" 1 07 A
AD7091/X.
0
N
~
~ 1--"
.,ell
N
CD
~
"'
N
..
<~ ~
J:
1-
.X
0
I'
J '"""
/
Ill
I/
"""" ~ ......
'(
.
....
......
"'
(
1---
..
i"'.
'
"'
J:
0
0
Ill
oil
~
~
0
0
N
I-- c--
I-- I--
.
X
........._
--
I-- -
en
I-- I--
I--
\ ~ ....
0
0
......
"""" ....
0
Ill
["--
<(
0
N
0
October 1974
m
"'0
.,
N
N
CD
"'
N
Ill
Bl ':l 7_ _ __
AD8000
11
11
Effective area
::::::1
::::
Moving mass:
tune d mass
cone mass
total moving mass
21, 5
9, 8
31, 3
g
g
g
Mass-of tadiator
0,235
kg
8,5m in
11
--~ ~r
~----------,
I
I
I
I
I
I
-, r r
I
I
180 11:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
_
--~- 8,1max
7Z75166
_. 46,8 max
59,3 max_..
64,4max_..
Octobe r 1976
''-~~-~~ ~.B192t----~
AD8061/W.
11
11
APPLICATION
For high fidelity reproduction in sealed acoustic enclosures . Maximum enclosure volume
25 litres. Maximum recommended cross-over frequency 2000Hz.
Rated frequency range 30 to 5 000 Hz.
TECHNICAL DATA
vers ion
W4
Rated impedance
W8
n
n
4, 3
42
42
1-lz
30
30
3,4
3,4
w
w
135
140
mJ
0, 87
0,93
Operating power
Sweep voltage
Energy in air gap
Flux dens ity
Air- gap height
Vo ice co il he ight
Core dia m eter
Magnet mater ia l
dia m e te r
mass
Mass of loudspeaker
mm
11
11
m111
25
25
m111
FXD
72
FXD
72
111111
0,26
0,26
kg
0, 8
0,8
kg
Q? ()l
--
AD8061/W.
Dimensions (mm)
5min 11
-~~-
-r
h..- - - - - - - - - - - - - .
max max ma x
~
7Z68213 .1
r- - - - - - 190,9 ma x
-------.1
-
Fig.!
59 ,25max
.--84max-..
1) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement a t the specified powe r
handling capacity.
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in-phase connection.
AV AI LAB LE VERSIONS
October 1974
AD8061/W.
..,....
CO
N
c-
.....
N
.....
lt'""'
I<
lJ
0
N
f.- 1-
,/
"' l
.,...v
....
(
0
0
11'1
11'1
..;t
'
--
'
"C
......
N
C7>
\.
..,
.....
<{
0
0
,:
- ___, 0
"C
0
0
N
-- I-3:
- - , .- - lD
- - 0CO
....
I
I
I
I
l..c
ID
0
11'1
N
0
'I
\.
:I:
N
00
_,./
....
.,..,
,. ,.,... .......
I.'
./
VN
~
'
...
"C
i" r--...
k"..... u
,....
.......
N
.....
0
11'1
..,
N
AD8066/W.
APPLICATION
For high fidelity reproduction in seale d acoustic e nclosures. Maximum enclosure volume
25 litres. Maximum recommended cross - over fr equency 2500Hz.
Rated frequenc y r ange 30 to 5 000 Hz.
TECHNICAL DATA
version
W8
W4
4
4, 3
12
Resonance frequen cy
39
39
Hz
40 ,
40
2,5
2. 5
229
203
m]
F lux d en s ity
1,1
1,2
mm
Vo ice coil he ig ht
11
11
Il1J11
Core d ia m eter
25
25
mm
FXD
F XD
Ai r- gap height
Magn e t ma te ria l
diame te r
mass
90
90
0, 45
0,45
mm
kg
Mass of loudspeaker
1, 15
1, 15
kg
-----
AD8066/W.
Smin 11
J ,lrh.--------.
I
I
91,8 99,5. 179,9
ma x max max
l 1
7170291 .1
- l... s,osmax
'- - - - - - 190,9 max
- 4 6,75ma xl
- 59,25 ma x
88 max.- - -
Fig. l
.1) Baffle lwlc and clearanc:e depth lcquitccl for cone mo vement
hanclling capaci t y,
a~
pO\\Cl'
AVAILABLE VE RSI ON S
r--<U
2.~7
:3SS.l
t=
Sec Fig. 2
Curve b: Sound pressure measured in anechoic room ;~t operating power . Loudspeaker
mounted in sealed 80 1 enclosure, filled with l kg of glass wool.
Curve c: 2nd and 3rd harmon~c distortion, measured a t the operat ing power of 2 , 5 W in
anechoic room, louds.peaker mounted in seal ed 80 l enclosure, filled with 1 kg
of glass wool.
L___B206___LJIL--------------'j
Octobc,r 1976
AD8066/W.
LOUDSPEAK ER
c --
..:t
CO
N
0
.....
.....
f,_
I...-
,.....
(..)
""""
~
0
N
lll
...
~\
t\
'
. . .v
r
V ( ,'
I/
K
'
0
0
' ' f\
:} I
),
~II
1
1\
t- ..........
<D
<D
0
CD
~~
' 1\
1\.
;'
n~tnhPr
'lJ
1 CJ7 4
'lJ
"!-....
'
<{
0
0
lll
0
0
N
1\!
~
-
::z::
..:t
..0
T
I
lll
lll
ao
~ .........
.... ...
l/
0
0
r
'\
~~
....
bf~
~ 1--
--
""
"C
"-~
~ ' 'r-..
N
.....
II~_ _ _ !I~
lll
13207
AD8067 /MFB
11
11
TECHNICAL DATA
Rated impedance
Resonance frequency
38
Hz
50
Operating power
11
*>
Sweep voltage
frequency range: 35 -1000 Hz
Energy in air gap
225
mJ
F lux density
0 , 69
5
12 . 7
34
FXD
90
0 , 42
mm
mm
mm
Mass of loudspeaker
1,3
mm
kg
kg
7Z70822.1
t+10d8
~
85Hz
October 1976
B209
----
AD8067 /MFB
---
l l
!:
7Z70826
_. l... s,osmax
1 -----~ 190,9 max - - - - -.. 1
_. 46,75max l
...,..
voice coil {
acceleration { 3
sensor
4
BFW11
.m
(i)
ACCELERATION
SEN SOR
c:::::::::J
10
Mn
10
kn
Fig.1
7l10 U O
,),;
1) Baffle hole and mounting clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified
power handling capacity.
AVAILABLE VERSION
.
OctQber .l9J15
AD8067 /MFB
0
N
~
N
/,.,. ,
,/
<X)
e-N
c--
,....
'
-f.-
1-
-_'I
...,...!-"'""
--
!-"'""
h.
/V
.....
I--"
....
0
0
"
lf1
lf1
~
1\I
"0
,J
J
I ("
::E
I--
'
ID
lL
I-- ............
["-..
lD
~
!,7
1\
-
1 1..., ~
lE
p
~
........
"
,-
'
, -
CO
'
'
- -""
- ---
-.
0
0
0
lf1
;:::.
...
1-
........
"0
0
N
<(
October 1976
m
u
0
0
N
,., ...
0
N
Q)
CO
<D
-~
N
0
lf1
1\
........ IN
0
0
\.o
I-- r--
,.....,
I - r--
--
lf1
82 11
AD8067 /MFB
---F ig. 3
7 Z7082S
+20
dB
mV
80
+10
'
.......
r---.
40
tr-- .......
20
(\
-10
I
I
I
10
-20
\
- 30
10
20
50
100
200
500Hz
10kHz
20
Fig.4
B212
11
October 1976
AD8067 /MFB
FEEDBACK LOUDSPEAKER
Phase relati on be tween output voltage of acceleration s ensor and input voltage on voic e coil
: Vout lagging
-50
I
I
-30
1/
I
"""'-/
00
./.
+30
1/
+ 50
i7
+ 90
I
7
12
fT
:::::;
1/
+ 120
7
7
+ 150
+ 180
-=
r/
10
17
50
20
100
200
500Hz
10kHz
Fig .S
Curve 1 : louds peaker unmounted; fres =26 Hz .
Curve 2: loudspe aker mounted in sealed 9 1 enclosure ; fres
, (\"'7J:..
11
= 84
Hz.
B213
20
AD8067 /W.
3000Hz.
TECHNICAL DATA
ver s i on
W4
Rated impedance
4,
ws
8
r2
6,4
r2
Voice co il resistance
3,2
Resonance frequency
32
32
Hz
40
40
w
V
Operating power
225
225
m]
Flux density
0,7
0, 7
12,7
12, 8
ml11
ml11
Sweep voltage
mm
34
34
Magne t material
FXD
FXD
diQu,eter
mass
90
0,42
90
0,42
mm
kg
Mass of loudspeaker
1,3
1, 3
kg
Core diameter
B215
--
AD8067 /W.
DimensiOns (mm)
--
11
7Z70290.1
1-a,05max
1- - -- --190,9 ma x - - - - - - - 1
-- 46,75 max I
--. 59,25 max
eefnaxFig .!
1) Baffle hole and clearance depth 1cquired for cone movement at the speci!ied power
handling capacity .
One tag i s indicated by a red mark for in -phase connection .
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
r--(
See Fig . 2
Curve a : Sound pressure measured in anechoi c room, loudspeaker unmounted.
Above 1000 Hz the sound pressure may be, over the width of one octave,
maximum 2 dB lower than indicated. Input power 50 mW (0, 44 V).
Curve b : Sound pressure measured in half free field at operating power . Loudspeaker
mounted in sealed 80 1 enclosure, filled with 1 kg of glass wool.
Curve c : 2nd and 3rd harmonic distortion, measured at th e operating power of 6 W in
anechoic room, l oudspeaker mounted in sealed 80 1 enclosure, filled with 1 kg
of glass wool.
Curve e : Maximum distortion accord ing DIN45500, 13lart 7.
'' ) Minimum packing quantity 3 per unit.
8216
AD8067 /W.
.,
I
.X
--
f"
--
.......
1-'
v-->
lJ)
-----
'\
f.--
.....;;F-
I(
'
I
0
0
lJ)
-<
lrV
~I\
,.....~
0
0
))
\
N
""0
'
0
0
-- I
''
.
.-
IJ
'-
('
M
""0
""
-- -' -', -- -- -,
rr '
- -- -- ~-- -
'
lJ)
.~
0
N
0
0
0
0
CO
0
<.D
0
lJ)
B217
AD8081/M.
APPLICATION
A full range loudspeaker for domestic radios, public address systems, and ceiling sets.
Due to its dual-cone construction, this loudspeaker has an extended frequency response
up to 20kHz.
August 1976
1 _~-
__________B_2 ~
19--------~
AD8081/M.
Dimensions (mm)
-------1
. 54,5
180
max
max
--~1-5,3 max
1Z 68215 .1
Fig.l
1 ) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power
handling capacity.
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in-phase connection.
AVAlLABLE VERSIONS
r:--
382b
13220
_1.
11
August 1976
AD8081/M.
.......
1,-
_,... f-
1- .......
N
N
.:.:
::>
,.- ~
1,..---
I\
(I'-
r-...
-'
f.-
~~
......
0
0
L.l1
.l
(
.D
0
0
I/
..,....
"0
.....
,-
........ r--..
........
I
I
~\
0
0
(Y)
"0
L.l1
.I
~~
..-:
~
'I"\
\
- --
I'-- r--..
....... ........
0
0
0
0
August 1976
Cl)
"0
O'l
<Xl
(!)
L.l1
13221
""
AD8081/X.
APPLICATION
For dome s tic radios , public address systems, and ceiling sets . High sen sitivity at
4000Hz.
TECHNICAL DATA
version
X4
Rated impe dance
Voice coil resistance
X8
3, 4
7,1
70 to 11 000
Hz
95
Hz
0, 7
Resonance frequency
Power handling capacity,
measured without filter,
lou dspeaker unmounted
Operating power (sound level 90 dB, 1 m)
Sweep voltage (SO to 20 000 Hz)
5,6
53
Flux density
mJ
T
0,98
mm
5,3
Core diameter
18
Magnet material
diameter
mass
Ferr oxdure
53
0, 1
Mass of loudspeaker
0 , 37
mm
mm
mm
kg
kg
August 1976
11
11
B22.1
---
AD8081/X.
Dimensions (mm)
--
. 54,5
max
-~ 1.... 5,3max
7Z682l5.1
Fig. I
1) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power
handling capacity.
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in-phase connection .
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
~
(see Fig. 2)
13224
_ II ~
180
max
August 1976
AD8081/X.
<I'-
('I
,...
~
......
L(')
I~
- r-..
I'
I>
~
I
0
0
L(')
'
./
.Df
0
0
('I
V
..,
t> t-
"'bo
L-- 1--
l)
t--
...,
!',.
!"--.
L..--
- --
0
0
"0 I
u,
\,
')
L(')
"") ~
<---.......
.._
r.::. I'-.- -
f- r-
- -
r-
- ---
0
('I
0
0
August 1976
Ill
"'0
Ol
CO
r--
0
lD
11
L(')
ll22.)
9710/MC
APPLICATION
A full range loudspeaker for stud io monitoring equipment and domestic bass r e fle x
enclosures for high fi delity reproduction from 45 1-lz to 19 kl-l z .
TECHN ICAL DATA
version MC
Rated impedance
Resonance frequency
50
1-lz
20
10
Operating power
1,3
w
w
w
Sweep voltage
5 ,9
Energy in airgap
361
Flux density
Airgap height
Voice coil height
Core diamet er
Magnet mater:ial
diameter
we ight
We ight of loudspeaker
0 , 75
mJ
T
11
mm
mm
34
mm
Fxd
105
0,4
mm
kg
1, 75
kg
The loudspeaker has a paper cone and s urround and a cork gasket on the flange.
Connection to the loudspeaker by means of 6, 3 mm (0 , 25 inch) Fastons or soldering.
October 1974
13227
9710/MC
LOUDSPEAKER
Dimensions
Smin 11 ~
--w-
h----------~
96
{ll195 11 -
105 192,5
ma x ma x ma x
Jl
r=
1 . - - - - - - 2 16,5 max - - - - - - - . 1
2
max-.l-+- 65 ,2 max-.,.__ 77 max ___...
7Z69092.l
Fig.1
'
1) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power
handling capacity.
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in-phase connection.
A V AI LAB LE VERSION
~--- (0
See Fig. 2.
Curve b: Sound pressure measured in a nechoi c room, loudspeaker mounted in sealed
80 l enclosure . Input power at ope r ating power of f, 3 W.
Curve c: znd and 3~ harmonic distortion, measured at the operating power of 0, 7 W
in an echoic room, loudspeaker mounted in sealed 80 1 enclosure, fil led with
1 kg of glass wool.
ll22H
October 1974
9710/MC
I
'
I;; ......
.....
<)'I
...
1-1-11
:r
<
.ll:
0
<
c:.
:::~
11>
~~
....
t--
,...... t-
-:
3-
cf::::
t- !-...
"'
"'0
I/
"'N"'
....
..,v
1"""'
.~
V
le
0
0
"'
.a
:I:
"'
0
0
"'
..:t
z
LO
0
0
"'
~
I-II-I- u
I- 1-~
I-I- ............
I-I- 0
....
"""
["--
en
m
"0
.....
I-I-
0
0
~-
....
"" r\
"
.. ,
-~
.... - -- ~ - -
"'"tJ
"'
1\
"'
CO
"
N
~
N
"0
'
1'--t-t--.
0
N
.....
N
11>
"'
'
October 1974
11
B229
-~
"'
AD1065/M.
11
11
APPLICATION
A fu ll range loudspeaker with high sensitivity for public adctre ss systems in enclosures
greater than 20 litres.
Smooth response from 60Hz to 18000 Hz.
TECHNICAL DATA
version
MS
M15
15
3,4
13
Resonance fr equency
55
55
55
Hz
10
10
10
1, 5
1.5
1,5
Sweep voltage
4,5
6,3
8,7
Energy in airgap
225
225
225
mJ
1, 12
1,1 2
1,1 2
mm
6, 5
6,5
4,5
mm
Rated impedance
Operating power
Flux density
Airgap height
Voic e coil height
Core diameter
:::::::
25
25
25
mm
Magnet material
diameter
weight
Fxd
90
0,45
Fxd
90
0,45
Fxd
90
0,45
mm
kg
Weight of loudspeaker
1,52
1,52
1,52
kg
October 1974
11
_ _ !I _
M4
B231
AD1065 /M.
LOUDSPEAKER
Dimensions (mm)
D
D
~
--
.- - -1
f.-
c::::
1 - - - -- -
l j
I?
.-
.-5,6
2440,05 - - - -- '
261,1 max
7Z6518 2. 2
1=[2,4 max
... 9,4max
._64 ,1max~
113ma x -
Fig.l
Baffle hole diameter 227 mm
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in-phase connection.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
B232
October 1974
AI?1065/M.
LOUDSPEAKER
N
~
f-"
.__
c:::: r--
r-
~~
\~
"""
::;_
--"'
'
"
c:
"'
?'
"""~
\0
......
Lfl
:::;.~
3:.
<p
-p
.j
1/
...,J.
/ ~
I<
N
I
0
0
-::t
Lfl
1\.
0
0
()
'
N
.
- ::E
- - ..........
-
.......
........
L.{)
lD
0
N
0
0
<(
en
N
CO
,_
.!:
'
.-
' \
::oP
= =-"'
0
0
("')
-o
Lfl
~~
.........
"'
......
- -
...............
'
-o /
.
'
.. == -
Lfl
Lfl
.0
0
0
1- ::t.
0
.-
.......
....,..,
N
lD
0
N
.!oil
~
AD1065/W.
11
11
For high fidelity reproduction in sealed acoustic enclosures in accordance with DIN 45500.
Recommended enclosure volume 35 litres. Maximum recommended cross -over
frequency 1000 1-Iz. Rated frequency range 40 to 3000 Hz.
TECHNICAL DATA
version
W8
W4
4
3,2
6,8
Resonance frequency
20
20
Hz
30
30
Operating power
Sweep voltage
Rated impedance
Energy in a irgap
F l ux density
Airgap height
Voice coil height
Core diameter
Magnet m ater ial
di ameter
we ight
Weight of loudspea ker
280
280
0,94
0 ,94
mJ
T
mm
12, 1
13,5
mm
25
25
mm
Fxd
90
0,45
Fxd
90
0,45
mm
kg
1,8
1, 8
kg
October 1974
13235
AD1065/W.
Dimensions (mm)
T
I
I
t
I
I
--
1- - - - - -
r- -,
1--
D
~
------1
I?
~mp.x-.
1-+-- - - - - 261,1max - - - - - - + 1
91 ,8 148,5 2Z9 ,3
max max ma
7Z66842 .J
~~-9,4 max
--s.s
2440,05
'
113m~x-
Fig.1
1 ) Baffle hol e and clearance depth required for cone m6vement at the specified power
handling capacity.
One tag is indi cated by a red mark for in-phase connection.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
r- (0
J ,
'
L__
B236
_ __
October 1974
AD1065/W.
N
N
_y
....
.......
Lf)
I~
I--"
1/
/V
,...V
V
/
--
. I
I.
0
0
I
0
Lf)
Lf)
-:!
0
.OD
, I/
,
I
' ...'
I-
""
.........
c.Q
0
........
N
0
October 1974
1\.
.....
,"
(")
-o
\... ........
r-..
r-....
I
I
...
0
0
',
1.{)
1-
I
\
I/
1/
-o
0
0
...
I
/
u
Lf)
I/
I -I -
--
11\.
--
...
--
.....
0
Lf)
0
N
<{
I
Cl)
"0
N
Ol
N
CO
lD
13:!:37
AD10100/W.
11
11
APPLICATION
For high fidelity reproduction in sealed acoustic e nclo sures in accordanc e with DIN45500.
Recommended enclos ure volume 35 litres . Max imum r ecommended cross -over frequency
800Hz . R ate d freque ncy range 35 to 800 Hz.
TECHNICAL DATA
vers ion
W8
W4
4
Vo ice co il r es istance
3, 4
6,5
Resonance frequency
25
25
Hz
40
40
2,5
2,5
Operating power
Sweep voltage
Energy in a irga p
Flux density
Airgap he ight
w
V
m]
820
820
1, 03
1,03
mm
Voice co il height
15
17,2
mm
Core di ameter
50
50
mm
Fxd
130
1, os
Fxd
130
1, 05
mm
kg
3,0
3,0
Magnet material
diameter
we igh t
We ight of loudspeaker
kg
October 1974
---
::::
ADlOlOO/W.
LOUDSPEAKER
Dimensions (mm)
--
'1....--I-+---!j
-~1-9,4max
--s,s
244
261,1 max
j
7Z66990.3
64 ,1 max~
130,8 m a x -
Fig. 1
13ufrie hole diameter 227 mm
One tag is indicat ed by n red mark for in -p hase connecrion.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
1,
B240
Octobex:..l 97_6
ADlOlOO/W.
LOUDSPEAKER
0
N
CO
CO
ID
..--
"
'I
1--
,.,....
1.{)
1-- ~~
'I'-
[\..
I'1--
!"-+-.
- ~!>
[/
""'"I
:::::l
. . . v , - - _,
-
...,..l/
.........
..--
-,
0
0
~~
..;:t
.0
'
"0
"'
....
II-
-3
0
0
..--
t--...
"
,.-0
1.{)
t--...
r-
0
0
N
I
I
I
...........
0
0
1--
-~
(T}
1'\
'
\I
r--...
.......
r-... r- . . .
-'
0
N
4:
N
0
..-
en
"0
October 1974
N
(])
N
CO
N
['-
lD
-~
~
---
\
I\
1.{)
r.....
0
0
"0
z-
1.{)
1.{)
---
1.{)
..--
AD1265/M.
11
11
October 1974
1324:3
AD1265/M.
Dimensions (mm)
148,5 278,7
max max
7210865
-./l24max
s,6max
-8Smax-.
.-1Q4,4max134max-
.. l...
1+--- - - --
Fig.l
1
) Baffle hole a nd clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power
handling capacity.
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in- phase connection.
AVAILABLE VERSIONS
t=
!3244
II_, _~~"
October 1974
AD1265/M.
L OU DSPEAKE R
0
N
...s-
r--
CD
<Xl
.,/
r-N
r--
c~
it'"""
,_
....... ~
..:<:
0
'
.......
~-
tJ)
r- :-1--
lj
l/
-.....
!J
0
0
tJ)
tJ)
-:t
.0
I
0
~
(
~ s;;.
"0
......
- --
..........
- -
.........
-- '
1.0
(!)
...--
i"" ;.::..
--
t'
.......
:-
--- ;::
(T)
"0
<{
,_
- :: -
0
0
-.
-~
,..... /
0
tJ)
<
- c:- "'
'
.......
0
0
I-
- ----
0
N
0
~
October 1974
CD
-o
CJ)
<0
['-.
tJ)
(!)
11
13:.145
.~
AD1265/W.
11
TECHNICAL DATA
vers ion
W4
W8
4
Voice co il resistance
3.2
6,8
Resonance frequency
20
20
Hz
30
30
4.5
4, 5
w
V
Rated impedance
Operating power
Sweep voltage
Energy in airgap
F lux density
280
280
0,94
0 , 94
Airgap height
Voice coil height
Core dia meter
5
12 .
m}
T
mm
13 ,5
mm
25
25
mm
\~eight
Fxd
90
0 ,45
Fxd
90
0 , 45
mm
kg
Weight of loudspeake r
1 ,8
1, 8
Magnet material
diameter
kg
Octobe
9.1
13247
-::::::
AD1265/W.
Dimensions (mm)
7Z669e9.1
.... 6,4
1- - - - - - 294 0,05 ..,------..:.~1
1 - + - - - - - - - 314,5max - - - - --
-. ... 9,6max
.... asmax-..
-1D4,4max-134max--
'Fig. 1
1) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power
handling capacity.
One tag is indicated by a red mark for in-phase connection.
AVAI LAB LE VERSIONS
r---
1.
(0
= stamped on
loudspeaker magnet,
not t~ be used for ordermg)
f3_2_4s_
!.___ _
IJ4
AD1265/W.
N
LO
I'
([)
_:{_
"'N
..-
I'
'
it- ~
t--
c:(' --
--
L!)
f-
=-
.......
/
1--::::
~
.'
0
0
L!)
L!)
..::t
0
'
.D
0
0
'
I
I
0
0
"
"0
/
:._.,
u
I
\...
(")
j".::
r- 1--
1--
3=
....._
r-
tD
,,
~
I.(')
- r-
......
""
, 11' ..
0
0
~
~
L!)
/." "
i"'-
't----
..
I.,
"0
L!)
I
I
V
r
1\
-z
'
I
I.X,
0
N
<(
I
N
0
October 1974
CD
\J
N
Ol
N
<0
lD
~~~~~-~~-n'J<LO -----"
AD12100 /HP.
11
TECHNICAL DATA
version
HP4
Rated impedance
HP8
3, 5
7.2
Resonance frequency
60
60
Hz
50
50
10
14
Operating power
Sweep volt age
Energy in a irgap
820
820
1,03
1,03
12 , 2
12,5
mm
50
50
mm
Magnet material
diameter
weight
Fxd
130
Fxd
130
l
mm
kg
Weight of loudspeaker
3.27
3,27
kg
F lux density
Ai rgap height
Vo i ce coil
l~ght
Core diameter
m]
T
mm
The loudspeaker has a textile surround and a cork gasket on the fl a nge.
Connect ion t o the loudspeaker by m eans of 6, 3 mm (0, 25 inch) Fasten s or solderi ng.
October 1974
R2SJ
---
AD12100/HP.
Dimensions (mm)
lll278
...- - - -
r
133 ,3 27 8,7
mox ma X
~"
'
!
7Z66840
I I- 9,6 ma x.
1 - - - - - - 314,5 max
1 ... 2,4ma x
- - - - --1
_ ,,
-- 91ma x 5 ,4m o x -
F ig.l
.. ''')
t== 2 f or 1 l k p;;cKmg
)U
B25 2
1976
AD12100/HP.
0
N
..
l<i
~~
I
..:>:
1--
....,
1-,
U")
1..!
1.- ....
le::: r....
I<
V
1/ I" I'-
KI'-
r--...
, f.- t:>
V
,
II
N
0
0
)...--
U")
U")
1\
\.,
1\
.D
I
0
0
,.
..j'
r<::
I/
) ,...
...., I
.~
~
0
0
,\~...
\I'.
U")
0
0
1'1.:
1-- I-1--
a..:
1'-,....
+-- :r:
'
1- I-- ............
0
0
1-1-
.....
r-....
(T)
['.._
'0
';,
)'...
........
N
I-- I--
October 1974
,,
"
0
U")
'0
Cf
[\
...-0
!'-..
0
N
I
N
_;
0
N
<Jl
CO
N
lD
N~
U")
R2 S.1- - . . . . . . ; - -
AD12100/M.
11
11
APPLICATION
A dual -cone loudspeaker with extremely high sensitivity for power applications such as
public address systems, discotheques and domestic en closures greater than 50 litre s ,
a nd open baffles .
version
TECHNICAL DATA
M4
Rated impedance
Voice coil resistance
Ml5
MS
4
15
3, 2 '
13 , 2
Resonance frequency
45
45
45
Hz
25
25
25
0,55
0,55
0,6
6.3
12,2
Operating power
Sweep voltage
Ener gy in airgap
Flux density
Airgap height
970
970
970
1, 15
1, 15
1, 15
.V
m]
mm
9, 1
10,3
13,3
mm
Core diameter
33 , 4
33, 4
33,4
mm
Magnet material
diameter
weight
Fxd
130
1
Fxd
130
Fxd
130
1
mm
kg
3 ,3
3,3
3,3
kg
Weight of loudspeaker
--:::::::
The l oudspeaker has a paper surround and a cork gasket on the flange.
Connection to the loudspeaker by me a ns of 6, 3 mm (0, 25 inch) F astons or solder ing.
October 1974
1!255 _ _ _ _ _...
AD12100/M .
Dimensions (mm)
- ---
t]
0 278
r.
133 ,3 27 8,7
mo x mox
1266840
I ~- 9,6max
l..-2,4 ma x
.__ 91max- - 15 1,4 max
in-p h 1~e
AV AILABLE VERSIONS
connection .
r---- <0
1.
AD 12 100/ M-1.
AD 12100/MS,
8256
Octobe r 1976
AD12100/M.
LOUDSPEAKER
I
N
CXl
CD
N
r--
-"'
loo-
1--
!'--..
...,.
0
N
!"":::::
0
0
_s
I
.X
0
~
-~
.,
t-
<
.... ~
1-
<
.;!5
c:
<
f!:
!")
.............
Lf)
.......
,...
"/
//
.::::
I
~
0
0
IJ
Lf)
Lf)
1/
I'.
0
0
.c;t
Lf)
z
0
.0 r'\.
1\
0
0
N
N
'0
r\
......
0
0
- 1- 1- ,.
1--
"
.......... .......
........
(Y')
........
...-
......
"'
u -
'0
"r-... -.
0
0
<{
-.
, :
--
\
~
0
Lf)
.!::>
>
r==:: ........
0
N
I
N
0)
"0
'<""
October 1974
0
~
a>
<X)
['.
-----
Lf)
tD
11
8257
-~
u..
AD12100/W.
11
11
TECHNICAL DATA
version
W4
Rated impedance
Voice coil resistance
Resonance frequency
W8
4
3,4
6, 5
19
19
Hz
40
40
Operating power
Sweep voltage
5-
Energy in airgap
Flux density
Airgap height
Voice co il height
Core diameter
Magnet material
diameter
weight
Weight of loudspeaker
820
820
1,03
1, 03
mm
15
17 , 2
mm
mJ
T
50
50
mm
Fxd
130
1,05
Fxd
130
1, 05
mm
kg
3,2
3,2
kg
October 1974
----
AD12100/W.
Dimensions (mm)
133,3 278,7
max
----
max
l
7Z70866.1
Fig.!
l..- 9,6max
--91 max-151,4max-
1) Baffle hole and clearance depth required for cone movement at the specified power
handling capacHy.
One tag is indi cated by a red mark for in-phase connection.
AVA ILABLE VERSIONS
B260
October 1976
AD12100/W.
LOUDSPEAKER
0
N
-:
5N
I
..::.::
0
ro
<D
,....
.-
~~
<
~--""
......
~~
--
le:: f:::
1"-... t-
V
v
V
1'-
, --
,
\
0
0
',
L[)
L[)
~
c..
-~
0
0
N
'
f-- f--
,,
1- f--!
"'
<
"'
.of'\
\
I-- I--
0
0
p.,
' IJ
I-- I--
I
L[)
z
1\
I-- I--
,_
'
-0
0
.......
N
.......
0
---
r-....
I\. !--..
N
"0 I--
'
....
.-'I,
h r--.
.-
I'.
.-
"'
M
"0
<t
--.;;;
I'-
0
0
L[)
0
N
I
N
0
N
Q)
N
<0
N
lD
October 1974
B26l
Cross-over networks
ADF1600
11
11
APPLICATION
For use in 2-way loudspeaker systems with High fidelity or High quality woofe rs and the
dome tweeter AD0160/T.
TECHNICAL DATA
Rated impedance
type ADF1600/4
type ADF1600/8
Cross-over frequency
type ADF 1600/ 4
type ADF1600/8
--
Q
Q
4
8
1600
1800
Hz
Hz
20
6
12
dB/octave
dB/octave
Circuit diagram
version
4Q
8Q
+
4!1 (8!1)
tweeter
4!1 ( 8!1)
Ll
L2
Cl
0,8
0,35
12
-0 ,8
0,5
8
March 1973
11
B265
mH
mH
flF
ADF1600
Frequency characteristics
1Z6S 8 51
attenuation
11
40-
(dB)
an---
...
0
.(
if
-10
--
,, "'
/]
'
1\. '
IJ
-20
1\.
"
'
'\.'
'\.'
'
111
-30
/
10
100
Dimensions (mm)
1000
10000
l
~~;l__~1~!_ @"~ C{P
5,50,5
1-470,1 -!
----~--~------4---~
L2- -
T otal height 42 mm
6 soldering tags for connection
frequency (Hz)
tweeter
L1
i';;put -woofer
Attention : If the + and - signs printed on the board do not correspond with their respective positions in the drawing, the connections must be made in accordance with
the drawing.
CATALOGUE NUMBERS
8266
March 1973
ADF2400
11
)
APPLICATIO N
For use in 2-way loudspeaker systems with High fidelity or high quality woofers and
cone tweeters AD2071/T. or AD2090/T.
TECHNI CAL DATA
Rated impedance
type ADF2400/4
type ADF2400 / 8
4
8
Cross-over frequency
Power handling capacity
2400
Hz
20
6
6
dB/octave
dB/octave
o-- .
-
4il(8il)
l.
-
woof er
-y
Jc
tweeter
version
L
4Q
8Q
0,5
12
mH
}JF
+J '
'-----._4_n_!a_n_'______J 4n 1an)
7Z6623S
October 1974
13267
---
ADF2400
Fre<:juency characteristic
7Z6Sa50
attenuation
(dB)
-10
'
/
IX _
~
1"1
)
11
V
-20
'\.
'\.
/
1/
-30
10
100
1000
10000
frequency lHz)
Dimensions (mm)
5,50,5
70,5
max
Total height 42 mm
6 soldering tags for connection
~~
..
tweeter
...;.
.:.
.!.
input woofer
7Z65847
Attention : If the + and - signs printed on the board do not correspond with their re pective positions in the drawing, the connections must be made in accordance with
the drawing.
CATALOGUE NUMBERS
~8
268 ~11
Mar ch 1973
11
ADFS00/4500
11
APPLICATION/
For use in 3 -way l oudspeaker systems with High fidelity or High quality woofers ,
squawkers and dome tweeters.
TECHNICAL DATA
Rated impedance,
type ADF500/4500/4
type ADF500/4500/8
4
8
Q
Q
Hz
40
6
6
12
dB/octave
dB/octave
dB/octave
Circuit diagram
TC1
+
-
4.!1(8.!1)
woofer
4!1(8.!1)
version
4Q
8Q
L2
squawker
tweeter
4.!1 (8.!1)
4.!1(8.!1)
Ll
L2
L3
Cl
C2
2, 1
0, 2
0,2
50
5
7Z68237
3 mH
0,35 mH
0,5 mH
24 !-L F
3,3 !-L F
'
Loudspeaker terminal marked with r e d dot to be connected t o+ .
March 1973
~-~11 _
13269
--
---
ADFS00/4500
Frequency characteristics
7Z65852
11
attenuation
(dB)
40--
so---
......
"'
,-- ...
r.;or,
"till\
"-i'
~~
1/
- 10
lj
,v
. 1/
'f.
1-' I
I
"''
' 'I;
"'
:'
11
V'
10
'
li
V
-30
..
'\' I
//
-20
11/
1'\:'..
100
1000
10000
frequency (Hz)
Dimensions (mm)
Total height 42 mm
Connections with 0, 25 inch Fastons
Attention_: If the + and - signs printed
on the board do not correspond with their
respective positions in the drawing, the
connections must b e made in accordance
with the drawing.
CATALOGUE NUMBERS
13270
\[I
March 1973
11
3
Recommended
loudspeaker combinations
lllllrl
RECOMMENDED LOUDSPEAKER COMBINAT IONS
Ol
'-1
"'
"'
11
4 and
'
an
impedance
COMBINATION
no. I
woofer
sq uawker
tweeter
cross-over!network
i'"I
,_.
"''-1
"'
power
handl in g
capacity
AD 5060/W 4 (8)
AD 2071/T 4 (8)
3 1
AD 5060/W 4 (8)
AD 0140/T 4 (8)
3 1
lOW
AD 7066/W 4 (8)
AD 0140/ T 4 (8)
7 1
20
AD 8061/W 4 (8)
AD 0140/T 4 (8)
20 I
20
AD 8066 /W 4 (8)
AD 0140/T 4 (8)
20 I
20
AD 806 1/ W 4 (8)
AD 5060/Sq 4 (8)
AD 0140/T 4 (8)
25 I
40
AD 8066/ W 4 (8)
AD 5060/Sq 4 (8)
AD 0140/T 4 (8)
25 1
40
AD 10100/W 4 (8)
AD 10100/W 4 (8)
AD 5060/Sq 8 (4)
10
AD -1265/W 4 (8)
AD 5060/Sq 8 (4)
11
AD 12100/W 4 (8)
AD 5060/Sq 4 (8)
AD 5060/Sq 4 (8)
lOW
AD 0140/T 4 (8)
35 1
40
AD 0140/T 8 (4)
40 1
40
AD0140/T 8 (4)
50 1
40
AD 0140/T 4 (8)
80 1
40
For more information see our Application book "Building Hi- Pi speaker syste ms".
enclosure
volume
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
::0
til
(')
:;:
0:;:
oti:J
gZ
o:>tl
-til
ZtJ
>I:""'
:jo
Oc:::
ZtJ
men
'"0
til
>
~
til
::0
Television tuners
and aerial input assemblies
--
ELC1042/05
Systems
Channels
band I
band Ill
system A
system B
system I
B1 to B5
B6 to B14
E2 to E4
E5 to E 12
IA to re
ID to IJ
Intermediate frequencies
picture
sound
34 , 65 MHz
38 , 15 MHz
38 , 9 MHz
33 , 4 MHz
39 , 5 MHz
33,5 MHz
APPLICATION
Designed to cover 405 line v. h. f. and 625 line (wired distribution) channels, and the
v . h . f. channels of C . C . I. R. system B.
November 1974
C3
--
c::
C::
ELC1042/05
V. H. F. TELEVISION TUNER
DESCRIPTION
The E LC 1042/05 is av. h . f. tuner with electronic tuning and band switching, covering the
v. h ..f. band I (frequency range 41, 5 to 68 MHz), and the v . h. f. band Ill (frequency range
174 to 230 MHz).
Mechanically the tuner is built on a low-loss printed-wiring board , carrying all components . in a metal housing made of a rectangular frame and front and rear cover (see
Fig.2). The aerial connection is on the frame side . a ll other connections (supplyvoltages,
a. g. c. voltage , tuning and switching voltages) are made via feedthrough capacitors in the
underside. The mounting method is shown in Figs. 3 and 4.
The v.h.f. aerial signal is fed via an i.f. trap to a tuned input circuit , which is connected
to the emitter of the input transistor BF264. The collector load of this transistor is for med by a double tuned circuit, transferring the signal to the base of the mixer transistor
BF 195 . The oscillator is equipped with a BF 194 .transistor. The three r . f. circuits are
tuned by three capacitance diodes BB105G. Switching between v. h. f. I and Ill is achieved
by five switching diodes BA 182.
The collector circuit of the mixer transistor is a single tuned i. f. resonant circuit , at
the low end of which the i. f. signal is capacitively coupled out of the tuner.
The tuner requires transistor supply voltages of+ 12 V, a switching voltage of+ 12 V,
a. g . c. voltages, variable from+ 2, 5 V (normal operating point) to about + 6 V (maximum
a .g. c.) and a tuning voltage , variable from +0 , 3 V to +25 V.
The aerial input of the tuner is .asymmetr ical. For use in symmetrical aerial systems ,
aerial transformers (baluns) are available (see ACCESSORIES).
C4.
November 1974
z0
<
(1)
g.
(1)
!J
"'
"'
"'
'-"
..,._
,_.
"'
0
""',_.
..,._
, - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -_- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - l
I
'If'
I
I
if'
..l
01
C
lB
07
,., .,.
rC2~
3
m
-:
0:
llB
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C2
.,
I
I
I
c I
R2
371
I
35
C39I
I
I
I
I
I
26
30
Rll
I
I
I
I ,
I
'"I1
0.
r-'
... <tx:l
":::: En
s
(1)
oq
>-l
c:::
ztx:l
::0
1'-=j1'@=~ j'l'1:JII
l
C10
CIJ
CIS
C33
I
I
L-x--------------- ~ 10--- -l ~CD-- - ---l ~Q---------:---------------'1
o.g.c. voltage
1+2,5 to +6Vl
(J1
::r
g, >-l
tx:l
I
I
Cl
<
::r:
d. supply
swtching ~voltoge
voltage
1+12Vl
l-t-12VI
C34
tun1ng voltage
1+0.3 to +2SVI
CJ6
C39
test
1J.
point
output
r-
mixtr/osclllotor
supply voltage
f+ 12V)
to.)
Fig. L
.........
0
U1
_ _ _ _ _,llliJLI
u- -
ELC1042/05
V. H. F. TELEVISION TUNER
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions in mm
aer~
58,8
max
_1
E
- - - 91,44136e) - - --
= 2, 54
mm (0 , 1 in)
1Z10624.1
Fig.2
Terminal 2 =a . g. c. voltage, +2, 5 to +6, 0 V
3 = switching voltage, v. h . f. Ill, + 12 V (approx. 12, 5 mA)
4 = r.f. supply voltage, +12 V (approx. 3, 2 to 10 mA)
5 =tuning voltage, +0, 3 to +25 V
8 = mixer/oscillator supply voltage, + 12 V (approx . 6, 7 mA)
9 = test point
10 = i. f. output
E =earth
November 1974
ELC1042/05
V.H.F. TELEVISIONTUNER
Mounting
The tuner may be mounted by soldering it on to a printed-wiring board, using the piercing diagram shown in Fig. 3. (The tuner may also be mounted by means of a snap-in
mount or a bracket. Information will be supplied upon request).
The tuner may be mounted anywhere in the receiver and there are no restrictions on
orientation.
-
- - - - - - --
-~.~ -1,3
1
+g
Ef--- -I
91,44 ( 36e)
----'--------- ~
1
. !4x)
'
- - - - - - - - - ~+E-t
1 +g. 1 (7x)
. --1.1 -
'
I
'
j_
22,86
(9e)
7,6217,62 1~
_ j
22,86
(9t
5,08(2e,.
1
, , .,
(3el (3el
~ 70621
.r r
- .l
-- 1-
2,5 max
make sure that screw
does not protrude deeper
Fig. 4 Recommended fixing method of the aerial cable. Use a self-tapping screw.
November 1974
11~
cz- _____.
ELC1042/05
V. H. F. TELEVISION TUNER
with diode tuning
ELECTRICAL DATA
Unless otherwise specified all electrical values apply at an ambient temperature. of
25 5 oc and a supply voltage of 12 0,3 V.
Semiconductors , r. f. amplifier
mixer
oscillator
turiing diodes
switching diodes
BF264
BF 195
BF194
3 X BB105G
5 X BA182
+5 to +55 oc
- 25 to+ 85 oc
Supply voltage
Current drawn from+ 12 V supply
band I
band Ill
10 to 16, 5 mA } depending on
22,5to29mA a.g.c. voltage
+2 , 5
+ 4, 9
+2 , 5
+ 4, 3
+12 V 10%
V
V (typical)
V
V (typical)
band I
band Ill
max. 0 , 8 mA
max. 0 , 6 mA
+0,3i:o+25V
max. 30 flA
Switching voltage
band I
band Ill
open circuit
+12 V, 10%
system A
Frequency ranges
band I channel Bl (picture carrier
45 MHz) to channel B5
(picture carrier 66,75 MHz)
band Ill channel B6 (picture carrier
179,75 MHz) to channel Bl4
(picture carrier 219,75 MHz)
Intermediate frequencies
picture
34,65 MHz
sound
38 , 15 MHz
CB
system B
channel E2 (p.c.
48 , 25 MHz) to channel
E4 (p.c. ~2.25 MHz)
channel E5 (p.c.
175 , 25 MHz) to channel
E l2 (p.c. 224,25MHz)
38 , 9 MHz
33,4 MHz
s ystem I
channel lA (p.c.
45 , 75 MHz) to channel
IC (p.c. 61,75 MHz)
channel ID (p.c.
175 , 25 MHz) to channel
IJ (p.c. 215 , 25 MHz)
39,5 MHz
33,5MHz
November 1974
ELC1042/05
a.g.c. characteristic
.,a;
H-+-H-+-H-4--j
VHF
c
0
:;;
,g
1! 10
.~
.~
0
"'
"'
20
30
40
-----
50
60
8
10
a.g.c. voltage I V)
10
a.g.c. voltage I V)
Fig.5.
Fig.6.
7Zl06:
VHF I
N
I
~
70
cha nnel
~
c
CT
.
.E
60
CT
.; 220
H-+++M
84
'-
2
1'
;
.."
.
u
85
IC
"
.,_1'
240 1-H-+-+--1-+-+-+-1---l-+-+-+~
,..
so
a.
----
:::~~
--
lA
81
82
. 200HH-+B
u
a.
40
30
10
20
160
30
F ig. 7.
November 1974
10
20
30
tuning voltage I V)
F ig . 8.
11
CCJ
--
I:
ELC1042/05
V . H. F . TELEVISIO N TUl\lER
with diode tlllling
Input impedance
asymmetrical
symmetrical
75 Q
300 Q (see ACCESSORIES)
v . s . w.r. at nom.
gain
m ax . v. s . w. r.
during ga in con"trol
max . 3,5
max. 3,5
m ax . 3,5
max . 3,5
min. 40 dB
min. 40 dB
R. F. curves
bandwidth, band I, except channel B1
band III
typ. 10 to 12 MHz
typ . 9 to 20 MHz
max. 3 dB
m ax. 3 dB
min. 18 dB
min. 16 dB
typ. 20 dB
typ. 22 dB
min. 18 dB
typ. 25 dB
typ . 24 dB
max. 10
typ. 7,5
max. 10
typ. 7,0
dB
dB
dB
dB
I. F . rejection
band I , channel B2
channel B5
band m
Image rejection
band I
band Ill
min. 30 dB
min . 40 dB
min. 60 dB
min. 60 dB
min. 40 dB
- 11
Novembe
1974
V. H. F. TELEVISION TUNER
ELC1042/05
typ. 8 to 14 mV
typ. 6 to 10 mV
Note 1
in band
(wanted signal: picture carrier frequency
of channel X,
interfering signal: picture carrier of
channel X-2
v.h.f. I
v.h.f. m
typ. 20 mV
typ. 13 mV
min. 200 mV
min. 200 mV
typ. 20 to 50 mV
max. 200kHz
max. 300kHz
max. 300kHz
Note 2
} Note 2
(Note 3)
max. 50kHz
max. 50kHz
November 1974
Q.
CH
.ELC1042/05
V.H.F. TELEVISIONTUNER
I
max. 400 k!-lz
max. 400 k!-l z
---
_l
, _ _ _l2
_ C
_ _ _ _ II
November ~974
ELC1042/0S
V. H. F . TELEVISION TUNER
w'
72 70626
e.m.f. ,75n
!m V)
Vv
w'
...;:
f:::~ ......
1\
channel JC
IH=t.l
t-:.-"
ch annel IG
v.-1
10
---
1
0
10
30
20
40
50
60
10 3
e.m.f.
7Z7062S
,7sn
,\
!m V)
~\ _::;;o
10'
!'-,.../
I\
V
...... :;. . V
1'~
r---
JG Ili E~
\ .X
10
1
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
November 1974
(' 1
.J
ELC1042/05
V. H. F. TELEVISION TUNER
with diode tuning
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Measuring method of power gain
The i. f. output of the tuner should be teqninate d with the circuit given below, the testpoint (terminal 9) not being connected.
8.2pF
i.f. output
of tuner
~ak.n.
detector probe
60pF
Lb
(2.,sonar 75HJ
(2.5turnl
?Z99U1 ,1
"
;t.
tco;e
from
this side
Fig. 11.
Feed an i. f. sweep signal to the v. h. f. I -mixer coupling coiL
6,8 pF
--1 ~--------1~
i.f. sweep
generator
56!1
330
pF
1,2 k.ll
7Z70628
Fig. 12.
Adjust the trimmer (Fig. 11) , tunable coil La/Lb, i. f. output coil of the tuner L18 (Fig. 1) ,
and the coupling between La and Lb to get the resonant curve as given below.
0,5d8
Fig. 13
C14
October 1974
V. H. F. TELEVISION TUNER
ELC1042/05
Display the r. f. + i. f. curve of the tuner at 190 MHz (picture carrier frequency) and
make, if necess ary, s m all corrections in the a lignment of the i. f. coils (La/Lb and Ll8
to get the markers 39 , 5 MHz and 33, 5 MHz symmetrically on the slopes of the curve,
and the peaks at equal a mplitude.
Because the output impedance of the dummy circuit is 50 to 75 Q, the power gain can be
measured in the conventional manner by inserting tuher a nd dummy circuit between a
75 Q source a nd a 75 Q detector (or between a 50 Q source a nd matching pad 50/75 Q and a
50 Q detector).
ACCESSORIES
Aerial input transform~r ELC 1094, catalogue number 3122 107 10121, for converting the
aerial input from 75 Q asymmetric to 300 Q symmetric.
Immunity shield for screening the aerial connection, consisting of:
shield, catalogue number 4313 132 01910
clamp, catalogue number 4313 132 01890
November 1974
:::::l
::::::i
ELC1043/05
Systems
C . C . I. R systems G and I
Channels
21 to 69
Intermediate frequencies
system G
system I
38,9 MHz
33,4 MHz
39,5 MHz
33,5 MHz
picture
sound
APPLICATION
November 1974
Cl7
ELC1043/05
U. H . F. TELEVISION TUNER
with diode tuning
DESCRIPTION
The ELC 1043/05 is an u. h. f. tuner with electronic tuning covering the u. h. f. bands IV
and V (frequenc y range 4 70 to 860 MHz).
Mechanically the tuner is built on a l ow -loss printed- wiring board, carrying all compo nents , in a metal housing made of a rectangular fr a me and front and rear cover (see
Fig. 2). The aer ia l connection is on the frame side, a ll other connections (supply voltages,
a . g. c. voltage and tuning voltage) are made via feedthrough capacitors in the under side.
The mounting method is shown in Figs. 3 and 4.
The tuner is of the three transistor type, comprising two r. f. stages and an oscillator I
mixer. The input circuit is untuned , so that optimum noise figures may be realised,
whilst the additi onal r. f. stage compensates for the increased insertion loss associated
with diode tuned circuits.
Coupling between the first and second r.f. stages is by a half- wave tuned line, between
the second r. f. stage and the mixer is by bandpass half-wave tuned lines . The secondary
of the bandpass is coupled to the emitter of the oscillator/mixer stage via a coupling
loop , which also provides the inductive feedback of the oscillator.
Half-wave lines, terminated at one end by a fixed capacitor and tuned at the other end by
a variable capacitance diode , are used throughout.
The tuner require s transistor supply voltages of+ 12 V, a. g. c. voltages , variable from
+ 2, 5 V (n ormal operating point) to about+ 7, 5 V (maximum a. g. c . ) and a tuning voltage,
variable from+ 0, 3 V to +25 V.
The aerial input of the tuner is a s ymmetrica l. For use in symmetrical aerial systems ,
a eria l transformers (ba luns) are ava ilable (see ACCESSORIES).
Cl8
11
11
November
JQ74
L.
0
<
(1)
a.g.c. voltage
I+ 2,5 to + 7,5VI
(1)
1-j
.....
"''-I
"""
"""
~
g.
.
r. f. supply voltage
(+ 12VI
mixer/oscillator
supply voltage
t+ 12V)
tuning voltage
I+ 0,3 to + 2SVI
(J1
i.f. output
C4
C11
C21
C22
'
'
C2S
test
point
RS
I
I
I
I
R13
~--I
~.
::r
S:
0
0..
(1)
rt
5"
()q
j_
"'
'!1
;;l
r-'
til
<
En
0z
2z
til
aedallTh
I
:r::
rt
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
c:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a"""
,_.
R22
R3
C
26
.....
.....
I
I
I
I
I
"""
:::0
C1
l2
C3I
I~* Q'"
II~
~27
l3
C9I
I~*
II~
:
~28
l19
I~
*
II'~
I~29
l24
18
I4
I1 ~~"~*
T
:
l2S
C3~
II
r-
L------~-------~1_------~-------J--------~---------~
: ~~ ll
n
....
0
..........
F ig. 1.
U1
IJIIUI _
ELC1043/05
U . H. F. TELEVISION TUNER
with diode tuning
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions in mm
oer
---
it
-pCi:J
V)
"l! 'u'4 lt5
1
10
54,6
l
E
+-- - - 91,44136e) - - --
Fig.2
Terminal 2 = a. g. c . voltage, + 2, 5 to +7, 5 V
4 = r . f. supply voltage,
+ 12 V (approx. 8, 8 to 13
mA)
+ 12 V (approx . 3, 6
mA)
10 = i. f. output
E =earth
C20
11
November 1974
ELC1043/05
U. H. F . TELEVISION TUNER
with diode tuning
Mounting
The tuner m ay be mounted by soldering it on to a printed-wiring boa rd, usingthepiercing
diagram s hown in F ig . 3. (The tuner may also be mounted by means of a snap -in mount
or a bracket. Information will be supplied upon request).
The tuner m ay be m ounted anywhere in the receiver and there are no restrictions on
orientati on.
91,44(36e) --------- ~
'
1 +g,1 (5x)
_ -
r-
..
22,86
!9el
l'h - - -- -+-'------.
'iT
I
t
22.86 _
(9e)
...15,24_
(6e)
F ig . 3. Pier c ing diagra m viewed from solder side of board; e = 2, 54 mm (0, 1 in)
screening folded
back over outer cover
.~
, ~Z70671
..... I...
2,5 ma x
make sure that screw
does not protrude deeper
F i g. 4 Reco mmende d fixing method of the aerial cable. Use a self -tapping screw.
.Jovember 1974
11
--::::::l
ELC1043/05
ELECTRICAL DATA
Unless otherwise specified all electrical values apply at an ambient temperature of
25 5 oc and a supply voltage of .12 0, 3 V
Semiconductors , r. f. amplifiers
mixer /oscillator
tuning diodes
2 x BF362
BF363
4 X BB205B
+5 to +55 oc
-25 to+ 85 oc
Supply voltage
Current drawn from+ 12 V supply
r. f . .amplifiers
mixer /oscillator
---
+ 12 V 10%
8, 8 mA (at nominal gain) to 12- 17 mA
(at 30 dB gain reduction)
3,6 mA
+2 , 5 V
approx. 6 , 0 V (max. 7,5 V)
max. 1,2 mA
Intermediate frequencies
system G
system I
38 ,9 MHz
33,4 MHz
39,5 MHz
33,5 MHz
picture
sound
Input impedance
asymmetrical
symmetrical
.____ __.C22
75 Q
300 Q (see ACCESSORIES)
v.s.w .r. atnom .
gain , withouta.g.c .
max. 4, 0
ni.ax. 6,0
11
Au~rnst
197fi
ELC1043/0S
7Z70632
7Z70629
a.g.c. characteristic
iii
I I
I
.i
8SO
channel
68
c:
c:
:;;
,"
~
60
""
" 7SO
~
0"
10
'-
c:
c;
t"
"'
so
::!
20
"
~ 6SO
u
channel 69
a.
40
I~
~
30
u~
~
sso
40
channel 21
~
4SO
so
I~
~
30
21
20
10
30
60
8
a.g.c. voltage
10
(V J
Fig. 6
Fig. 5
A . G.C. range
min . 30 dB
R .F . curves
bandwidth
tilt
typ. 10 to 20 MHz
max. 4, 0 Cm (0 to 2 dB typical)
min. 17 dB
typ. 22 dB
typ. 22 dB
typ. 22 dB
Noise figure
channel 21
channel 50
channel 68
m ax. 10 dB
typ. 6, 0 dB
typ. 6, 5 dB
typ.7,0dB
I. F. rejection
min. 60 dB
min. 53 dB
n + 4 rejection
min. 53 dB
(Obtained between the picture carrier of the wanted channel n and the sound carrier of an
unwanted signal spaced 4 chimnels above the wanted channel.)
-.Jovember 1974
11
ELC1043/05
Signal handling
Minimum input signal (e. m. f.) producing
cross m odulation (1%) at nominal gain,
in channel
(wanted signal: picture carrier-frequency,
interfering signal: sound carrier
frequency).
in band
(wanted s ign a l: picture carrier frequency
of channel X,
interf~ring signal: picture carrier of
channel X-5)
--c::::
typ. 8 mV (Note 1)
typ. 25 mV (Note 1)
typ. 15 to 20 mV (Note 2)
min. 250 mV (Note 2)
typ . 5 to 15 mV (Note 3)
max . 150kH z
max. 500kHz
max. 200kHz
at a gain reduction of 30 dB
max. 100kHz
--==..cC24~-~~~~--~-~~
November 1974
U. H. F. TELEVISION TUNER
with diode tuning
ELC1043/05
----
November 1974
ELC1043/05
U. H. F. TELEVISION TUNER
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Measuring method of power gain
The i. f. output of the tuner should be terminated with the circuit given below.
68pF
Detector probe
(Z =50 nor 75 n)
C2
60pF
Cl
60pF
Fig. 7.
Feed an i. f. sweep signal to the emitter of the BF 363 (mixer /oscillator) and make the
oscillator inoperative (e. g. ferrite core in resonant chamber).
68pF
L
i.f.sweep 1 - l n i - - F
generator
ssn
OL257
Fig. 8.
Adjust the trimmers Cl and C2, coil L (Fig. 7) and the i. f. output coil of the tuner (L21)
to get the resonant curve with maximum gain as shown below.
Fig.9
C26
11
November 1974
ELC1043/0S
U.H.F. TELEVISIONTUNER
.Display the r. f. + i. f. curve of the tuner at 470 MHz and make , if necessary , small
corrections in the alignment of C 1, C2, Land L21 to get the markers 33 , 5 MHz and
39 , 5 MHz symmetrically on the slopes of the curve , and the peaks at equal amplitude .
Because the output impedance of the dummy circuit is 50 to 75 Q, the power gain can be
measured in the conventional manner by inserting tuner and dummy circuit between a
75 Q source and a 75 Q detector (or between a 50 Q source and matching pad 50/75 Q a nd a
50 Q detector).
ACCESSORIES
Aerial input transformer E LC 1095 , catalogue number 2422 542 10951, for converting the
a erial input from 75 Q asymmetric to 300 Q symmetric.
Immunity shield for screening the aerial connection, consisting of:
shield , catalogue number 43 13 132 01910
clamp , catalogue number 43 13 132 01890
November 1974
11
C27
ELC1043/06
11
--
Fig.l
November 1974
II_
C29
ELC2000
11
V.H.F./U.H.F. TELEVISION TUNER
with diode tuning
Systems
Channels
Intermediate frequencies
picture
sound
C. C. I. R. systems Band G
E2 to
C (band I)
ES to E 12 (band Ill)
E21 to E69 (bands IV and V)
38 , 9 MHz
33,4 MHz
APPLICATION
Designed to cover the v. h. f. and u. h. f . channels of C . C. I. R . systems B and G , including
the ita lian channels.
November 1974
11
'
C3 1
ELC2000
DESCRIPTION
The ELC2000 is a combined v.h.f./u.h.f. tuner with electronic tuning andbandswitching,
covering the v. h. f. band I including the Italian channel C (frequency range 4 7 to 88 MHz),
the v . h.f. band Ill (frequency range 174 to 230 MHz), and the u.h.f. band (frequency
range 470 to 860 MHz).
Mechanically, the tuner is built on a low-loss printed-wiring board, carrying all components, in a metal housing made of a rectangular frame and front and rear cover (see
Fig.2). The two aerial connections (v.h . f. and u.h . f .) are on the two frame sides , all
other connections (supply voltages , a. g. c. voltage, tuning and switching voltages) are
made via feedthrough capacitors in the under side. The mounting method is shown in
Figs. 3 and 4.
--
Electrically , the tuner consists of a v.h . f. and u.h.f. part. The v. h . f. aeria l signal is
fed via an i.f. trap , combined with a high pass filter , to a tuned input circuit, which is
connected to the emitter of the input transistor BF 200. The collector load of this . transistor is formed by a double tuned circuit, transferring the signal to the base of the mixer
transistor BF 182. The oscillator is equipped with a transistor BF 194. The four r. f.
circuits are tuned by four capacitance diodes BB 106. Switching between v . h. f. I and III is
achieved by four switching diodes BA 243/244.
The collector circuit of the mixer transistor is a single tuned i. f. resonant circuit , at
the low end of which the i. f. signal is capacitively coupled out of the tuner.
An i. f. injection point is provided at the collector of the mixer, for aligning this circuit
together with the i. f. amplifier of the television receiver.
The u. h. f. part of the tuner consists of a tuned input circuit , connected to the emitter of
the amplifier trans istor BF 180. The interstage network betvreen this transistor and the
self-oscillating mixer stage is formed by a double tuned circuit. A transistor BF 181 acts
as a self-oscillating mixer 1 The four tuned u. h . L circuits are tuned by four capacitance
diodes BB 105B.
The output 'of the self- oscillating mixer is fed to a double tuned i. f. circuit which is
connected to the emitter of the v . h. f. mixer transistor BF 182, now operating as an i. f.
amplifier in grounded base configuration. Band switching between v. h. f. and u . h. f . is
achieved by another diode BA 2 43.
The tuner requires transistor supply vo ltages of+ 12 V, a switching voltage of+ 12 V ,
a. g. c. voltages, variable from +2, 4 V (normal operating point) to about +7, 5 V (maximum a. g. c.) and a tuning voltage, variable from+ 0 , 5 V to+ 2 8 V.
The aerial inputs of the tuner are asymmetrical. For use in symmetrical aerial systems ,
aeria l transformers (baluns) are ava ilable (see ACCESSORIES).
-~-~~ ~~~~~
' - - - - -C32
--"-
November 1974
z0
~
g.
('[)
1-j
......
'D
"
of>.
"'1
~-
!"""'
Rl2
R39
R27
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
..,..,
")
R40
o.g.c. voltage
2,4 to +7,5VI
{+
R3
tumng
voltage
!+0,5to+28V)
=
0
~
swtct)rng
voltage
(+12V I
C35
Hh-1
.6 .
1f
r.f supply
voltage
!+12V)
v.h.f.
osc. supply
voltage
1+121/)
C36
mncer supply
voltage
1+12Y)
C6B~dl
I
'
en
~~:~~ton
test po1nt
1
i.f. output
I
I
I
I
@ .m
ttSt pomt
osc. supply
voltage
{+12V)
test pont
3
r.f. supply
voltage
{+12Vl
~-
o.g.c. voltage
I+ 2,4 to +7,5Vl
m
r-
0
0
0
ELC2000
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions in m m
1...---39,5aerial
u.h.f.
aerial
v.h.f
-:
Fig.2
Terminal 1 =a . g.c. voltage , v.h.f. , +2,4to+7.5V
2 = tlllling voltage. + 0 , 5 to +28 V
3 =switching voltage. + 12 V (approx. 20 mA)
4 = r. f. supply voltage. v. h. f . . + 12 V (approx. 3 to 10 mA)
5 = oscillator supply voltage. v. h. f. . + 12 V (approx. 6 mA)
6 =mixer supply voltage, v. h. f .. + 12 V (approx. 5 mA)
7 =test point 1,. v. h. f.
8 = i. f. output
9 = test point 2 (alignment short)
lO =oscillator supply voltage . u. h. f.. + 12 V (approx . 4 mA)
11 =test point 3, u.h . f.
12 = r . f. supply voltage , u. h. f . + 12 V (approx. 2. 5 to 9 . 5 mA)
13 =a. g . c. voltage . u. h. f. . + 2. 4 to+ 7. 5 V
E =earth
C34
. August 1976
ELC2000
Mounting
The tune r m a y be mounted by soldering it on to a printed-wiring board , using the piercing diagram shown in Fig. 3. (The tuner may also be mounted by means of a snap-in
m ount or a brac ket. Information will be supplied upon request).
The tuner m ay be mounted an ywhere in the receiver and there are no restrictions on
orientation.
43.18117e)
-1
(13x)
7Z 6 074~
Fig. 3. Piercing diagram viewed from solder side of board; e = 2, 54 mm (0, 1 in) .
No connection must be made t o the points 7, 9 and 11, as otherwise the oscillator
r adia tion would increase.
screening folded
back over outer cover
moke sure that screw
does not protrude deeper
r---r""'L
.J?
...1,__
7260737.1
3,5 mox
Fig. 4 Recommended fixing method of the aerial cables. Use a self-tapping screw.
_N_o_v_e_e
mb_r_l9_7_4_~~~
11
C3S
--
t:::
=
-
ELC2000
ELECTRICAL DATA
Unless otherwise specified all electrical values apply at an ambient temperature of
25 5 C and a supply voltage of 12 0 , 3 V.
Semiconductors
bands I and III, r: f. amplifier
mixer
oscillator
tuning diodes
switching diodes
bands IV and V, r. f. amplifier
mixer / oscillator
tuning diodes
drift compensating di ode
BF200
BF182
BF 194
4 x BB106
5 X BA243/244
BF180
BF 181
4 X BBlOSB
BAW62
+'5 to + 55 oc
-25 to+ 85 oc
Supply voltage
Current drawn from+ 12 V supply
band I
band Ill
bands IV and V
A. G. C . voltage (Figs5 , 6 and 7)
band I , at nominal gain
at 40 dB gain redhction
band Ill, at nominal gain
at 40 dB gain reducti on
bands IV and V, at nominal gain
at 30 dB gain reducti on
A.G.C . current
band I )
.
band Ill
at 40 dB gam reduction
bands IV and V , at 30 dB gain reduction
Tuning voltage range (Figs. 8,9 and 10)
Current drawn from 28 V tuning voltage supply
Switching vo ltage
band I
band Ill
bands IV and V
+ 12 V 10%
14 to 21 mA }
34 to 41 mA
31 , 5 to 38 mA
depending
on a . g. c.
voltage
2, 4 V
5, 5 V (typical)
2, 4 V
4, 5 V (typical)
2, 4 V
5 , 0 V (typical)
max. 0, 8 mA
max. 0,6 mA
max. 0 , 7, mA
+0 , 5 to +28 V
ma-x. 361JA
open circuit
+ 12
+ 12 V
C36
_1
V. H. F.
/U. H. F.
ELC2000
TElEVISION TUNER
U60739.
t-r+-t--+-t-t-++-1
V.H.F I
::!
c
0
:;:;
V.H.F.
a.g.c. characteristic
<D
~-
10
-a 10
.~
"'
"'
20
20
30
--
50
a .g.c. voltage I V)
60
Fig. 5.
10
a .g.c. voltage
I V)
Fig. 6.
1Z60741
H +-+-++-+-+-H
a .g.c.characterist tc
<D
U.H.F.
::!
c:
'0
1'
~ 10
"'
20
30 t-++.t-+-
a .g.c. voltage I V I
Fig. 7.
~overnber
1974
C37
ELC2000
-;:;
I
channel
~
""::>
""::>
0'
0'
....~
!
~
E4,B
E3
A
10
20
30
tuning voltage (V)
20
10
30
Fig. 9.
Fig. 8.
69
channel
~
"::>
"
.::
0'
750
H--+-+++
~ 650
a.
tuning voltage (V I
Fig. 10.
C38
11
November 1974
ELC2000
Frequency ranges
band I
band Ill
bands IV and V
Intermediate frequencies
picture
sound
38 , 9 MHz
33 , 4 MHz
lnP.Ut impedance
asymmetrical
symmetrical
75 Q
300 Q (see ACCESSORIES)
v.s.w.r. at nom.
gain
min. 1)
max.2)
min . 1)
max . 2)
max. 3
max. 3
max. 4
max. 4
max. 4
max. 4
max. 4
max. 5
max. 5
max. 5
:::
min. 40 dB
min. 40 dB
min. 30 dB
November 1974
11
C39
--
ELC2000
R. F. curves
bandwidth, band I
band Ill
bands IV and V
tilt, band I
band Ill
bands IV and V. channels E21 to E60
channels E61 to E69
typ. 10 to 15 MHz
typ. 10 to 15 MHz
typ. 15 to 25 MHz
max. 3 dB
max . 3dB
max. 3dB
max . 4dB
min.
typ.
typ.
min.
typ.
typ .
min.
typ.
.typ.
typ.
Noise figure
band I
channel
band Ill
channel
bands IV and
channel
channel
channel
max. 8, 5
typ. 6, 5
max.
8
typ. 6 , 5
max. 12
typ. 8, 0
typ . 9 , 5
typ. 10 ,5
E4
E9
V
E21
E51
E69
26
29
32
25
28
28
25
32
29
33
dB ,
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
I. F. rejection
band I, channel E2
channel C
band Ill
bands IV and V
min.
min.
min.
min.
Image rejection
band I
band Ill
bands IV and V
40
60
60
60
dB
dB
dB
dB
min. 40 dB
min. 60 dB
min. 40 dB
November 1974
-----------------n~----------------------------r --------------~
2422 542 12003
V . H. F.
/U . H. F.
ELC2000
TELEVISION TUNER
typ.
4 i:nV
typ.
4 mV
typ. 5 to 10 mV
lj
Note 1
typ. 15 to 60 mV
typ. 10 to 50 mV
typ. 15 to 50 mV
Note 1
typ.
10 mV
typ. > 200 m V
typ.
> 25 mV}
> 25 mV
typ.
typ. 10 to 20 mV
in band
(wanted s ign al: picture carrier frequency
of channel X,
interfering signa l : picture carrier of
channel X- 2 (v.h.f.), X-5 (u.h.f.)
v. h. f. I
v .h.f . Ill
u. h. f.
max. 400kHz
max. 300kHz
max. 300kHz
max. 600kHz
Note 2
Note 3
Q.
--=-~~ -~---~~~~
_No_vemb_er1_974
C4 1
-3
.--
.-
ELC2000
at a gain reduction of 30 dB
Oscillator radiation
The tuner is in conformity with the radiation requirements of C. I. S. P. R. Recommendation No. 24/3, provided the following conditions are fulfilled:
- A low-pass filter (Fig. 11) with a cut-off frequency of about 300 MHz has to be inserted
between the v. h. f. aerial terminal of the tuner and the aerial terminal of the receiver.
Television receivers with a common v. h. f. /u . h . f . connector in combination with a
low -pass/high-pass splitter do not need this additional filter .
SO nH
SO nH
7Z70627
Fig. 11.
- No connections must be made to the terminals 7, 9, and 11.
- Earthing of the tuner and connections to the i. f. amplifier have to be made in such a
way, that additional radiation is prevented.
Microphonics
If the tuner is installed in a professional manner, there will be no microphonics .
C42
November J974
ELC2000
7Z6074 9 1
e.m.f.,7SQ
(m V)
.........
- --
channel E2S
channel E55 ---.,
b----:: ~
10
p--
-~
!"<channel E9
I'- channel E4
0"'
"'
--
I
1
-10
10
30
20
gain reduction ldBJ
channel E4(E2l
e.m.f .,75Q
(m V)
/V
1----'
/ I
V
?......::=
\.'
-'
............
.............
--
./
E9 IE7J
EGO lESS)
10
-10
10
30
20
gain reduction (dB)
Fig. 13. Cross modulation, in band; the interfering channels are given between brackets.
_ N_ov_ e_mb
_ e_r _1_9_7_4
-~~~
11
C43
ELC2000
APPLICATION INFORMATION
Connection of the tuner
For connection of the tuner the termin a l location, F ig. 2, should be consulted .
If the tuner is used in receivers the chassis of which is connected t o the mains, iso lating
capacitors according i:o the s afety rules have to be inserted in the aeria l leads.
Five ways of connecting, depending on the number of switches ava ilable , a re given below.
I
4
tuner
term inals
--
~ v.h.f.!
c::
u.h.f.
tuning
a.g.c.
voltage
!+0,5 to +28VJ
voltage
(+2,4. to+ 7,5VI
10
11
12
13
v.h.f.!
12
tuner
terminals
13
47fl
v.h.f. I
u.h.f.
726011.61
tuning
voltage
(+ 0,5 to +28VI
a.g.c.
voltage
1+ 2,4 to +7.5VI
supply
voltage
i.f.
t+12V~6~vl
C44
__...__.ll .~-----~11
November 1974
ELC2000
tuner
termnals
10
11
<;
47n
r
12
13
E.I!...
47n
R2
-t___j-
L...--<
v.h.f.
0
v.h.f.l
u.h.f.
f.":\
f.:\
V.2J
v.h.f. l
v. h.f.ID
o--u.h.f.
1Z6551.9 .1
-c::J-~
tuning
voltage
{+ 0,5 to +28VI
-1--- ---1R3
a .g.c.
supply
voltage
(+1.7 to + 1Vi
voltage
{+12V 10%1
i.f.
tuner
terminals
supply
vo ltage
10
11
12
13
i.f.
C+12V~~~vl
November 1974
C45
ELC2000
tuner
terminals
10
11
12
13
7Z6 55501
=
--
l~
-c::J--{
R3
tunmg
a.g.c .
supply
voltage
I+ 0.5 to+ 28VI
voltage
I+ 1.7 to+ 7VI
voltage
i.f.
1+12V~~\vl
C46
November 1974
V.H.F./U.H.F. TELEVISIONTUNER
ELC2000
The i. f. output of the tuner should be terminated with the circuit given below.
The terminals 7 , 9 and 11 should be not connected.
La
(20turns1
B.2 pF
i.f. output =i18k.O.
of tuner
60pF
Lb
(Z=50nor75n)
(2.5turn1
z
%
tco;e
from
this side
Fig. 19
Switch the tuner to the v. h . f. Ill band; the tuning voltage should be 15 to 20 V.
Feed an i. f. sweep signal (e. m. f. 500 to 1000 m V) to the i. f. injection point.
Adjust the trimmer (Fig. 19), tunable coil (La/Lb) , i. f. output coil of the tuner Ll9
(Fig. 1) and the coupling between La and Lb to get the resonant curve as given below.
Fig.20
Then display the r. f. + i. f. curve of the 't uner at 190 MHz (picture carrier frequency) and
make small corrections in the alignment of the i. f. coils (La/Lb and L19 , if neccessary,
to get the markers 38,9 MHz and 33,4 MHz symmetrically on the slopes of the curve ,
and the peaks at equal amplitude.
Because the output impedance of the dummy circuit is 50 to 75 Q, the power gain can be
measured in the conventional manner by inserting tuner and dummy circuit between a
75 Q source and a 75 Q detector (or between a 50 Q source and matching pad 50/75 Q and a
50 Q detector).
ACCESSORIES
Aerial input transformer ELC 1094 , v . h. f. , catalogue number: 2422 542 10941
Aerial input transformer ELC2092, u.h.f. , catalogue number: 2422 542 12921
November 1974
~~11
C47
--
ELC2060
11
V.H ~ F./U.H.F. TELEVISION TUNER
Systems
Channels 1)
Intermediate frequencies
picture
sound
APPLICATION
Designed to cover the Australian v. h . f. and u. h. f. channels of C. C.I.R. syste ms Band G.
1) In a ccorda nce with the publicat ions of the Australian Broadcasting Control Board (ABCB).
May 1976
C49
--
EL~
V.H.F./U.H.F. TELEVISIONTUNER
3122 12 8 56991
DESCRIPTION
The ELC2060 is a combined v. h. f. /u. h. f. tuner with electronic tuning and band switching,
covering the low v. h. f. band with the channels 0 i:o 4 (frequency range 45 to 101 MHz),
the high v. h. f. band with the channels 5 to 11 (frequency range 101 to 222 M[Iz), and the
u.h.f. band with the channels 28 to 63 (frequency range 526 to 814 MHz).
Mechanically, the tuner is built on a low-loss printed- wiring board, carrying all components, in a metal housing made of a rectangular frame and front and rear cover (see
Fig.2) . The two aerial connections (v. h.f. and u.h.f.) are on the .two frame sides, all
other connections (supply voltages, a . g. c. voltage, tuning and switching vo ltages) are
made via feed-through capacitors in the under side. The mounting. method is shown in
Figs. 3 and 4.
Electrically, the tuner consists of v. h. f. and u. h. f . parts. The v. h. f. aerial signal is
fed via an i. f. trap, combined with a high-pass filter, to a tuned input circuit, which is
connected to the emitter of the input transistor BF200. The collector load of this transistor is forme<i by a double tuned circuit, transferring the signal to the base of the mixer
transistor BF183. The oscillator is equipped with a t'ransistor BF494. The four r.f.
circuits are tuned by four capacitance diodes BB109G. A capacitance diode BB106
provides a frequency-dependent coupling of the r. f. input signal to the tuned input circuit.
Switching between the low and high v . h. f. bands is done by four switching diodes (BA 182,
BA243 , and BA244) .
The collector circuit of the mixer trans istor is a single tuned i. f. resonant circuit, at
the low end of which the i. f. signal is capacitively coupled out of the tuner (low capaci-tance coupling) . An i. f. inj ection point is provided at the collector of the m ixer, for
aligning this circuit together with the i. f. a mplifier of the television rece iver.
' The u. h. f. part of the tuner consists of a tuned input c ircuit, connected to the e mitter of
the amplifier transistor BF 183. The inter - stage network between this transistor and the
self-oscillating mixer stage is for med by a double tuned circuit. A trans istor BF 181 acts
as a self-oscillating mixer. The four tuned .u . h. f. c ircuits are tuned by four capacitance
diodes BB105B.
The output of the self-oscillating mixer is fed to a double tuned i. f. circuit which is
connected to the e mitter of the v. h. f. mixer transistor BF 183, now operating as an i. f.
amp lifier in grounded-base configuration. Band switching between v. h. f. and u. h. f. is
ach ieved by a diode BA243 .
The tuner requires transistor supply voltages of +12 V, a switching voltage of -d2 V,
a. g. c. voltages, var iable from +2, 4 V (normal operating point) to about+ 7, 5 V (maximum a.g. c.) and a tuning voltage, variable from +0, 5 V to +28 V.
The aerial inputs of the tuner are asym metrical. For use in symmetrical aeria l systems,
aer ial transformers (baluns) are available (see ACCESSORIES) .
C50
May 1976
'1'
I
I
a:
Pl
so~L2
f~l
C251
~~
o' '
607
IC201
I ,
.....
-o
.....
"'
I
I
I
I
t---
---'
R307
I
'Ij
.....
I
I
I
I
RJ04
RJ02
3o1
R306
309
R
310
-I
I
I
I
R322
R339
R327
I
I
I
I
I
I
IC267
~R308
0601
11
R303
~II
j j
--~---~~-~-~---~---~~---~~---~~---1~---~~---~~---~~---:~---~~-~
ens fl
cm
lt-U-
I
l
CZJ?
tf tnjectton
potnt
C238
C239
o.g.c. YOitage
tumng
I+ 2.4 to +7,5VJ
voltage
1+0.5 to+28VJ
C240
C241
C242
swttchtng
voJtog
r.f. supply
osc. supply
voltage
1+12VI
(+12V)
voltage
I 12 VI
v.h.f.
C24J
mtur supply
voltage
f+,I2VJ
C244
C245
test point
1
if. output
C246
tes t potnt
2
C247
osc.supply
lfOitage
C248
C249
test pomt
3
(+12VI
C250
I'TI
r-
!'.)
a-.
u.h.f
L__ _ _ _ _ _ ___.-..--~-__..lUlU-------~-----
ELC2060
3122 12 8 56991
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions in mm
111,3 4
~;;J
02 ,6 hole for
self topping screw
1,.___ 3 9 , 5 -
aerial
Y.h.f
--
'}ES!!3~
n:L,:,.,_~----109max
_:r
56.78
e = 2 , 54 mm (0, 1 in)
-----
Fig . 2 .
ELC2060
312212856991
Mounting
The tuner may be mounted by soldering it on to a printed-wiring board, using the piercing
diagram shown in Fig. 3. (The tuner may also be mounted by means of a s nap -in mount or a bracket. Information will be supplied upon request . )
The tuner may be mounted anywhere in the receiver and there are no restrictions on
orientation.
-. .
104.14 (41el
1.3+g.1 (Sx)
43.18(17el
to po1nt:
\,
_E+\.
-er
1 +0.1 (13x)
0
L L L 1 - - L 1 - - L1- . 1 -1-
22.86
(9el
10.16
(4e)
,_2e_l-._ __,
1- L 1 -l 7.62(3e)
(13xl
7Z60745
Fig. 3. Piercing diagram viewed from solder s ide of board; e = 2, 54 mm (0, 1 in).
No connection must be made to the points 7, 9 and 11, otherwise the osc illator
radiation may ~crease.
screening folded
back over outer cover
~W"w
....11....
7Z60737.2
3,5max
make sure that screw
does not protrude deeper
Fig. 4. Recommended fixing method of the aerial cilbles. Use a self-tapping screw.
--
ELC2060
V.H.F./U.H.F. TELEVISIONTUNER
--
ELECfRICAL DATA
BF200
BF183
BF494
4 X BB109G
BB106
2 X BA1 82; 1 X BA243 ; 2
BF180
BF1 81
4 X BB105B
BAW62
+5 to +55 oc
-25 to +85 oc
Relative humidity
max. 90%
Supply voltage
Current drawn from +12 V supply
lowv.h.f. band
high v. h. f. band
u.h. f. band
2,4 V
typ . 5, 5 V
2,4 V
typ. 4,5V
2,4 V
typ. 5, 0 V
A.G.C. current
low v.h.f. band }
at 4 0 dB gain reduction
. h v. h . f . b and
h 1g
,
u. h. f. band, at 30 dB gain reduction
max. 0,8 mA
max. 0,6 mA
ma x . 0, 7 mA
+0 ,5 to +28 V
max. 36 fJA
BA244
depending
on a. g. c.
voltage
Note: The source impedance of the tuning voltage offered to terminal 2, must be max.
30 kQ at tuning voltages below 2 V.
Switching voltage
low v. h . f. band
high v. h. f. band
u.h . f. band
open circuit
+12 V
+12 V
Note: In the low v. h. f. band position, the tuner produces a negative voltage (1 to 5 V) at
terminal 3; thisterminalmus.t not be loaded with anexternalresistancebelow20MQ.
V. H. F.
/U. H. F
ELC2060
TELEVISION TUNER
H--t-t-+-t-t-++-1 a .g.c.
m
~
.,
c:
0
:J
-~ 10
"'
;:;
10
c:
Cl
20
20
30
40
50
a .g.c. voltage (V l
60
Fig. 5
a.g.c. voltage
10
(V)
Fig. 6.
1260741.
ID
~
C:
0
~
:J
"0
-a
10
Cl
20
3 0 f-++-+-+-
50 2~~~4~-L~~6-L~~a~~~1o
Fig. 7.
May 1976
--
ELC2060
"""
v.h.f.
120
channel
channel
.,c:
"
c:
""
fT
"
250
,..u
>u
"'
Ihigh v.h.f.
1--,
~ 200
100
11
H...., 10
fT
9
8
...
I.
'E"
.3"
.,
... 150 - f - -
eo
a.
-f-
a.
r- 1 - -
r-rr-
SA
100 ~
60 r-
0
1.0
0
10
20
30
30
20
10
Fig.9.
Fig. 8.
~900~-+~+-~-+~+-~-+~~
,..u
H-+++-H-+++-H-+-1-+-lchannel
c:
""
"
~800~~+-~-+~
fT
"'+-l-~ 63
+-!H-+~60
4-+-~-+4-+-~-+~30
H-+1-+-!H-+1-t-H~
20
28
30
tuning voltage (V l
Fig. 10.
M~
1976
ELC2060
- Frequency ranges
low v. h. f. band
highv.h.f. band
u.h.f. band
Intermediate frequencies
picture
sound
Input impedance
asymmetrical
symmetrical
75Q
306 Q (see ACCESSORIES)
v . s.w . r. at nom.
gain
max. v.s.w.r.
during gain control
min. 1)
max; 2)
min. 1
max. 2)
max. 3
max. 4
max. 4
max.
max.
max.
max.
max. 4
max. 4,5
max . 4,5
max.
max.
max.
max.
5
5
6
4
min. 40 dB
min. 40 dB
min. 30 dB
5,5
5,5
6
5
----
--
ELC2060
9 to 13 MHz
typ. 9 to 14 MHz
typ. 13 to 18 MHz
3dB
max.
max . 3,5 dB
3dB
max.
3dB
max.
) typ.
min.
min.
typ.
typ.
typ.
typ.
min.
typ.
typ .
25
21
31
29
24
29
25
30
32
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
max.
typ.
typ.
9dB
7dB
7dB
max.
typ.
max.
typ .
max .
typ .
max.
typ.
typ.
lldB
9 dB
8,5 dB
6,5 dB
8dB
SdB
12 dB
8,5 dB
9,5 dB
I. F. rejection
min.
min.
min.
min.
40
50
60
60
dB
dB
dB
dB
min.
min.
min.
50 dB
60 dB
40 dB
M .<w
1 07~>---
ELC2060
typ.
typ.
typ.
4mV
4mV
5 to 10 mV
_May1_976_
[[ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
~11~
~ n,
_ _ _ _ __.
--
ELC2060
max.
max.
200 k:Hz
250 k:Hz
Oscillator radiation
The tuner is in conformity with the radiation requirements of the Australian Standard
AS 1053-1973 and of C . I. S. P .R. Recommendation No. 24/ 3, provided the following
conditions are fulfilled :
- A low-pass filter (Fig. 11) with a cut- off frequency of about 300 MHz has to be
inserted betweenthev.h.f. aerial terminal of the tuner and the aerial terminal of
the receiver. Television receivers with a common v . h. f. /u. h. f. connector in
combination with a low-pass/high-pass splitter 1) may not need this additional filter .
50 nH
50 nH
7Z70627
Fig. 11.
- No eonnections must be made to the terminals 7, 9 and 11.
- Earthing of the tuner and connections to the i. f. amplifier have to be made in such a
wa y, that additional radiation is prevented.
Microphonics
If the tuner is installed in a professional manner, there will be no microphonics.
Mav 1976
3122 12 8 5699 1
'
ELC2060
10 3
7Z73 77 3
e.m.f.,75fl
(m V)
-- -
102
~
channel 33
channel 60
./
[>-'
v k:::: ~ ::::K
!-"'
10
I--"
'-- b::::
--~-~
f=-. channel B
~ channel 3
'
--:::::i
1.6-'
1
-10
10
30
20
gain reduction (dB)
7 Z?3772
channel 3 (-14MHz l
.m.f.,75fl
1'\.
(m V)
channel 33!!_f!}
)V
V 1\."
v
"' f-... r-..
I--"
__..
1...4
1--.:
"(V
B (6)
"'--channel 60 (55)
10
1
-10
10
20
30
ga in red uc tion (dB)
F ig . 13. Cr oss -modu lation , in band ; the inter fer ing channe ls are given between brackets .
May 1976
C6 1
ELC2060
APPLICATION INFORMATION
Connection of the tuner
For connection of the tuner the terminal1ocation , Fig. 2, should be consulted.
If the tuner is used in receivers the chassis of which is connected to the mains, isolating
capacitors according to the safety rules have to be inserted in the aer ia l leads.
Five ways of connecting, depending on the number of switches available, are given below.
tuner
7
0
terminals
E
E
(~low
v.h.f.
tuning
'/
voltage
(+0,5 to +28Vl
u.h.f
10
11
12
13
low
v.h.f.
a.g.c.
i.f.
. 1Z131&7
voltage
1+2,4 to +7,5Vl
tuner
terminals
10
11
0
12
13
47fi
low v.h.f.
u.h.f.
7273768
tuning
a.g-.c.
voltage
1+0,5 to +28Vl
voltage
1+2,4 to +7,5Vl
supply
i.f.
voltage
1+12v~a~vl
C62
-''-----~-------11 ~1976
~LC2060
3122 12 8 56991
tuner
terminals
10
11
12
13
high
v.h.f.
low
v.h.f.
u.h.f.
u.h.f.
7Z73770
-c:::r~
(~
R3
a.g.c.
tunmg
voltage
(+0,5to+2BVI
voltage
(+ 1,7 to +7VI
supply
i.f.
voltage
(+12V10%1
:::::l
tuner
7
0
terminals
9
0
10
11
0
12
13
47n
47n
high
v.h.f.
u.h.f.
7l13169
supply
i.f.
voltage
1+12V~~~vl
ELC2060
tuner
terminals
10
11
12
13
47n
high
v. h.f.
u.h.f.
1Z ?l 771
~~
tunmg
voltage
I+ 0.5 to+ 2BVI
'
-c=:r-~
R3
a.g.c .
voltage
(+ 1,7 to+ 7VI
supply
voltage
i.f.
1+12V~8~vl
ELC2060
MEASURING METHODS
Power gain
The i. f. output of the tuner should be terminated with the dummy circuit given below.
The terminals 7, 9 and 11 should be not connected.
=I
8,2pF
i.f. output
of tuner
18
kfi
detector probe
IZ= son or 7S.n l
60pF
7273762
Fig. 19.
The dummy circuit should be aligned as follows.
Switch the tuner to the high v. h. f. band; the tuning voltage should be 15 to 20 V .
Feed an i. f. sweep signal (500 to 1000 m V) to the i. f. injection point.
Adjust the trimmer (Fig. 19), tunable coil (La/Lb), i.f. output coil of the tuner L519
(Fig. 1) and the coupling between La and Lb to get the resonant curve as given below.
Fig. 20.
Then display the r. f. + i. f . curve of the tuner at 190 MHz (picture carrier frequency) and
make small corrections in the alignment of the i. f. coils (La/Lb and L519), if necessary,
to get the markers 36, 875 MHz .and 31,375 MHz symmetrically on the slopes of the curve,
and the peaks at equal amplitude.
Because the output impedance of the dummy circuit is 50 to 75 Q, the power gain can be
measured in the conve.ntional manner by inserting tuner and dummy circuit between a
75 Q source and a 75 Q detector (or between a 50 Q source and matching pad 50/75 Q a nd
a 50 Q detector).
Tuning range of i. f. output circuit
The i. f. output of the tuner s):10uld be
terminated with the circuit given in
Fig. 21. The terminals 7, 9 and 11
should not be connected.
i.f. output
of tuner
----------+
100pF
1Z73763
Fig. 21.
detector probe
IZ=50fi or 75fil
ELC2060
ACCESSORIES
Aerial input transformer ELC 1094, v. h. f. , catalogue number: 2422 542 10941;
aerial input transformer ELC2092, u.h.f., catalogue number: 2422 542 12921;
coaxial aerial input assembly, catalogue number : 3122 127 10450 .
ELC2070
3122 12 8 54200
System
Channels (South African channel
distribution)
Intermediate frequencies
picture
sound
C.C.l.R. system I
4 to 13 (v.h.f. band)
21 to 69 (u. h. f. band)
38,9 MHz
32,9 MHz
APPLICATION
---
:::::
_May1_976_
__________.~_________.....11
__ull _
('; 6 7
ELC2070
--
DESCRIPTION
The ELC2070 is a combined v. h. f./u. h. f. tuner with electronic tuning and band switching,
covering the South African v.h. f. band (frequency range 174 to 254 MHz) and the u. h . f.
band (frequency range 470 to 860 MHz) ..
Mechanically, the tuner is built on a low-loss printed- wiring board, carrying all components, in a metal housing made of a rectangular frame and front and rear cover (see
Fig. 2). The two aerial connections (v. h. f. and u. h. f.) are on the two frame sides, all
other connections (supply voltages, a. g. c. voltage and tuning voltage) are made via feedthrough capacitors in the under side. The mounting method is shown in Figs. 3 and 4 .
Electrically, the tuner consists of v. h. f . and u . h. f. parts. The v. h. f. aerial signal is
fed via an i. f. trap, combined with a high-pass filter, to a tuned input circuit, which is
connected to the emitter of the input transistor BF200. The collector load of this transistor is formed by a double tuned circuit, transferring the signal to the base of the mixer
transistor BF 182. The oscillator is equipped with a transistor BF494. The four r. f.
circuits are tuned by four capacitance diodes BB106.
The collector circuit of the mixer transistor is a single tuned i. f. resonant circuit, at
the low end of which the i. f. signal is capacitively coupled out of the tuner.
An i. f. injection point is provided at the collector of the mixer, for aligning this circuit
together with the i. f . amplifier of the television receiver.
The u. h. f . part of the tuner consists of a tuned input" circuit, connected to the emitter of
the amplifier transistor BF 180. The inter-stage network between this transistor and the
self-oscillating mixer stage is formed by a double tuned circuit. A transistor BF 181 acts
as a self-oscillating mixer . The four tuned u . h. f. circuits are tuned by four capacitance
d\odes BB105B.
The output of the self-oscillating mixer is fed to a double tuned i. f. circuit which is
connected to the emitter of the V. h. f. mixer transistor BF 182' now operating as an i. f.
amplifier in grounded-base configuration. Band switching between v . h. f. and u. h. f . is
achieved by a diode BA243.
The tuner requires transistor supply voltages of -t; l2 V, a. g. a. voltages, variable from
+2, 4 V (normal operating point) to about+ 7, 5 V (maximum a . g. c.), and a t uning voltage,
variable from +0, 5 V to +28 V.
The aerial inputs of the tuner are asymmetrical. For use in symmetrical aerial systems,
aerial transformers (baluns) are available (see ACCESSORIES).
C68
May
=.,
19
'-17~
6
_ ___.
i
E:
P>
'<
....
"'
"'
.....,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\'1
~
f~ ~~ ..r~~ ,4
~ ~ , ~r:
~c:I
r~,r,
SOS
C205 --
cm
(j,'j)
IH
C251
0 611
RJJO
506
da:;~ o--t----,r--
I
I
l C207I
f---------1
I
I
I
R307
I
I
?....
I
I
R304
R306
310
R
311
I
I
I
I
I
RJ39
R327
R322
I
I
I
I
I
I
III
0601
I
J
()
~
.0
RJOJ
RJOB
==
HI--t-!
.6 .
1f. ~~:~~t1on
tuning
voltage
r.f. supply
vol tage
osc. supply
vol t age
mixer supply
voltage
(+0,5 to+28V)
I+ 12VI
I+12VI
(+12VI
I;
I
I
I C238
C2J9
C241
C242
C243
C244
'-- -1 f.;::- - - -1 f.;:: - - - - - - - - -1 f.;: - - - -11;;- - - -jl;;-- - -j
0
0
@
0
a .g.c. voltage
1+2,4 to +7,5VI
t est point
1
C268
C237
C245
C246
i.f. output
C247
t est point
2
v. hJ
- - - - - - - - - - -UUUI
C248
osc. supply
voltage
C249
b-- --1
t est point
3
(+12VI
C250
r.f. supply
voltage
(+ 12VI
u~t
o.g.c. voltage
(+ 2,4 to + 7,5 VI
r-
to.)
0
.....,
0
ELC2070
V. H. F.
MEC~ANICAL
DATA
111,34
Dimensions in mm
Fig.2
Terminal1=a.g.c. voltage, v.h . f., +2,4to+7,5V
2 =tuning voltage, +0, 5 to +28 V
4 = r. f. supply voltage, v. h . f., +12 V (approx . 3 to 10 mA)
5 =oscillator supply voltage, v. h~f., +12 V (approx. 6 mA)
6 =mixer supply voltage, v. h. f., + 12 V (approx. 5 mA)
7 =test point 1, v. h. f.
8 = i. f . output
9 = test point 2 (alignment short)
10 =oscillator supply voltage, u. h. f., +12 V (approx . 4, 1 mA)
11 =test point 3, u. h. f.
12 = r. f. supply voltage, u. h. f. , +12 V (approx. 2, 5 to 9, 5 mA)
13 =a ..g.c. voltage, u.h.f., +2,4to+7,5V
E =earth
C70
May 1976
ELC2070
Mounting
The tuner may be mounted by soldering it on to a printed-wiring board, using the piercing diagram shown in Fig. 3. (The tuner may .a lso be mounted by means of a snap-in
mount or a bracket. Information will be supplied upon request.) .
The tuner may be mounted anywhere in the receiver and there are no restrictions on
orientation.
104,14 (41el
1
1
li/+-1,3+~,
(Sxl
110xl
7273777
Fig. 3. Piercing diagram viewed from solder side of board; e = 2, 54 mm (0, 1 in).
No connection must be made to the points 7,9 and 11, otherwise the oscillator
radiation may increase.
screening folded
back over outer cover
~~w~
. .11....
7Z60737.2
3,5max
make sure that screw
does not protrude deeper
Fig. 4. Recommended fixing method of the aerial cables. Use a self-tapping screw.
May 1976
ELC2070
V.H.F./U.H.F. TELEVISIONTUNER
ELECfRICAL DATA
BF200
BF182
BF494
4 X BB106
BA243
BF180
BF181
4 X BB105B
BAW62
+5 to +55 oc
-25 to +85 C
Supply voltage
Current drawn from +12 V supply
v. h. f. band
u . h. f. band
14to21mA
11,5 to 18 mA
2,4 V
typ. 4,5 V
2,4 V
typ.5,0V
A.G.C. current
v. h. f. band, at 40 dB gain reduction
u. h. f. band, at 30 dB gain reduction
max. 0,6 mA
max. 0, 7 mA
u.h. f. band
depending on
a. g. c . voltage
+0,5to+28V
max. 36
J.lA
3122 12 8 54200
ELC2070
726~
7Z60739.
a.g.c. characteristic
v.h.f.
a.g.c. characteristic
u.h.f.
c:
0
"""
'0
-~ 10
10
"'
20
20
30
40
40
50
50
10
60
Fig.6
2
8
10
a.g.c. voltage (V)
Fig.S
channel
13
>.
.."
.
.,_
..
.E
s
.
_3
>.
..
.."
.
.E
u
c:
c:
11
er
'-
10
'-
9
8
er
.:: 750
'-
"
201ll-+-i-Hf-
"
a.
5
4
tuning voltage I V)
F ig. 7
_ M_a
y19_76
Fig. 8
-~~ ~~~~~~~ ~
----
ELC2070
Intermediate frequencies
picture
sound
38,9 MHz
32,9 MHz
Input impedance
asymmetrical
symmetrical
75 Q
300 Q (see ACCESSORIES)
v.s.w.r. at nom.
gain
max . v. s . w. r .
during gain control
min. 1)
max. 2)
min. 1)
max. 2)
max. 3,5
max. 3,5
max. 5
max. 6
max. 4
max. 4
max. 4
max. 5
max. 6
max . 5
v. h. f. band, channels 4 to 9
channels 10 to 13
u. h. f. band
A.G.C. range
v.h.f. band
u. h. f. band
min. 40 dB
min. 30 dB
R:. F. curves
bandwidth, v. h . f. band
u. h. f. band
tilt, v. h. f. band
u. h . f. band, channels 21 to 60
channels 61 to 69
typ. 8 to 15 MHz
typ. 15 to 25,MHz
max.
3dB
max.
3dB
max .
4dB
min.
typ.
typ.
min.
typ.
typ.
typ.
Noise figure
v.h.f. band
channel 9
u. h. f . band
channel 21
channel 51
channel 69
max.
9dB
typ. 6,5 dB
max. 12 dB
typ. 8, 0 dB
typ. 9,5 dB
typ. 10,5 dB
24 dB
28 dB
27 dB
25 dB
32 dB
29 dB
33 dB
C74
11
May 1976
ELC2070
I. F. rejection
v. h. f. band
u.h.f. band
min. 60 dB
min. 60 dB
Image rejection
v. h. f. band
u.h. f. band
min. 60 dB
min. 40 dB
typ.
typ.
in band
(wanted signal: signal carrier frequency
of channel N,
interfering signal: picture carrier of
channel N-2 (v.h.f.), N-5 (u.h.f.)
v .h. f. band
u. h. f. band
4 mV
5 to 10 mV
} 1)
::::l
~
typ. 10 to 50 mV
typ. 15 to 50 mV
} 1)
typ.
10 mV
typ. >200 mV
} 2)
typ.
>25 mV
typ. 10 to 20 mV
} 3)
max. 400kHz
May 1976
Q,
ELC2070
V.H.F./U.H.F. TELEVISIONTUNER
max . 300kHz
max. 600kHz
v.h.f. band
u.h . f . band
at a gain reduction of 30 dB
Drift of oscillator frequency
at a change of the ambient temperature
from 25 to 40 C
v.h.f. band
u. h. f. band
max. 400kHz
max . 500kHz
Oscillator radiation
The tuner is in conformity with the radiation requirements of C. I. S. P. R. Recommendation No . 24/3, provided the following conditions are fulfilled:
- A low-pass filter (Fig. 9) with a cut-off frequency of about 300 MHz has to b~ inserted
between the v. h. f. aerial terminal of the tuner and the aerial terminal of the receiver.
Television receivers with a common v. h. f . / u. h. f. connector in combination with a
low-pass/high-pass splitter 1) may not need this additional filter.
50 nH
50 nH
?Z?0627
Fig.9
- No connections must be made to the terminals 7, 9 and 11.
- Earthing of the tuner a nd connections to the i. f. amplifier have to be made in such a
way, that additional r adiat im:i. is prevented.
Microphonics
lf the tuner is installed in a professional manner, there will be no microphonics.
3122 12 8 54200
ELC2070
10 3
7Z73782
e.m.f.,75n
(m V)
10 2
channel 8
channel 25,
channel 55
10
..........
.......
.......
'"' p
/
~ !'..
......-:
~~
..--
-- --
-""""
1---
.......
1
-10
:::::.
---
10
20
30
gain reduction (dB)
7Z7J781
m.f.,75n
(m V)
!l_fj
channel 30
/'
1--
-V
\.
_...
r--
./
/
\\._ I'
10
'- channel
~ ~ 1'\ channel
8 (6)
60 (55)
-10
10
20
30
Fig. 11. Cross- m odulation, in band; the interfering channels are g iven between brackets.
'
May 1976
ELC2070
3122 12 8 54200
APPLICATION INFORMATION
Connection of the tuner
For connection of the tuner the terminal location, Fig. 2, should be consulted.
If the tuner is used in receivers the chassis of which is connected to the mains, isolating
capacitors according to the safety rules have to be inserted in the aerial leads.
Three ways of connecting, depending on the number of sw itches ava ilable, aregivenbelow.
~.,.
9
0
10
<;
~-1---__J
:
E
-~
u.h.f.
---------
<;
13
'---
'\
12
)47!1
147!1
v.h.f.
11
0
u.h.f.
.:~
tuning
voltage
(+0,5 t o +28Vl
a .g.c.
voltage
(+2,4 to +7,5VJ
supply
i.f.
7Z1l'780
voltage
(+12V10%J
tuner
terminals
10
12
13
u.h .f.
cl,;
tuning
voltage
(+0,5 to +28VJ
"
a.g.c.
voltage
(+3,2 to +8V)
supply
i.f.
7Z7J778
vOltage
(+12V:!:10%)
C78
II _ _ _~_II_M~"
1071> _ _ _ .
ELC2070
V.H.F./U.H.F. TELEVISIONTUNER
tuner 1
terminals
7
0
9
0
10
12
13
R1
-c::::J--~
tuning
voltage
1+0,5 to +28V)
R3
a.g.c.
voltage
1+1,7 to +7VI
supply
i.f.
7Z13179
voltage
1+12V10%1
signal can be fed to test point 3 (terminal 11) via a capacitor of 0, 82 to 1 pF. The tuner
must be s w_itched to the u. h. f. position; the tuning voltage should be approx. 10 V.
This injection method requires approx . 14 dB less signal than the first method.
No permanent connection must be made to test point 3, otherwise the tuner may exceed
the oscillator radiation limits.
May 1976
C71lt . - - - - - - '
ELC2070
The i. f. output of the tuner should be terminated with the circuit given below.
The terminals 7, 9 and 11 should be not connected.
=i
la
(20 turns)
8,2pF
i.f. output
of tuner
18
kfi
detector probe
60pF
IZ=SOn or 75fi)
7Z73762
Fig.l5
Switch the tuner to the v. h. f. band; the tuning voltage should be 15 to 20 V.
Feed an i. f. sweep signal (500. to 1000 m V) to the i. f. injection point.
Adjust the trimmer (Fig. 15), tunable coil (La/Lb), i. f. output coil of the tuner L519
(Fig. 1) and the coupling between La and Lb to get the resonant curve as given below.
Fig.l6
Thendisplaythe r . f. + i. f. curve of the tuner at 190 MHz (picture carrier frequency) and
make small corrections in the alignment of the i. f. coils (La / Lb andL519), if necessary,
to get the markers 38,9 MHz and 32,9 MHz symmetricaliy on the slopes of the curve,
and the peaks at equal amplitude.
Because the output impedance of the dummy circuit is 50 to 75 Q, the power ga in can be
measured in the conventional manner by inserting tuner and dummy circuit between a
75 Q source and a 75 Q detector (or between a 50 Q source and matching pad 50/75 Q and
a 50 Q detector) .
ACCESSORIES
Aerial input transformer ELC 1094, v. h. f. , catalogue number: 2422 542 10941;
aerial input transformer ELC2092, u. h. f. , catalogue number: 2422 542 12921;
coaxial aerial input assembly, catalogue number 3122 127 10450.
CSO
May 1976
ELC3082
11
11
Systems
Channel s
A2 to A6 (low v . h. f. band)
A7 to A 1:3 (high v. h. f. band) .
Intermediate frequencies
picture
sound
45 , 75 MHz
41 ,25 MHz
APPLICATION
Designed to cover the v. h. f. channels of C. C. I. R. syste ms M and N (R. T. M. A .).
Thanks to its good signal- handling properties, the tuner is especially suited for strong
signa l areas.
_Ma-yl97-6
ELC3082
V. H. F. TELEVISION TUNER
DESCRIPTION
The ELC3082 is a v. h. f. tuner with elect r onic tuning and band switching, covering the
low v. h. f. band (frequency range 54 to 88 MHz) and the high v. h. f. band (frequency range
174 to 216 MHz).
Mechanically, the tuner i s built on a low-loss printed - wiring board, carryi ng all components, in a metal housing made of a rectangular frame and front and rear cover (see
F1g . 2). The aenal connectwn IS on one of the frame sides, all other connectiOns (supply
voltages, a. g. c. voltage, tuning and switching voltages) a re made via feed-through capacitors in the under side. The mounting method is shown in Figs. 3 and 4.
Electrically, the tuner consists of v. h. f. and i.f. parts. The aerial signal is fed to the
input filters, providing i. f. rejection and band selection. The filters are followed by a
P- l- N diode attenuator, equipped with two diodes BA379. The output of the attenuator is
connected to the emitter of the input transistor BF480, operating as r . f. amplifier in
grounded base configuration. The same transistor also delivers the current drive for the
P-I-N diode attenuator, controlled by an a.g. c. voltage fed to the transistor base. The
combination of the diode attenuator with this high current transistor (lE at normal gain
about 10 mA) has excellent signal-handling properties within the whole a. g. c. range.
The collector load of the input transistor is formed by a double tuned circuit,transferring
the signal to the emitter of the mixer transistor BF 324.
Good signal- handling properties of this stage are achieved by high osci llator injection.
The oscillator is equipped with a transistor BF324. In the low v. h. f. position, self-detection of the oscillator signal is used to back- bias the five switching diodes BA243/244 (or
BA182), required for band switching between low and high v . h.f. channels.
Three capacitance diodes BB106 provide tuning of the r. f. circuits.
The collector of the mixer transistor i s connected to a single tuned i. f. resonant c ircuit
(about 20 MHz bandwidth), the output of which is fed to the i. f. output stage, equipped
with another transistor BF324 in grounded base configuration .
This stage has al so been designed especially for good signal-handling properties. The
coll ector load of the i. f. output transistor is formed by a single tuned i. f. circuit, at the
low end of which the i. f. signal is capacitively coupled ou t of the tuner.
The tuner can be used in combination with a u.h.f. tuner. In this case the u.h . f. i.f.
signa l is fed to the emitter of the i . f. output transistor, which acts as i. f. amplifier for
u. h. f. as well as for v. h. f.
The u. h. f. i. f. input terminal can be used as an i. f. injection point for aligning the i. f.
output circuit together with the i. f. amplifier of the television receiver. For the same
purpo~e a separate i. f. injection point has been provided at the collector of the mixer.
The tuner requires transistor supply voltages of +12 V, a switching voltage of +12 V,
a. g. c . voltages , variable from +5 V (normal operating point) to about +2, 5 V (maximum
a. g. c.) and a tuning voltage , variable from +0, 5 V to +28 V.
The aerial input of the tuner is asymmetrical. For use in symmetrical aerial systems,
aerial transformers (baluns) are available (see ACCESSORY) . .
..
Cil2
11
_ _ II
May 1976
test po1nt
3
test pomt
2
Ill
<
......
....,
"'
a-
,--------
---------------T-------------------R310
I
I
~C218
I
I
I
L507
R305
210
322
R306
C219 I
R
323
'11
iQ"
r----------- -
__ j
I
I
I
I
_j
C228
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
06 10
233
I
I
"'II
I
I
I
I
C232
I
I
I
I
I
I
C230
----~----------~-
o,l----C236
C2lS
u.h.f.
1.f . .nput
I
I
I
I
327
J:;C229
R32B
R330
I
Ii
-@~ ~------Q;jj>---~--@~\>-- Ll __ ~I>------@+-----j >j,
C237
C238
C239
C2l.O
C241
C242
r-
0
a .g.c voltage
(-1-Sto +2.5VJ
low
band
hgh
band
switChing-voltage
1+12VJ
common supply
voltage
{+12VI
v.h.f. supply
voltage
(+12VJ
tunmg
voltage
1+0.5 to +28VJ
1.f. OU!put
CO
....,
ELC3082
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions in mm
...-- - ---98,6 - - - - - ,
1111-11-11-
I~
. . . . ' . . . ' . .i
=IJ$- -$- ~ <!l- 4>-~ $--i
~
ru~u-ru~
-u-u-u
~I
/
aerial
L.
Fig . 2
T e rminal 1 = u. h. f. i. f. input
2 = a. g . c. voltage, +5 to +2, 5 V
3 = switching voltage , +12 V
4 = common s upply voltage , +12 V
5 = v .h.f. supply voltage , +12 V
6 = tuning voltage, + 0 , 5 to +28 V
7 = i. f. output
E =earth
CH-+
97
ELC3082
Mounting
The tuner ma y be mounted by soldering it on to a printed-wiring board, using the piercing diagram shown iri F ig. 3. (The tuner may also be mounted by means of a bracket.
Information will be supplied upon request.)
The tun e r may be mounted anywhere in the receiver and there are no restrictions on
orientation.
+g,1 (4x)
91,44 (36e)
---------~
o'
(7x)
. .,,.._
1,
22,86
(9e)
f
- - -+' +
~ct=
.
' -+-
'
. 15,24 +'
7,62(3e) _j.._l- l . -1.
(3x)
(Se) ..
-~-.
'
.
+
W.._L7,62(3e)
7113791
(3x)
F ig. 3 . Pie r c ing diagra m viewed fro m s older s ide of board: e = 2, 54 mm {0 , 1 in).
screenrng folded
back over outer cover
make sure that screw
'"'"W'u~
...I I...
7Z60737.2
3,5max
Fig. 4. Recommende d fixing me thod of the aerial ca ble . Use a s elf-tapping screw.
Ma y 1976
:::::::
----
ELC3082
V. H. F. TELEVISION TUNER
ELECTRICAL DATA
Unless o therwi se spec ifie>d all electrical values apply at a n ambie nt temperature of
25 5 C and a suppl y voltage of 12 0 , 3 V.
Semiconductor s
P- I- N attenuato r
r. f. amplifier
mixer
osci ll ator
tuning diodes
swi tching diodes
i. f. a mplifie r
2 X BA379
BF480
BF324
BF324
3 x BB106
5 x BA243/244 (or BA182)
BF324
+ 5 to +55 C
-25 to +85 oc
Supply voltage
+ 12 V 10%
Current drawn from+ 12 V suppl y at nomirial gain
low band
46, 5 mA 10%
high band
63, 5 rnA, 10%
Notes - At 40 dB gain r eduction t he currents decrease about 5 mA.
- The supply voltage at ter minal 4 shou ld be car efully filtered to avoid hum
modulation in one of the P-1- N diodes when the attenuator is biase d to higher
attenuation ratios. Unde r mos t unfavourable conditions a ripple volta ge of
3 mV (p-p) may produce a disturban ce which is just vi s i ble.
A. G. C. vo ltage (F igs. 5 and 6)
low band, a t nominal gain
at 40 dB gain r e du ction
high band, at nomina l gain
at 40 dB gain reduction
1
+50,2V )
+ 3, 3 V (typical)
+5 0, 2 V 1)
+ 3, 3 V (typical)
max. 1 mA
max. 1 mA
ELC3082
7273789
7Z73790
a.g.c. characteristic
a.g.c. characteristic
high band
low band
iii
~
iii
~
:;;
u
"
"~
"0
c
0
:;;
"0
10
10
c;
c;
"'
"'
20
20
30
,,
40
40
50
50
60
60
--::::
6
a.g.c. voltage
Fig.S
Fig.6
7Z
7273788
low band
high band
'N
I
:::E
90
.E.
,.
1-- A6
-r- - '
...,.
....
80
11- A13
-I-I-
210
,.,u
...,.
.."
.E.
A12
.:: 200
'-
AS
"u
~
~
"~
(V I
A11
'-
:=!
A10
~ 190
70
A4
a.
1--1r-60 r--
A3
a.
A9
AB
180
t--
r1-
A2
A7
I
10
20
30
tu ning voltage (V I
Fig.7
10
20
30
tuning voltage (V )
Fig. 8
11
r<o -.
ELC3082
3i 22
V. H. F. TELEVISION TUNER
127 19681
Frequency ranges
low band
high band
Intermediate frequencies
picture
sound
45 , 75 MHz
41,25 MHz
Input impedance
asymmetrical
sy mmetrical
75Q
300Q (see. ACCESSORY).
v. s. w. r. at nom.
gain
max. v . s. w. r.
during gain
control
max. 3,5
max. 4
max. 3,5
max. 4
low band
high band
A.G.C. range
low band
high band
R. F. cu rve s
bandwidth , low band
high band
tilt , ' low band
high band
typ.
7 to 10 MHz
typ.
8 to 10 MHz
max. 3 dB
max. 3 dB
POWER GAll\)
24 dB
27 dB
29 dB
25 dB
28 dB
31 dB
Noise figure
low band
high band
I. F. rej!'!ction
low band, c hannel A2
channel A3
channels A4 to A6
high band
min .
min .
min.
min.
C88
54
57
60
60
dB
dB
dB
dB
May 1976
ELC3082
V. H. F. TELEVISION TUNER
Image rejection
low band
high band
min. 56 dB
min. 50 dB
Signal handling
Minimum input signal (e. m. f.) producing
cr oss -modulation (1 %)
in channel
wanted signal : picture caqier frequency,
interfering channel: sound carrier
frequency
in band
wanted signal : picture carrier frequency
of channel N,
interfering ::;ignal: picture carrier of
channel N 2
interfering signal : picture carrier of
channel ;:: N 3
max . gain
t yp .
20 mV
with a. g. c.
l)
typ. lOO mV
typ. 250 mV
50 mV
typ.
typ. > 500 m V
} 2)
typ.
typ.
50 mV
30 mV
} 3)
max.
150 kHz
::::::l
.....,
max. .300kHz
max. 300kHz
1% cross-modulation. means that 1% of the modul ation depth of the interfering signal is
transferred to the wanted signal.
2) Tl1is e. m ..f. (open voltage) is refe.rred to an impedance of 75Q.
Criterion of overloading: 30% compression of the synchronization pulses of a standard
television signal or a noticeable deterioration of the picture quality.
3) This e.m.f. (open voltage) is referred to an impedance of 75Q.
________._______.....,_~ll _________.
ELC3082
V. H. F. TELEVISION TUNER
max. 500kHz
max. 500kHz
Oscillator radiation
The tuner is in conformity with the radiation requirements of C.I.S.P.R. Recommendatien No. 24/2 and the corresponding F. C. C. rules, provided the tuner is installed in
a professional manner.
Micro phonics
If the tuner is installed in a professional manner, there will be "no microphonics.
--
11
_ _ _ 11
ELC3082
V. H. F. TELEVISION TUNER
with diode tuning
For i. f. injection the u. h. f. i. f. input (terminal 1) or the i. f. inj ection point at the collector of the mixer transistor (at the top of the tuner, Fig. 2) can be used.
The aligning can be done with any channel tuned. A probe as shown in Fig. 9 should be
used.
47Dn
ssn
7Z7l784
Fig.9
The signal attenuation between the i. f. generator and the i. f. output of the tuner is about
4 dB when injection is done via the injection point, and about 8, 5 dB in the case of injectionviatheu.h.f. i.f. input.
1)
l)
The i. f. output circuit is detuned about +300 kHz or -150 kHz when injection is done
via the injection point or via the u . h . f. i. f. input r espectivel y.
MEASURING METHOD OF POWER GAIN
The i.f. output of the tuner s hould be terminated with the RC-circuit given in Fig.lO.
I ,,,.. .
Fig. 10
Fig.ll
The RC-circuit roughly matches the i. f. output impedance to 75Q at the resonant frequency of the i. f. output circuit, which should be tuned to 43, 5 MHz. The bandwidth
should be approx . 4, 5 MHz.
Because the input and output impedances of the tuner are now 75Q, the power gain can be
measured in the conventional manner by inserting tuner and RC-circuit between a 75Q
source and a 75Q detector (or between a 50Q source and matching pad 50/75Q and a 50Q
detector).
ACCESSORY
Aerial input transformer ELC 1094, v. h. f. , catalogue number: 2422 542 10941.
May 1976
________.....-_____II~
C91
--
12ET5632
GENERAL
12ET5732
11
t!"\e
i.f.
aerial
28V
j_
..l.
..L
..l.
...L
push-button unit
~ril 1973
. ~
-=
12ET5632
12ET5732
GENERAL
69,5
socket
3112 200 20710
aerial
input
-, ,-
aerial cable
e=2,54
vx
728101.1.4.
30
3,2
t
24
-.
18
12
1,3
0
0
24
30
6
12
18
36
42
48
54
Fig. 3 Hole pattern of the printed-wiring board for the mounting socket
(viewed on solder side).
C9 4
60
7Z65815
April 1973
GENERAL
12ET5632
12ET5732
i.f.
Cr amplifier
u.h.f.
VP718 131 A
v.h.f
Fig. 4
April 1973
( ' Ut;
--
12ET5632
12ET5732
GENERAL
To adjust the i. f. bandpass curves, the tuners should be inserted into the mounting socket
and their i. f. outputs connected to the i. f. amplifier as shown in Fig. 4.
Adjustment is done a t supply voltage = 12 V,
a .g.c.voltage= 6V,
tuning voltage = 10 V.
The wobble generator signal (connected via 75 Q) is connected to the i. f. injection points
Sand E.
Switch to u.h.f. reception and adjust i.f. coil L 21 to obtain the desired bandpass curve;
switch to v. h. f. and similarly adjust i. f. coil Ls2 It is advisable to repeat these adjustments as a c hec k.
'
The foll owi ng dummy c ircuit (Fig: 4) can be used to check the tuner without an i. f. amplifier , a nd to pre -ad just the i. f. circuit.
Fig. 5
With S1 open and Rs = 0 Q , the i. f . c ircuit of the tuner , and the dummy circuit Lo, can
be adjusted to a ba ndp ass filter having the curve show n in Fig. 6. Switch s 1 has to be
closed to di spl ay the bandpass curve of th e tuner i. f. circuit (without dummy circuit Lo).
v.h.f
u.h.f.
f=41 MHz
~ ig.6 a
C96
f=41 MHz
VE 738 02JA
Fig.6b
Anril
1.97 .~
12ET5632/03
1
U.H.F. TELEVISION TUNER
with diode tuning
QUICK REFERENCE DATA
System
C . C.I.R., systemG
Channels
38,9 MHz
33,4 MHz
APPLICATION
This all- eleqr onic television tuner has been developed for reception of television signal s
in the bands IV and V (C . C . I. R. system G).
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions in mm
---1
Terminal A = aerial u. h. f.
B = r. f. supply voltage
C = a. g, c. voltage
D =mixer/oscillator
supply voltage
E = i. f. injection point
F = i. f. output
G = tuning voltage
H = tuning voltage
L."6
L7
0
5
~
earth
August 1974
earth
VX 72&096 .1.6.
Fig. l
C97
~,-,-.,-~-,, -
12ET5632/03
U.H.F .TELEVISIONTUNER
901274563203
Mounting
e =2 ,54
10
20
30
40
"60
50
63
7Z65816
Fig. 2 Hole pattern of the printed- wiring board (viewed on solder side).
C9H
11
11
August 1974
U. H. F . TELEVISION TUNER
12ET5632/03
ELECTRICAL DATA
Semiconductors.
r. f . a mplifi e r
mixer /osc illator
tuning diodes
AF367
AF367
3 x BBlOSB
+ 10 to +50 C
-25 to +60 C
Suppl y voltage
+ 12 V, 10 %
6, 5 to 12 mA (depending on a . g. c .
vol tage)
9, 8 to 2 V
For the adju st ment of the a . g. c.
voltage, the circuit shown below
can be used
12V
2,2
--
kO
:::: 9,4V
6,~[
kO
Fig. 3
~"
7Z69Z78
0, 5 to 28 V
471,25 to 847 , 25
Margin a t the ex treme channels
2: 1 MHz (typical value : 2 MHz)
Intermediate frequencies
picture sound
38,9 MHz
33,4 MHz
The oscillator frequency is highe r
than the s igna l frequency
Input impedanc e
75 Q
Power gain
2:
Noise figure
Ga in reduction
2:
Reflections
:s SO %
I. F. rejection
2:
2:
August 1974
C99
12ET5632/03
U. H. F. TELEVISION TUNER
Cross modulation
an interfering signal of 15 mV
(channel X 2) at the 75 Q aerial
input produces no visible cross
m odulati on on the wan ted signal
(channel X), independent of the adjustment of the r. f. transistor
---
::; 500kHz .
:> 50kHz
::; 400kHz
:5600kHz
32 to 40 MHz
Lightning protection
Fig.4.
CJOO
11
_ _ _ II
August 1974
----1
12ET5632/0
a g c voltage (V}
a g c voltage IV}
12
o.-~_,_,_,~~-.
12
0.-,-,-,-,-.-.-
CD
~
30 1--t--l--l--l-
::>
"0
c:
01
40 1--1--1--l-J
1Z69lll1
Fig. 5.
Fig. 6.
Or-~~~~~~~
12
20
c:
30
; ;
30
u
::>
::>
"0
"0
c:
c:
:c;
01
12
iD
~
0
20
iD
c:
Or-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-
01
40
Fig. 7.
August 1974
40
Fig . 8.
CIOl
......,
m
-t
U'l
0
0
0.
"'
CN
......,
E1C4
.........
0
CN
CS
rr'I
RI
::r::
~ ~
rt .
R2
:r .....:.!
9:
r9
0
0.
(1)
()q
t-'
t:Il
<
-~
z
.....:.!
Jl
u.h.f.
t:Il
5' 0
"'I
ll,.
~M1
earth
c'I
+12V
o.g.c.
voltage
G
tuning
voltage
M2
+12 V
tuning
voltage
ou~-~ut
11
?::'
earth
Fig .9.
:>
(Jl
rt
......
'D
""""
.....
N
..,..
-.J
CJl
0'-
12ET5732/03
System
C. C . I. R., system B
Channels
E2 to E4 (band I)
E 5 to E 12 (band Ill)
Intermediate fr equencies
picture
sound
38,9 MHz .
33,4 MHz
APPLICATION
This all - electronic television tuner has been devel oped for reception of television signals
in the bands I and III (C.C.I.R. system B).
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions in mm
~----------- 82 ------------~1
---.'
4,15
Termina l K = aerial v. h. f.
L = r. f. supply voltage
N =a. g. c. voltage
P = mixer/oscillator
supply voltage
16
S = i. f. injection point
!
T = i. f. output
V = tuning voltage
X = tuning voltage
L61
ciJ
1,32
LS2
LSO
50
Fig. 1.
12ET57J2jQJ
V. H. F. TELEVISION TUNE R
Mounting
e=2,54
~Iil i
0
t t i t t
ffi
I:";'., .
M~
7Z65814
C104
--
----T~--~~------n~----~
V. H. F . TELEVISION TUNER
9012 745 73203
12ET5732/03
2 X AF367
AF367
6 X BB105G
+10 to +50 C
- 25 to +60 C
Supply voltage
+12 V
11,5 to 23 , 5 mA (depending on
a. g . c. voltage)
9, 8 to 2 V
For the adjustment of the a . g. c.
voltage, the circuit shown below
c a n be used
12V
2,2
kO
....._::::9 ,4V
6,8
kO
Fig. 3
]
'/
-'
7Z69278
0, 5 to 28 V
Frequency ra nge
band I
48,25 to 62,25 MHz
band m 175 , 25 to 224,25 MHz
Margin at the extreme channels
;>: 1 MHz (typical value: 1, 5 MHz)
38,9 MHz
33,4 MHz
The oscillator frequency is higher
than the signal frequency
Input Impedance
75 Q
Power gain
No ise figure
'""'
8, 5 dB (typicar'value: 6 dB)
Gain reduction
;>:
Reflec~ i ons
50 %
I. F rejection
_August1974___li LI~~--~~~'
CJOS
12ET5732/03
V. H. F. TELEVISION TUNER
with diode tunipg
:s 250kHz
:s 50 kHz
:s 400kHz
32 to 40 MHz
Oscillator r a diation
Lightning protection
30
tuning voltaf!e (VI
Fig. 4
Cl06 .
August 1974
12ET5732/03
V.H.F. TELEVISIONTUNER
with diode tuning
4.
12
0.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-
4.
0.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-~
~ 30 1-+-+-l--
:J
1!
c:
c;
~40 1-+-+-+-+-+-+-1-1-1-~-r~
-Fig.6.
Fig. 5 .
0
0
channel 5
10 H
4.
r- r-
channel_12
H-1-f-t---,
12
10
20 r-t--t-t-+-
20
CO
CO
~ 30
~ 30 1-f-lf-1""'
,:e"
1!
-~
,"
1!
c:
c;
m4o r-r-t-+-+-+-+-1--r-r-r-r~
c:
0
m
40
7Z69286
Fig. 7.
72692 82
Fig. 8.
_Augu_st_
l974~~~~~~~~~~ .~
-....
to.)
U'l
I BAND I I
"
w
to.)
........
0
w
C55
I
CS3:Jj_
j_CS
1
4
L44
C52
less_
_C51
R52
L41
L42
<
~
n
r
.. 7)
s. ~
....
:::r >-1
0. 1:':1
[ ~
<
~ 0
0
Jg z
Lc6:s
(!)
62
C67
'
1 BAND
mI
>-1
69
earth
:>
:::0
C74I
f"
-'- C76
,I
+12V
N
a.g.e.
voltage
C93I
tuning
voltage
"'
....
....
p
+12V
tuning
voltage
T
i.f.
output
earth
'D
0
,_.
N
---1
Ul
......
z
1:':1
R61
....
c::
ILBS
Fig. 9.
""'
(J1
---1
'
102~1
SUPERSEDES DATA IN
3122 127
3122 127
1045~
APPLICATION
These coaxial aerial input assemblies have been developed for application in television
sets with 75 ohm input impedance, for use in v. h. f. as well as in u. h. f. ( 40-890 MHz).
The connectors meet the demands of both the IEC standards (diameter 9, 5 mm) and the
French standards (diameter 9 , 0 mm). They have to be used with plugs complying with the
properties mentioned in DIN 45325, IEC 169-2 (diameter 9 , 5 mm) and SNIR (diameter
9, 0 mm). The units meet the safety requirements of IEC 65 .
AVAILABLE TYPES
: :> 1 dB
Reflection , v. h. f.
: :> IS%
==
==
=
u. h. f. . : :> 25%
Catalogue number
PHipPs
250 V"'
1-
1-
_Au_gu_st_I_97_4
390pF 3x
-pin 2.36
- - - 490.1 - - --
- - - - 55.2max- - - -- l
Dimensions in mm
_.J
soldered with-i'lux
cable
----
~8
:0.2
Cable diameter
(' I In
11
?:
5 mm
11
August 1974
s 25%
Reflection , v . h. f.
u.h.f.
$30%
Frequency characteristic
v. h.f., 50 to 230 MHz
4ZO MHZ
700 MHz
u. h . f. , 470 to 850 MHz
230 MHz
100 MHz
S1 dB
<: 13 dB
23 dB
{typical va lue)
s 1 dB
<: 15 dB
40 dB (typical value)
Catalogue number
3122 12 7 10450
--=
~filnput
----.r--------_a. ____
fi _ P=J=t
.r- --~~~ning
-r
30.2max
l
Dimensions in mm
November 1974
11 ______
~_11 ~
C tli
with fluxl2x)
.---
--
-~ ~ 6 . S:t0.2 -
2%05
:r
08
,~
07.1
-20.5
-~
-7'-1
Or ~--~--li;i.:i.~'--1-;;-r,.-,.-,-,..
---~~ _
04+g 2 - ~ 1-
611
_!
1u on'
C:1J2~ll _~__ ll
August 197 4
60 dB (typical value)
40 dB (typical value)
25 dB
1 dB
1 dB
1 dB
1,5 dB
r-I-9----___T_,
q _____ j"'""
I
l___
v. h . f. I : :o 35%
v.h.f. Ill: :o 15%
u.h.f.
: :o 35%
Catalogue number
-r ------p -r-~1~::"'"9
7Sfi inpu t
75fi output
Dimens i ons in mm
~~J41---~"---~-l_:~r
70.2
27.2max
DLJIT
~
~ ~~
~ =~fm'-g,
-
18.20.3 -
- pln2.36
,_
_ _ _ 490.1 - - --
1- - - - - 55.2ma- - - -- 1
August 1974
1 ~_(": 11 :<
""'31' ...22
... 1,~2:&:7, 11 QO~ z4~05u0,-.-..--..,-~-------~ ~
COAXIAL AERIAL INPUT ASSEMBLIES
~ --
08
~0.2
~~~
' - - - -II-t
C
August 1974
Components for
black and white television
---
1111111
PR EFERRED TYPES
tJ
SURVEY
basic deflection package
-1
()
~ 0
m ..,
>
0- ()
z
m
z
as sociated components
designed with
Consumer applications
;::o;:
>
-1
ZV>
0
deflection unit
AT1040/ 15
line output transformer
. AT2048/12
deflection unit
AT 1074
line output transformer
AT2140
:I:
=i
'
>
deflection unit
AT107 1/01
lin e output transformer
AT2102/0 1
deflection unit
I ad 1ustable linear ity control
unit AT4042 / 14
AT1040/15
line output tra nsfor mer I !ine driver transformer
AT4043/87
AT2048/ 12
The data sheets of the pr e ferred types are arranged a ccording to their t ype numbers on the following pages.
0
9
~
.0
"'"
3:
tr:l
tr:l
::0
>
t-'
'
. - - --
>
c:
Abr idged data of the following types are given in the tables whic h can be found after the data shee ts of the preferred types.
zti:I
Deflection units
>
r:-
ti:I
......
"'a-..._,
:::0
AT 1020/ 0 1
AT 1038 / 00
AT 1040
AT1040 / 00
AT 1040 / 03
AT 1040 / 05
AT1072
AT4034 / 0lAT4042 / 02
AT4072
E . H . T . sockets
AT7 130
AT71 30/ 01
en
c
:::0
<
ti:I
-<
-4
"TI
(")
<
g::o
...,
~ 0
m :oo
J
~
ll 0z
11
>0
n
z
,.. m
>
~
z Cll
:I:
11111JI
11
0
3:
=4
AT1040/15
11
DEFLECTION UNIT
neck diameter
43
51
61
28
Deflection angle
llOO
2,3A(p-p}
3,32 mH
1, 1 A (p-p)
7, 5 Q
APPLICATION
This deflection unit has been designed for use with a 110 black and white picture tube in
conjunction with :
~line output transformer AT2048/ 12 or AT2130;
- linearity control unit AT4042/02 or AT4042/14;
- line output transistor BU205.
--
DESCRIPTION
The saddle-shaped line deflection coils are moulded so that the deflection centre is well
within the conical part of the picture tube.
The field deflection coUs are wound on a Ferroxcube yoke ring which is flared so that the
frame and line deflection centres coincide.
The unit meets the self- extinguishing and non-dripping requirements of IEC 65..
For centring and pin-cushion distortion see under "Correction facilities".
I"
July 1976
os
--
AT1040/15
DEFLECTION UNIT
11
MECHANICAL DATA
centring magnets
~-+.1:- - .fl
_,r ~r
4
L.....,...,:>,.../;._L:,.-+,.,-l---tl:fr-i _
plastic bonded
Fxd magnet strip
7Z65830.1
29,68
min
~------~~ ------~
--
Fig. 1.
The unit is provided with soldering pins for connection. The pin numbering in the figure
corresponds to that in the connection diagrams (Figs. 2 and 3).
300 g approximately
MOUNTING
The unit should be mounted as far forward as possible on the neck of the picture tube, so
that it touches the cone.
To orient the raster. correctly , the unit may be rotated by hand on the neck of the picture
tube , with which it makes a slip fit. A screw-tightened clamping ring permits it to be
locked , both axially and radially, in the desired position.
D6
11
October 1974
AT1040/15
DEFLECTION UNIT
11
ELECTRICAL DATA
The electrical values apply at an ambient temperature of 25 oc.
'.... ~
3 , 32 mH 5%
6 , 1 Q 10%
17 mH 10%
7 , 5 Q8 ,.S%
2500 V
105 oc
7Z65805
7Z65826
2, 3 Ap-p7%
1, 1 Ap-p+3,5%
October 1974
11
_j
AT1040/15
DEFLECTIO N UNIT
11
Geometric distortion (measured without correction magnets)
Barrel distortion in the corners
max. 1 mm
Trapezium distortion
- - - 440 - - --
440
340
-s
340
1:-
+
7
7Z6 S1881
+
5
7Z69254
Fig.4
Fig. 5
CORRECTION FACILITIES
For centring
After adjustment of the linearity of the depection current , the eccentricity of the picture
tube and the deflection unit can be corrected by means of two independenqy movable centring magnets of plas tic-bonded ferroxdure. These magnets are magnetised diametrically.
By turning the magnets with respect to each other the resulting field strength is varied.
The direction of the resulting magnetic field is adjusted by turning the magnets simultaneously.
These centring magnets can not be used for compensating the effects of non-linearity or
of phase differences between the synchronisation and time base , as otherwise the correction needed becomes excessive. Even if the correction is within the range of the magnets ,
curved lines may appear in the centre of the raster.
minimum resultant
magnetic field
area of
adjustment
maximum resultant
magnetic field
~>40
F ig.6
-------.
7Z65828.1
AT1040/15
--
1) Magnet strips are a ls o available separately under catal ogue number 3 122 137 10160.
October 197.4
09
AT 1071/01
31 22 137 12560
I
DEFLECTION UNIT
for black and white monitors
24 cm (9 in)
28 mm
Deflection angle
90
8, 6 A (p-p)
93 ).lH
0, 425 A (p-p)
27 Q
APPLI CATION
This deflection unit has been designed for use with a 90 black and white monitor tube
type M24-100 W in conjunction with:
line output transformer AT2102/0l;
linearity control unit
AT4036 and ;
line output transistor
80160.
DESCRIPTION
The saddle-shaped line deflection coil s are moulded so that the deflection centre is well
within the conical part of the picture tube.
The field deflection coils are wound on a Ferroxcube yoke ring which is flared so that the
frame and line deflection centres coincide.
For centring and pin - cushion distortion see under "Correction facilities" .
July 1976
II___ _
11
Dll
AT 1071/01
DEFLECTION UNIT
11
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions in mm
meant tor plastic
bonded FXD magnets
95,4
55,2
max
max
--
--
50, 5 -
max
7Z69165
i:
Fig, 1
The unit is provided with solde ring pins for connection . The pin numbering in Fig.!
corresponds to that in the connection diagram (Figs . 3 and 4).
MOUNTING
The unit should be mounted as far forward as possible on the neck of the picture tube ,
so that it touches the cone. For optimum raster shape, the coil should be mounted as
shown in Fig. 2.
To orientate the raster correctly, the unit may be rotated on the neck of the picture
tube. A clamping ring locks the unit both axially and radially.
9 3 . 9.s (I)
7Z69169
Dl2
July 1976
AT 1071/01
DEFLECTION UNIT
11
ELECTRICAL DATA
Line deflection coils, parallel connewid (Fig. 3)
terminais 3 and 4
Inductance
Resistance
typ. 93 flH
typ. 0, 15 Q
typ. 56 mH
typ. 27 Q
2000 V
95
c
1
),
I
7Z65805
r
5
7Z69167
8, 6 A (p-p)
0 , 425 A (p-p)
July .1976
=
=
=
AT 1071/01
DEFLECTION UNIT
11
1min
-.r
l4xT
I--
..!
1/
+1min
(4x )
12s
L18
1-
-~
163
Fig.S
- - - - --
170 - -- - - --
For c;entring
Aftet adjustment of the linearity of the deflection current, the eccentricity of the picture
tube and the deflection unit can be corrected by means of two independentl y movable cen tring magnets of pl astic-bondedFerroxdure. These magnets are magnetize d diametrically.
By turning the magnets with respect to each other the resulting field strength is varied.
The direction of the resulting magnetic field is adjusted by turning the magnets simulta neously .
These centring magnets can not be used for compensating the effect s of non -linearity or
of phase differences between the synchron ization and time base, 'as otherwise the correction needed becomes excessive. Even if the correction i s within the range of t he magnets ,
curved lines may appear in the centre of the raster.
minimum resultant
magnetic field
maximum resultant
magnetic field
Fig.6
For pin- cushion clistortion
This can be corrected by moving magnet s of pl astic-bonde d Ferroxdure (catal ogue number
3122 104 95000) which may be mounted in the r i m at the front of the deflection unit.
01 4
11
July 1976
AT1074
11
11
DEFLECTION UNIT
Deflection angle
ll0
5, 1 A (p~p) 1)
2'55 j.JI-1
1, 1 A (p-p)
2, 7Q
APPLICATION
This deflection unit has been designed for use with a 31 cm (12 in) or 34 cm (14 in) ll0
black and white picture tube in conjunction with :
- line output transformer AT2140;
- line output transistor BU407.
DESCRIPTION
The saddle shaped line deflection coils are moulded so that the deflection centre is well
within the conical part of the picture tube.
The field deflection coils are wound on a Ferroxcube yoke ring which is flared so that the
frame and line deflection centres coincide.
The unit meets the self-extinguishing and non-dripping requirements -of IEC 65.
For centring and pin -cushion distortion see under "Correction facilities".
September 1976
--
AT1074
DEFLECTIO N UNIT
11
Dimensions in mm
MECHANICAL DATA
90 max
-~-
89
max
40
60,9 max
- - --1
1)
,_26, 6 _
max
1- - - - 66,2 ma x - - - -1
7Z73953
Fig. L
The unit is provided with soldering pins for connection. The pin numbering in Fig. 1
corresponds to that in the connection diagrams (Fig. 2).
MOUNTING
The unit should be mounted as far forward as possible on the neck of the picture tube, so
that it touches the cone.
To orient the raster correctly, the unit may be rotated by hand on the neck of the picture
tube , with which it makes a slip fit. A screw-tightened clamping ring permits it t'o be
locked, both axially and radially, in the desired position.
A 1107 4
DEFLECTION UNIT
11
ELECTRICAL DATA
The electrical values apply at an ambient temperature of 25 oc.
Line deflection coils, parallel connected (Fig. 2a)
terminals 3 and 4
Inductance
Resistance
L/R
Field deflection coils, parallel connected (Fig. 2b)
terminals 1 and 6
Inducta nce
Resistance
L/R
255 fJl-1 5%
0, 56 Q
455 J..IH/Q 8%
7,9mH8%
2, 7 Q
2, 87 mH/Q 10%
500 V
95 C
:::::::::
7Z73950
7Z73951
4, 6 A(p-p)
5, 1 A(~-p)
1, 0 A(p - p)
1, 1 A(p-p)
September 1976
D17
AT1074
11
Geometric distortion (measured without correction magnets)
+
+Y
p--- -
edge of
phosphor
screen --..
--)
175
-4
Fx: 0 +2
Fy: 0 +4
-2
Gy: 0 +4
-2
-4
Jy : 0 +2
-4
Hy: 0 +2
Gx: 0 +4
-2
-4
Hx : 0 +2
0 +4
Jx :
-2
.J
I' H
1....- - - 230 - --
7Z75045
F ig . J
CORRECTION FACILITIES
For centring
After adjustment of the l inearity of the deflection current, the eccentricity of the picture
tube and the deflection unit can be corrected by means of two independentl y movable centring magnets of plastic-bonded Ferroxdure. These magnets are magnetized diametrically.
By turning the magnets with respect to each other the resulting field strength is varied.
T he direction of t he resulting magnet ic fie ld is adjusted by turning t he magnets simulta neously.
T hese centring magnets can not be used for compensating the effects of non - linearity or
of phase differences between the synchronization and time base, as otherwise the correc ti on needec\ becomes excessive. Even if the correction is within the range of the magnets ,
curved lines may appear in the centre of the raster.
minimum resultant
magnetic f ield
area of
adjustment
maximum resultant
magnetic f ield
7Z75034
Fig. 4
Dl 8
_ II
11
September 1976
AT1074
DEFLECTION UNIT
11
--
September 1976
l __
019
AT2048/12
11
35
435
E.H.T.
17,7
16,2
188
212
2,20
I p-p deflection
Auxiliary voltages
kV
MQ
4,0 '
Ri(eht)
J-lA
186
250
2' 15
rnA
APPLICATION
This transformer has been designed to provide the required scanning amplitude for
43 cm (17 in) to 61 cm (24 in) 110 black a nd white picture tubes with a neck diameter of
28 mm in transistor equipped television receivers presenting 625 lines at 50 frames per
second (CCIR) or 525 lines at 60 frames per second (USA).
It
-
DESCRIPTION
The magnetic circuit of the transformer comprises two Ferroxcube U- cores, clamped
together with a bracket. The primary wiridings , the auxiliary windings and the E. H. T.
windings are situated on one leg of the core. The E. H. T. windings are encapsulated in
flame retardant polyester .' The whole transformer meets the self-extinguishing and
non-dripping properties of the American Underwriters' Laboratories rating mentioned
in UL94SE-1.
The transformer is provided with four mounting pins. External circuit connection is
m ade to connecting_pins, positioned as indicated in Fig. 1 enabling the unit to be soldered
directly into a printed-wiring board.
/
March 1973
D21
AT2048/12
MECHANICAL OAT A .
-,11,6
max ,--
78,6
max
-'-
7,5
max
6,1
l ,? .....__printed -wiring
board
7Z65835
Fig.1
!....______.___
022 \
~-11
March 1973
AT2048/12
MOUNTING
The transformer may be mounted on a printed-wiring board. The fit of the connecting pins
in a printed-wiring grid with a pitch of 2 , 54 mm (0 , 1 in) is illustrated in Fig. 2. The core
of the transformer must be earthed.
on a printed-wiring board
(solder side)
Grid ho les 1, 3 0 , 1 mm
7 Z65834
Temperature
The operating temperature of the core and the coils sh<w1d not exceed 105 C , under
worst conditions, i.e. taking into account:
- overvoltage on the windings
- low a tmospheric pressure (at high altitudes) impl ying bad cooling by convection
- h igh room temperature (up to 45 C).
To satisfy this requirement it may be desired to provide ample cool a ir circulation
a round the transformer.
Distances
The following minimum distances between the transformer and neighbouring conductive
fl a t s urfaces (in proportion to their sharpness protruding parts must have a greater
distance) must be maintained:
a . From the e. h. t. winding, radiall y 25 mm
axiall y 15 mm
b. From the e. h. t. lead
25 mm
The transformer , and the leads and components carrying high voltage pulses should be
kept free from meta l particles, solder drops etc .
March 1973
11
023
---
AT2048/12
ELECTRICAL DATA
E.H . T. supply
Power supply
1eht
E.H.T.
pA
35
435
kV
17,7
16 , 2
Ri(eht)
MQ
4,0
VB
2(10
188
186
mA
212
250
VcEM
108(1
1100
IcM
1,4
1,4::;
I p-p
2, 20
2, 15
VB'
Iav
Deflection
1)
Flyback
ratio
(average)
Overscan
variation
--
pin 5
pin 7
pin 9
pins 10, 11
18
%
%
Vp
Vp
Vp
Vr.m. s .
- 300
+60
-60
7,7
10.
1
) Meas ured at pin 1
0 24
September 1974
AT2048/12
e.h.t . ~AT2048/12
12
'
focus
4 ,7kn
)I
150 nF
--=
40V
3300
;'~
~F
-6:J
10
heater~
picture tu~
7Z65U6
Fig.3
March 1973
0 25
AT2102/01
11
l
LINE OUTPUT TRANSFORMER
for black and white monitors
0 , 03
0,23
mA
E.H.T.
14,5
13,2
kV
MQ
Ri(eht)
l p- p deflection
12
830
12
1100
V
mA
APPLICATION
This transformer has been designed to provide the required scanning amplitude fo r 24 cm
( 9 inch) 90 monitor tubes with a neck diameter of 28 mm in transistor equi ppe d monitor s
presenting 625 lines at 50 frames per second (CCIR) .or 525 lines at 60 frames per second
(USA).
It is intended for use in conjunction with :
- deflection unit AT 1071 /0 1;
- linearity control unit AT4036;
- line output transistor BD160;
- booster (efficiency) diode BYX55, BYX 71;
- e. h . t. rectifier devic e TV 18KT .
See also circuit diagram of Fig. 3.
DESCRIPTION
The magnetic circuit of the transformer comprises Ferroxcube U and l - cores clamped
together with brackets.
The primary windings and the auxiliary windings are s ituat ed on one l eg of the cor e, the
e. h. t. winding and the coupling winding are situated on the other leg. The e . h . t. winding
is encapsulated in flame retardent polyester . The whole transformer meet s the selfextinguishing requirements of IEC publication 65, para. 14.4 and UL492 , para . 280-SE 1.
The tr:an sformer is provided with four mounting pins .
External c1rcuit connection is made to connecting pins, positioned as indicated in F ig. 1
enabling the unit to be soldered directly into a printed- wiring board.
July 1976
11
D?7
---
AT2102/0l
MECHANICAL DATA
4,3
._ 3,11.-.----~;x
Di mensions in mm
------<~1
65,5
max
6,94
'- 4~,6-'
max
7Z69111
Fig.!
MOUNTING
For mounting on a printed-wiring board the fit of the connecting and mounting
pins in a printed-wiring grid with a pitch of 2, 54 mm (0, 1 in) is illu strated in Fig. 2.
The transformer core m.u st be earthed.
D28
11
Tn lv 197n
AT2102/01
Temperature
The operating temperature of the core and the coils should not exceeded 95 C under
worst conditions , i.e. taking into account:
- over-voltage on the windings;
- low atmospheric pressure (at high altitudes) implying bad cooling by convection;
- high room temperature (up to 45 C) .
To satisfy these requirements it may be desirable to provide ample cool air circulation
around the "transformer.
Distances
The following minimum distances between the transformer and neighbouring conductive
flat surfaces must be maintained (it should be noticed that edges of conductive parts must
have a greater distance):
-from the e.h.t . winding, radially 20 mm,
axially 12 mm;
- from the e. h . t. cap and lead 20 mm;
- from the primary coil 10 mm;
- between the upper edge of the rectifier sot;ket and the primary coil 10 mm.
The transformer , and the le ads and components carrying high voltage pulses should be
kept free from metal particles , solder drops , etc.
July 1976
029
:::::=
AT2102/01
ELECfRICAL DATA
E . H. T . supply
Power supply
Output transistor
Deflection
--
Ieht
mA
0,03
0,23
e . h. t.
kV
14,5
13,2
Ri(eht)
MQ
Vs
12
12
V'
24
23,7
Iaverage
mA
830
llOO
VcEM
180
I p-p
Over scan
variation
D30
Vp
vP
3
+820
-102
July 1976
AT2102/01
Application circuit
AT2102/01
6
+820V,~
-102Vp~
5
3
r
2,7
47
nF
Fig.3
July 1976
D31
AT2140
11
25
f.1A
10,2 kV
Ri(eht)
:::5,5 MQ
10 ,4 V
0, 86 A
4,9 A
Auxiliary voltages 11 , 2 V (a. c.), +350 V(d . c . ), + 100 V(d . c.), + 13 V(d. c.), +25 V(d. c.)
APPLICATION
This transformer has been designed to provide the required scanning amplitude for
31 cm (12 in) and 34 cm (14 in) 1100 black and white picture tubes w ith a neck diamet er
of 20 mm in transistor equipped television receivers presenting 625 lines at 50 frames
per second (CCIR) or 525 lines at 60 frames per second (USA).
It is intended for use in conjunction with:
- deflection unit AT 1074;
- line output transistor BU 407.
DESCRIPTION
The magnetic circuit of the transfor mer comprises two Ferroxcube U -cores, clamped
together with a bracket. The primary winding, the auxiliary windings and the e. h. t.
winding are s ituated on one leg of the core. An e. h. t. rectifier diode is incorporated in
the transformer. The e.h.t. winding is encapsulated in flame retardent polyester .
The whole transformer meets the self- extinguis hing and non-dripping properties of t he
American Underwriters' Laborator ies rating mentioned in UL 94SE -1.
The transformer is proviaed with four mounting pins. External circuit connection is
made to connecting pins, positioned as indicated in Fig. 1 enabling the unit to be soldered
directly into a printed -wiring board .
September 1976
~-11
__j
AT2140
Dimensions in mm
MECHANICAL DATA
- -- - - - - - - 66 - - - - - - - --+
74 9,36
96
..-o,s
--4,2
'
pr intedwiring board
7Z75 032
Fig. 1
AT2140
I
MOUNTING
The transformer maybe mounted on a printed-wiring board. The fit of the connecting pins
in a printed-wiring grid with a pitch of 2, 54 mm (0, 1 in) is illustrated in Fig . 2 . The core
of the transformer must be earthed.
Temperature
The operating temperature of the core and the coils should not exceed 90 oc, under worst
conditions, i.e. taking into account :
- over-voltage on. the windings;
- low atmospheric pressure (at high altitudes) implying bad cooling by convection;
- high room temperature (up to 45 OC) .
15 mm
The transformer, and the leads and components carrying high -voltage pulses should be
kept free from metal particles, solder drops etc.
--
AT2140
E.H.T. supply
Power supply
Output transistor
Deflection
250
fJA
25
E.H . T.
kV
10,2
Ri(eht)
MQ
55,5
VB
10,4
lB
mA
860
VcEM
V (p - p)
160
le M
A (p - p)
3,4
l(p~p)
Ieht
4,9
. Flyback
ratio
(average)
19
Over scan
variation
9,0
10
'
Auxiliary windings, connecting pin 5
o~=<ing
connecting
connecting
connecting
pin
pin
pin
pin
9 )
10 1)
11
12
V
V
V
V
V
(d. c.)
(d.c.)
(d . c . )
(d.c.)
1) After rectification.
11
10 ...,
AT2140
Circuit diagram
~
7
H150JJF
"
_
1 k.n
picturetube
22n~
12
6811F
--
::::::1
11
10.4 V
7Z76022
Fig . 3
September 1976
D37
1'
AT 3513
MAINTENANCE TYPE
FRAME-OUTPUT TRANSFORMER
RZ 24284-11
This frame -output transformer is intended for use with 19 a nd 23 inch 110 (114)
picture tubes, in conjunction with the deflection unit AT1040.
---
CONSTRUCTION
The magnetic circuit of the transformer comprises two C -cores. The transformer
has three separate windings; the tertiary winding can be used fo r voltage feedback.
The transformer has been provided with four holes for mounting on either a printedwir ing board or a metal chassis.
External circ uit connection is made to connecting pins, positioned as indicated in
Fig.1.
October 1971
' nnn- - - - - -
.l
AT 3513
Dimens ions in mm
5e
.--c-----'-
3e
. _ _.,_r~ -.-.
1 4
.:t - ~
----
-~2e+~+-_6_e-.j
13e
.I
24
=
~
I
I
I
~
(0
I!)
<0
M
1&3.5 (4x)
1-
o! o 11
"----"-
11
11 . , . ,
_!}ju~ ! u u
on
0~
42max
I!)
7Z91194.L"
_ II
MAINTENANCE TYPE
11
October 1 7
---------------nr---------------------------n---------~-
FRAME-OUTPUT TRANSFORMER
AT 3513
ELECTRICAL DATA
Fig.2
Primary winding
Connecting terminals
Inducta nce
at a primary d . c . current of 55 m A
at a primary d . c . current of 70 m A
Resistance
7 . 5 H 10%
6 H 10%
230 Sl 12%
3 and 4
9.7S112%
Tertiary winding
Connecting termina ls
Resistance
5 and 6
165 Sl 12%
N .
1 and 2
5.6
Nprim
Ntert
3.9
October 1971
II_
--
75mA
1500 V
70 oc
MAINTENANCE TYPE
0 41
- -
I I I I 11 I
220nF
....
l> -
tl
...,
"""
Ul
AT1040
---- - 1
.,...---,
I
-t I
I
I
I
I
I
I
_ _ _ _ _ _ _j
~----~.; ------~
-t
Fi.g.3
Pe ntode data:
Supply voltage
Anode peak vol tage 1)
Anode voltage at end of scan 1)
Anode peak current
Anode d . c ~ current
Anode standing current
Anode d issipation
Screen -grid dissipation
......
'Il
:::<'
3::
til
:::<'
.l.2W
......
...,
0
-...]
1-j
-...!
V
V
V
mA
mA
mA
;..
Cll
......
go
'{)
230
840
85
160
57
12
7.2
..-J
..-J
:::<'
......
8
..-J
z
>
z
()
m
3::
til
>
~
"V
'Il
:::<'
;..
......
-...]
n
....
0
""""
0
ti
-...)
g-
....
....
\0
160~Fw+
2.5V
-...)
400~Fcl,+
16V~
l l ~~~+
II
110.0.1
~
0
oa
+12V ,
12i>-\.~
I
I
11
'I]
::>o
>
z.....
I
I
I
I~F
z
>
z
n
.,m
~
BA148
~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
trl
6c::
>-l
"0
c::
~ flyback _____ j
;>
$;
T''
1
I
---
5
I
1
6
>-l
>-l
suppression
;IJ
;>
{/)
'I]
::>o
$;
15k.O.
Y lvPrt-fron Y
~~-~;:;;1-,N.a
240.0.
'--~
11
trl
;IJ
l>
-4
tJ
""w
Fig.4
Ut
AT4036
APPLICATION
This linearity control unit is designed to be used in televi s ion receiver s , . in combination
with the 11 inch 90 picture tube A28 - 14W and the 12 inch 90 picture tube A-11 -20W .
The unit is intended for use in transistor -equipped sets, in con junction With the deflec tion unit AT1020 /01 and the line-OJltpUt transformer AT2042/0 l.
CONSTRUCfiON
The unit consists of a coil wound on a ferroxcube rod a nd two ferroxdure magnets. One of
these magnets has the shape of a half ring and is placed around the ferroxcube rod under
the coil. The other magne t is cylindr ical ; it is placed parallel to and clampe d agai nst the
ferroxcube rod opposite the first one . This m agnet is providedwithasquarehole to facil itate turning of it to adjust the biasing field a nd so the linearity of the line deflecti on .
October 1971
AT4036
ADJUSTABLE LINEARITY
CONTROL UNIT
Dimensions in mm
285max
--2
"~
::
::
1>- adjustable
.l magnet
7Z46784
Fig. 1
ELECTRICAL DATA
When a saw-toothcurrent (without S-correcti{)n) of 6 Ap -p, frequency 15,625 Hz, flyback
ratio 18%, flows through the linearity control unit (one connection point to earth), the correction voltage. is ~djustable between 1. OS V ind 1. 95 V.
D46
11
11
October 1971
AT4036
CONTROL UNIT
MOUNTING
The unit can be mounted either on printed -wiring boards by means of its two connection
pins and two mounting pins (see F ig. 3), or on conventional panels by bending of the two
mounting pins and/or by means of a screw through an aperture in the casing (see Fig. 4).
To prevent distortion of the m agnet ic field no iron part should approach the magnetic parts
anywhere near er tha n 3 mm. The coil s hould beshuntedwitha1 Wcarbonresistortodamp
ringing phenome na.
I~
'
.......
...
F ig. 3
Hole pattern for
mounting on a printe d-wiring board
(e = 0 .1 inch or 2. 50
mm)
,/
-+--t--+-t-+-ffi--+-+-lf-+-+- 0
5e
-=-
7Z46786
23.7
20.2
I
10.1
;
M
~~.
-+ . ~ -- -
r+'
I
I
_j- - ~~
I.
-1
~1=
.5~~~~----1~5~m-n----~~~
7Z46767.1
October 1971
D47
AT4042/14
APPLICATION
This non-adjustable linearity control unit is designed for use in black and white
television sets equippe d with 110 defl ection angl e pictu r e t ube.
It is intended for use in conjunction with :
- deflect ion unit AT 1040/15;
-line output transformer AT2048/ 12 .
DESCRIPTION
The unit consists of a coil wound on a Ferroxcube rod, and a Ferroxdure magnet, which
is placed around the rod next to the coi l.
Dimension;; 1n mn1
- - - -. 24,5 - - ---
= :;j
1--- - - 22
27
7Z75078
Fig . 1
September 1976 .
D49
AT4042/14
ELECTRICAL DATA
When a saw-toot h current (wi thou t $- correction) of 2, 2 A(p-p), frequency 15 625 Hz ,
fl yback ratio 18%, flows through the linearity control unit, the correction voltage
is 17 V.
MOUNTING
The unit can be mounte d on printe d- wiring boards by means of its two connection
pins a nd two mounting pins (see Fig. 1) . To prevent di stortion of the magneti c fi e ld
no iron part s hou ld approa.ch the magnetic parts anywhere nearer th a n 3 mm.
050
11
Septe mbe r
1976
rl-----------------------------~~----------~j
AT4043/87
APPLICATION
This transformer has been designed for black and white, and colour televi sion sets
equipped with transistors.
In black and white television sets it can be used in the single~trans is tor (BU205) line output circuit in conjunction with the line output transformer AT2048/ 12.
For further information see section "Components for col our televis i on " .
I
--
March 1973
~I I_
0 51
NON-PREFERRED
TYPES
11
DEFLECTION UNITS
1- + - - - - a - - -
1-4----- b - - - 1
7Z65799
dimensions (mm)
. type
amax 1)
bmax 1)
Cmin
AT 1020/ 01
83
103
20,9 2)
AT 1038/00
78
125
29,6 8
AT 1040
75,4
108,5
29,6 8
AT 1040/00
72,3
95
29,6 8
AT 1040/03
72,3
95
29,68
AT 1040/05
72,3
95
29,6 8
AT 1072
67
90
20,9 2)
3)
--
....!
NON-PREFERRED
DEFLECTIO N UNITS
TYPES
[_
~~=======.
Type number
AT 1020 / 0l'
AT1038/ 00
Catalogue number
Inductance
line deflection coils
field deflection co ils
Resistance
line deflection coils
field deflection coils
1\T C thermistor, without
parallel res is tor
E.H.T.
Sensitivity
in hor izonta l direction
in vertical direction
To be used w ith
picture tu be
=========
AT1040
2,09 mH
6 8, 1 mH
0,15 Q
30Q
4,5 Q
38Q
3,55 Q
29 Q
lQ Q
33 Q
18 k-V
18 kV
11 kV
7,2A(p-p)
0, 34 A (p-p)
2,29 A (p-p)
0, 44 A (p-p)
5 8 cm (2 3 in) , uoo
AT2 042/0l
AT2025 /0 1
AT4036
AT4034 / 01
2,9A(p - p) .
0, 54 A (p-p)
43cm( l 7 in) ,
48 cm (19 in),
51 cm (20 in),
58 cm (23 in),
6 1 cm (2 4 in) ,
AT2036/37
AT4042/02
'
110
110
110
uoo
11'00
DEFLECTION UNITS
NON-PREFERRED
TYPES
J
AT 1040/00
AT 1040/03
AT1040/05
AT1072
2,1 mH
66 mH
2,1 mH
66 mH
3,9 Q
30Q
3,9 Q
30Q
3,9 Q
4, 7 Q
0,2 Q
16,4 Q
lOQ
30Q
18 kV
18 kV
2, 84 A (p -p)
0,54A .(p-p)
43 cm (17 in) , 1100
61 cm (24 in), 1100
2, 82 A (p-p)
0, 55 A (p-p)
43 cm (17 in), 1100
61 cm (24 in), 110
2,1 mH
10,3 mH
18 kV
2 , 84 A (p -p)
1, 36 A (p -p)
107f-!H
29,9 mH
12 kV
9, 7 A (p - p)
0, 54 A (p -p)
AT2036/37
AT2036/37
AT2045/02
AT2072
AT4042/02
AT4042/02
AT4042/02
AT4072
AT 1040/15
August 1976
D55
NON-PREFERRED
TYPES
DEFLECTIO N UNITS .
11
TERMINAL LOCATION
rear view .
4
8
AT1020/0 l
7Z65804
1{
A'
1Z6sao7
AT1038/00
A
Sa
4
7Z65800
7Z6580t.
Sa
AT1040/00
D56
4
A
6
Ba
7Z6sao6
August 1976
NON-PREFERRED
TYPES
rear view
AT 1040
7Z65805
7Z64940
4
8
Sa
AT 1040/03
21n
7Z6S801
7Z6S804
ea
7Z6S8Z4
11.--~-~------J
NON-PREFERRED
DEFLECTKJ
UNITS
TYPES
rear view
4
8
Sa
AT1040 / 0S
4
A
7Z65804
7Z65187
5
2
AT1072
7Z65827
7l65825
NON-PREFERRED
TYPES
,.----
\...
~
....---
-r
a
7Z6 5798
type
AT2023/02
91
88,0
5 1,0
AT2025/0l
66,5
90,2
40,2
AT2036/00
66,5
90,2
40,2
AT2036/10
66,5
90,2
40,2
AT2036/37
66,5
90,2
40,2
AT2042/0 1
59,3
83,0
40,2
AT2072
53,0
83,0
40,0
NON-PREFERRED
TYPES
Type number
Catalogue number
AT2023/02
3122 108 39070
AT2025/0l
3122 108 39100
pin
1eht
E.H .T.
35
pin
fJA
35
17,5 kV
fJA
18 kV
Ri(eht)
<4 MQ
S4,5 MQ
220 V
120 rnA
240 V
lOO rnA
Ip -p deflection
2,44 A (p - p)
Auxiliary windings
-300 V
+300V
+330 V
Scanning
To be used with
picture tube
\
deflection unit
adjustable linearity
control unit
line output device
booster diode
e. h. t. rectifier
2, 44 A (p-p)
l
3
4
AT 1038/00
AT4034/01
PLS04
PY88
DY 802
7
11
10
AT 1038/00
AT4034/01
PLS04
PY88
DY 802
4
8
Anrn1ct-
107h
I~E
~~ -PREFERRED
OUTPUT TRANSFORMERS
CtYPES
. =======::::::::;
==============~======+
AT2036/00
3 122 138 30240
pin
.15
fJA
18 kV
iJA
35
$6 MQ
240 V
109 mA
240 V
90 mA
.3 A (p - p)
iJA
35
iJA
10 , 2 kV
11 kV
18 kV
$4,5 MQ
pin
pin
pin
.35
AT2072
3119 108 30600
AT2042/0 1
3122 10i 30370
11 V
950 mA
ll V
520 mA
8, 2 A (p-p)
7,5A(p-p)
3 A (p-p)
+440 V (p-p)
+ 110 V (p - p)
+25 V (p-p)
-110 V (p - p) }
1
+ 110 V (p - p) 2) 3
4
+ 22 C V (p - p)
6251 in es, 50 fra m es
525lines, 60 frames
625lines, 50 frames
525 lines, 60 frames
4 :3 cm ( 17 in), ll0
51 c m (20 in) , 11 00 .
6 1 cm (2 4 in) , 110
AT1040
AT 4042/02
PL504
PY88
OY802
;}
8
7
AT1040
AT4042/02
PL504
PY88
OY 802/TV 18S
:}
12
11
AT 1020 /0 1
AT4036
130160
BY1 18
OY51
:}
3
4
--
:}
AT 1072
AT4072
130160
BYX55
stac k
2
1
14
'-
August 1976
12
11
10
061
NON-PREFERRED
TYPES
TERMINAL LOCATION
11
AT2023/02
10
e.h .t.
c;:s,Jv
+ 220V -0--_._~
4
connecting pins
B
diagram
connecting pins
-soov,_,J
H6SI09
diagram
D62
August 1976
NON-PREFERRED
TYPES
12
AT2036/37
11
9
+ 500Vp-p { 8
J
6
connecting pins
-500Vp-pJ
4
diagram
+220Vp-p
+ 110Vp-p
2
1
-110Vp-p
7Z7501.4 '
AT2042/0l
+20Vp-p 11
+3V~c*
10
'
12
5
12
10
11
connecting pins
diagram
* rectified
during scan
Apgust 1976
7Z65810 .1
D63
NON-PREFERRED
TYPES
AT2072
13
+25Vp-p
2
3
4
7 Z76102
connecting p ins
064
Essv,_,
~
12
15 vP_ P
7Z7 6101
diagra m
August J 976
NON-PREFERRED
TYPES
s,
,
if~
11
11
.:l1>-
7Z46966.2
Fig . lb.
Ci~;cuit
symbo l.
AT4034/0l (Fig. 1)
Catalo&TUe number 3122 108 39 180 .
To be used with deflection unit AT 1038/00 a nd lin e output transformer AT2025/0l.
When a saw-tooth current (without S-correction) of 2,4 Ap - p frequency 15625 Hz .
flyback ratio 18%, flows through the linearity control unit (one connection point to earth},
the correctio n vo ltage is adjustable betwee n 12 V and 24 V .
NON-PREFERRED
TYPES
I
L__::
AT4042 / 02 (F ig . 1)
Catalogue numbe r 3 122 10 8 39450 .
To be used w ith de fl ec t ion units AT 1040 a nd AT 1040 / 15 , a nd lin e output tra nsformer s
AT2 0.36 /37 a nd AT2048/ 12.
Whe n a saw -tooth cu rrent (without S-co rr.ection) of 2, 8 A p - p , fr equ e nc y 15625 Hz ,
fl ybac k r a tio 18%, flo ws throu gh th e linear it y contr ol unit (one c onn ect io n point to ear th) ,
the co rrec tion voltage is a dju s table between 15 V a nd 26 V .
AT 4072 (F ig . 2)"
Ca ta log ue number 3 119 108 _.23 120 .
To be used w ith de fl ect ion un it AT 1072 a nd lin e output tra nsformer AT2072 .
Whe n a saw - toot h curr ent (withou t S - c or rection) of 8 A p - p, fre quency 15625 Hz, fl yba ck
r a t io 17, 6%. flo ws through th e linea rity control unit (one conn e c t ion po int to earth), the
corr ection voltage is 3 V .
.
,._ 11 ,5 ____..
ma x
'IZ76099
7Z'76 100
NON-PREFER REI
TYPES
11
Dimensions in mm
20 0,3
175
2,1
36 0,2
type
catal ogue
number
AT7 130
AT7 130/01
---1
::::::
---
.......
IIUQ
I""'~
o,
ti1
N
~0
s elf-converging
s ys te m
PREFERRED TYPES
A66 - 1-WX
AS6- 140X
A66 - SOOX
or A66-410X
11 0
110
ll0
de lta
de lta
in - line
66 cm (26 in) 56 cm (22 in) 66 cm (2 6 in)
-tZ
A56 - SOOX
ASl - SOOX
110
in -line
56 c m (2 2 in)
110
11 0
in- lin e
in - l in e
51 cm (2 0 in) 4 7 c m (1 8 in)
A47 - SOOX
mm
r-z
m-t
<(J')
(J')-n
-o
o"'
z .
AT 1062 / 01
AT2063/00
AT 1063 / 01
AT2o6:J; oo
ATl080
AT 108.3/0 1
AT 1085
AT20 80/ l 0
or AT2076/ l0
LINE DEFLECTION
dr iver tra ns for m er
centr ing choke
lin ear ity co ntrol
AT404 3/R7
AT 4043 /88
AT 4042 / 08
AT-10-1 3/86
AT40-I0 /85
AT4040 / 87
AT4043/87
AT4042 / l 7
or AT4042 / 38
AT4044 / 20
AT404-I / 26
AT40H / 27
FIELD DEFLECTION
Cla s s - D filte r c hoke
>
c::
"',..,
,....
"'"
0>
AT4043/3 5-
CONVERGENCE
con ve r gence unit (3 x)
AT 1085
AT 4046 / 27
or AT -10-16/ 28
or AT~0 -16/ 32
"'c
;:10
<
-<
c>
~
,_.
"'a-"
h r id gc coil
blu e l<~tc r a l unit
AT40.l :J / l8
ATl068/03
or ATl068/04
mu lt i - pu le unit
conve rge nce adju s te rs
AT 1081
AT4040/ 44 (2x)
AT4040/ 58
AT4040/ 61
AT4040/ 92
AT4040/ 93
NORTH-SOUTH RASTER
transductor
cor r ec tion coils
AT4041 / 40
AT40 40/3 1
AT4040/38
AT4040 /8 7
en
c::
DESIGNED WITH
t7:l
BU208A
BG 1895 641
>-<:
BU20 8A
BG1 895 641 (with AT 2080/ 10)
DELAY LIN ES
sys te m : PA L
PAL / SECA M
Brazilian PAL
NTSC
PAL
DLSO
DLS l
DL5 2
DLS:\
DLSS
DL60
()()
oo
r-3:
0""0
The data s heets of these t ypes arc a rra nged accord ing to the i r t ype numbe r s on th e follo wing pages .
~0
....z
mm
r-z
m~
~en
----~--~~~-~~-~~ LIUIII
Vl"T1
tt~O~Q
:OMPONENTS FOR
SURVEY
)LOUR TELEVISION
NON-PREFERRED TYPES
Abridged data of the fo llowing types are given in t abl es which can be found after the
data s heet s of the preferred types.
Blue latera l llllits
AT 1025/05
AT1025/08
AT1066/0 l
Deflection llllits
AT 1027 /07
AT1027 /09
AT1029/07
AT1029/09
AT1060/0l
Transductors
AT40+ 1/ 0il
AT40H/H
AT 4041 / lS
AT4U4 1/3 7
Adju~table
AT4042/02
AT4042/ 12
Convergence units
AT4045/07
AT 404.5 / 08 '
AT4046f.07
AT4046/08
AT 40.S0 / 11
AnPll<:t
L97n
-AT 1062/01
11
DEFLECTION UNIT
with purity ring
RZ 28730-3
RZ 29829- 1
\
~
APPLICATION
This deflection unit has been de s igned for rhe 26 in ll0 ~hadow ma~k colour picture
tubes A66- 140X a nd A66- 4JOX . to opera te in conjunction with 1he fo llo wing units :
Convergence units
or
Line -o utput tr8nsformer
AT4046/ . .
AT4050/ ..
AT206.1 / . . combined with a
AT4042/ ..
AT1068/ . .
trip l e~:
E5
AT 1062/01
DEFLECTION UNIT
E6
AT 1062/01
DEFLECTION UNIT
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions in mm
<
o,'>
,..bJJ
35.6
1+-------20~9----------1
91
YZ72?CI05
Fig.l
Mounting
The deflection unit is slid over the neck of the picture tube. It is brought into the correct
position as indicated by marks on the housing of the unit and on the cone of the tube. The
housing of the unit is fixed by means of the clamping bracket (at the rear) and screw
(which must be tightened with a minimum torque of 1. 5 Nm). During this operation the
housing must be pre(>sed against the cone so that the four friction shoes at the front of the
unit rest against the cone of the picture tube. Then the purity ring is clicked to the back
of the housing of the deflection unit. (Now the blue lateral unit can be mounted).
Once the coil unit in the housing of the deflection unit is in its correct position, it is
fixed by means of the four wing nuts.
October 1971
1~
E7
----
AT 1062/01
DEFLECTION UNIT
ELECTRICAL DATA
(typical values) .
95
oc
Connections
The connection tags are plugable and solderable .
1'
2'
3'
4'
5'
~taH'-_;;-IDJ2x4n
v- ~
I
I
I
W
l
.~I
.
,I
I
-0---3
_j
VE 71801L P
H = line coils
V = field coils
E8
11
September 1974
AT 1062/01
DEFLECTION UNIT
with puri'ty ring
Purity adjustment
The purity can be adjusted by means of the two independently movable annular magnets
of the purity ring ATJ061 (catalogue number 3122 l07 50200), see Fig. 5 . These magnets
are diametrically magnetised. The units are supplied with the magnet fields opposing
each other, .giving minimum resultant field; the notches of the magnets then coincide. By
turning the magnets with respect to each other the magnetic force of the resultant field of
both magnets is adjusted. The direction of, the resultant magnetic field is adjusted by
turning the magnets simultaneously. The area of purity adjustment which can be obtained
on the screen of the picture tube is given in Fig. 4 (dimensions in mm).
cj
---
en
Fig.4
111 .7
vs 728 016
Fig. 5. Dimensions in mm of
the purity ring AT1061
September 1974
E9
AT1063/0l
11
DEFLECTION UNIT
with purity ring
APPLICATION
Thi s deflection unit has been designed for the 22in ll0 shadow mask colour picture
tubes A56-140X and AS6-410X, to operate in conjunction with the following units:
Convergence units
AT4046/ ..
or AT4050/ ..
AT4042/ ..
ATl068/ ..
The unit AT1063/0l comprises the deflection unit AT1063 and the purity ring AT1061
which can easily be clipped to the back of the housing of the AT1063 4 ) after this unit
has been secured.
The saddle- shaped line and field deflection coils as well as the Ferroxcubeyoke ring are
supported by a Noryl ring. This set is built into a Noryl coaxial housing provided with
four guide s lots in which the set can be axially adjusted over a distance of ll , S mm 1).
With the complete unit fastened on the neck of the picture tube , the coils can sti ll be
. turned 4 for correct raster orientation and displaced axially for purity adjustment.
Two of the win g nut attachments 2) are grooved and spring-loaded to prevent unwanted
turning of the coils during axial displacement.
Furthermore the housing is provided with attachments into which convergence units can
easily be clipped. By loosening the screw in the rim of the housing, the convergenc e
units can be rotated through 150 3) .
The entire deflection unit meets the self- extinguishing requirements of IEC65 para. 14. 1
and UL94, SE 1.
To compensate for temperature dependence of the coils , the deflection unit is equipped
with a built-in NTC thermistor which can be connected in series with the field def!ection coils. In field output circuits with voltage feedback for lineari zing the sawtooth,
the picture height then remains almost constant up to 95 C.
September 1976
11
R ll
AT1063/0l
DEFLECTION UNIT
with purity ring
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions (mm)
l 67_j '
---65
'
;____.._ 1---1
1+--- - - - - - 203.9--------..1
"m"'
Fig.1
Mounting
The deflection unit is slid over the neck of the picture tube. It i s brought into the correct
position as indicated by marks on the housing of the unit and on the cone of the tube. The
housing of the unit is fixed by means of the clamping bracket (at the rear) and screw
(which must be tightened with a minimum torque of 1, 5 Nm) . During this operation the
housing must be pressed against the cone so that the four friction shoes at the front of the
unit rest against the cone of the picture tube . Then the purity ring is clicked to the back
. of the housing of the deflection unit. (Now the blue lateral unit can be mounted) .
Once the coil unit in the housing of the deflection unit is in its correct position, it is fixed
by means of the four wing nuts.
E12
February 197 3
AT1063/91
DEFLECTION UNIT
EL!:CTRICAL DATA
(typical values)
1'
2'
3'
4'
5'
.~llJH
--t-'trux4n
v- ~
I
:::l
l:
Il
I
I
- - --0 ___ _
I
_j
VE 7180\G P
E13
AT1063/01
DE F L ECTION UNIT
Purity adjustment
The purity can be adjusted by means of the two independently movable annular magnets of
the purity r ing AT1061 (catalogue number 3122 107 50200), see Fig. 5. These magnets
are diametrically magnetised . The units are supplied with the magnet fields opposing
each other, giving minimum resultant field; the notches of the magnets then coincide . By
turning the magnets with respect to each other the magnetic force of the resultant field of.
both magnets is adjusted. The direction of the resultant magnetic fie ld i s ad justed by
turning the magnets 'simultaneousl y . The area of purity ad jus t ment which can be obtained
on the screen of the pi cture tube i s given in Fig. 4 (dimensions in mm).
-111 .7
vs 728
F ig.4
E14
_I
016
Fig. 5 Dimensions in mm of
the purity ring AT1061.
September 1974
AT1068/03
11
APPLICATION
This unit is intended for use with a ll0 shadow mask colour picture tube in conjunction
with:
a deflection unit AT1060/ ..
or AT1062/ ..
or AT1063/ ..
and convergence unit s AT4046/ ..
or AT4050/ ..
for static and dynamic blue lateral adjustment.
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions (mm)
.--
Fig. 1
The unit is self- clamping around a tube with a diameter of 36,5 1, 6 mm.
~') This dimensiop. is minimum and will be larger when the unit is in position.
February 1973
15
AT1068/03
11
ELECTRICAL DATA
1 and 5
4
19 , 3 Q
23,4 mH
2 and 3
2, 15 Q
300 flH
95 C
edge of
phosphor
screen
7Z987t.6
Fig.2
E16
February 1973
AT1068/04
APPLICATION
This unit is intended for use with a 110 shadow mask colour picture tube in conjunction
with:
Dimensions (mm)
Ii I
\
I 1 I
II
56,7
---
I
--.. e.s .......______ .
Js.~......._____,_;
Fig.1
+,~_{Q' :.i0JJ?J-
February 1973
11
E17
AT1068/04
ELECTRICAL DATA
Coils for static adjustment
terminals
support terminal for NTC thermistor
resistance
inductance
1 and 5
4
198, 5 Q
215 rnH
2 and 3
2, .15 Q
300 flH
95
--
edge of
phosphor
screen
7Z987to.6
Fig. 2
E18
February 197 3
AT1080
11
DEFLECTION UNIT
with built-in 4- pole coils for symmetrizing
of the line and field astigmatism
in line
66 cm (26 in)
36,5 mm
Deflection angle
1100
6, 35 A p - p
1, 11 rnH
3,4Ap-p
3,0 Q
max . 34 mm/A
max. 23 mm/A
1, 6 Q
APPLICATION
This deflection unit has been designed for use with a llOO colour picture tube type
A66-500X in CTV receivers in conjunction with:
diode-split line output transformer AT2076/10 and
line output transistor
BU208A
linearity control unit
multipole unit
September 1976
11 .
AT4042/17 or AT4042/38
AT1081
11
El9
--
AT1 080
DEFLECTION UNIT
r
DESCRIPTION (see F ig: 1)
The saddle - shaped line and field deflection coils, and the Ferroxcube yoke ring with
4-pole unit , are supported by a plastic cap. This set is built into a plastic coaxial housing,
which is provided with a plastic axial alignment ring. This ring e nables the set to be
axiall y adjusted over a distance of 6 mm, after the complete unit has been fastened on the
neck of the picture tube with a cl ampi ng ring. The screw of the clamping ring is a ccessible with a screwdriver via a recess in the axia l alignment ring. To co;rrect the raster
orientation with the compl ete u'nit in position on rhe picture tube neck, the coil as~embl y
can be rotated by means of the protntding parts on the supporting ring, which can be
reached by the top and bottom recesses in the coaxial housing. The whole coil assembly
is locked in the required position by pushing the levers down until they block.
The unit meets the self - extingu ishing requirements of IEC65 para. 14.4 and UL94, SE 1
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions In mm
Outlines
ring for
axial alignment
radial
positioning
recess for
abutment
screwdriver
blocks
137,7
~101,8-1
1- - - - - - - - - 208 ,3 - - - - - - -- - 1
104,5
7Zet0Ul
1- - - - - - - - - - 250 - - - - - - - - --.1
Fig.l
The unit is provided with soldering pins for connection.
R.20
September 1976
- AT1080
DEFLECTION UN1T
11
MOUNTING
To obtain easy reproducible and accurate alignment of the picture tube and the deflection
unit , the cone of the picture tube has a moulded indexing ridge to centre the deflection
unit housing.
The deflection unit is brought into correct position by a lignment of the protrusion on the
housing with the location mark on the cone of the tube.
The unit must be pressed against the cone , so that the housing is indexed by the moulded
ridge on the cone. The unit is then fixed by tightening the screw in the clamping ring at
the rear. The screw should be tightened with a torque of 1, 2 to 1, 4 Nm.
ELECTRICAL DATA
Line coils, parallel connected
inductance
resistance at 25 oc
1,11 mH 4%
6,35Ap-p
3,5 mH 10%
3,0 Q 7%
3, 35 A p-p
max. 34 mm/A
max. 23 mm/A
95 C
1,2 Ql0%
1, 6 Q
4
1,5k0
*)
r1
7
*)
10
4-pole coils
*)
~12
11
7ZU011.2
AT1080
DEFLECTION UNIT
BEAM CORRECTIONS
With the defl ect ion unit AT1080 and the multipole unit AT10 81 m ounted on th e tube
A66-500X , the follow ing corrections may be required:
~l ax imum
45 flm
Static convergence deviations must be corrected by the adjustable four pole and s ix-po le f!e lds of th e ATI0 8 l cen tred around th e tube ax is.
Maximum required compensation for static convergenc e
4-pole device : red opposite to blue (in any direction)
6-pole device: red a nd blue to green (in an y direction)
6 mm
3 mm
5 mm
Maximum centring error in any direction after colour -purity , sta tic
convergence , and horizontal centre lin e correction
5 mm
With respect to dynamic convergence , the display system, consisting of picture tubeA66-500X
a nd deflection and AT 1080 , is inherently self converging . However, a small systemat ic
correction is r~quired on the vertical axis, a nd a lso small corrections shou ld be ma de to
compensate for tolerances and asy mmetries in the tube a nd deflection unit ~;ornb inat:on.
For this purpose two types of dynamic magnetic four-pole fie ld s can be used, see F ig . .:1.
One is generated by add iti ona l windings on the yoke r in g of the deflection unit energized
by adjustable sawtooth currents s ynchron ized w ith sca nnin g.
The other type is generated by sawtooth and parabolic currents which are sync hr on ized
with scanning and fl ow thr ough the defl ection coils.
Co mpens at ion to be pr ovided by these corrections:
- hori zonta l red- to - blue distance at the end of the
horizonta l axis (lin e sy mmetry)
- horizonta l red-to-blue distance at the top of the
vertical ax is (field sy mm etry top)
- hor iz onta l red-to-blue di sta nc e at th e bottom of
the vertical ax is (fi e] r! symmetry bottom)
- ve rtic a l red-to-blue distance a t the end s of the
horizontal ax is in oppos ite directions (line balance)
- vertical red-to-blue dista,1ce at the end s of the
hori zonta I ax is in equ a l directions (line ba lance pnrabola)
- vertic al red-to-blue dis tanc e at the top of the
vertic a l axis (fi eld ba la nce top)
= vcr tic a l .red-to-blue distanc e a t the bottom of the
vertic a l ax is (field balance botto m)
R??
11
_ _ II
0 2 mm
3,5 1, 5 mm
3,5
+ 1,5
mm
01,5mm
0 0, 7 mm
Ol,Smm
0
l, 5 mm
AT1080
DEFLECTION UNIT
11
Notes
1) Purity adjustment in vertical direction is not required.
2) This correction is made by feed ing a sawtooth ci.Irre~t of line frequency through the
additional four-pole windings on the d.eflection unit.
3) This correction is made by feeding a rectified sawtooth current of field frequency
through the additi ona l four-pole windings on the deflection unit.
4) This correction is .made by unbalancing the line deflection coils .
5) This correction is made by feeding a parobolic current of line frequency through the
line deflection coils.
6) This correction is made by unbalancing the field deflection coils during the first half
of the field scan.
7) This correction is m ade by unbalancin g the field deflection coils during the second
half of the field scan.
Application information available on request.
--
AT1081
MULTI-POLE UNIT
~----------------------------- ---
----------
Static convergence
red opposite to blue in any direction (4-pole)
red-blue with respect to green in
any direction (6- pole)
min.
mm
min.
mm
min.
mm
APPLICATIO N
This unit has been designed for the co lour picture tubes A66 - 500X, A56 - 500X, A51 - 500X
and A47 - 500X, with in-line gun arrangement and the deflection units AT 1080, AT 1083/01
and AT 1085. Its purpose is threefold:
- horizontal colour-purity adjustment
- static convergence adjustment
-adjustment of raster symmetry in N and S or adjustment of the horizontal axis for
op~imum straightness .
DESCRIPTION
The unit incorporates four ring-shaped permanent magnets , supported by non-magn etic
plastic support rings, and a cam-actuated collet , which enables the unit to be cla mped
to the neck of the picture tube.
The magnetic rings are made up of an inner and an outer ring coupled by non - magnetic
pinion gears to form an epicyclic train. The support rings carry the pin i on gears.
The magnetic rings comprise:
- two pairs of 2-pole magnets
- one pair of 4-pole magnets
-one pair of 6-pole magnets
(each pair consisting of an inner a nd outer ring of identical magnetic configuration).
' The support rings of both the 2-pole rings are fixed to the collet, those of the 4- and 6pole r ings are rotatab le. Rotating the lug on an outer magnetic ring varies the resultant
field strength,
Rotating the lug on a support ring varies the direction of the resultant field.
MECHAN ICAL DATA
Dimensions (mm)
See Fig.l on next pnge .
~ pte mber
1976
l ______.~-~-11 _
E25
--
IIIITfl
,,,_ _
)>
..,
o-
-t
.....
0
00
.....
til
purity
,............__
roster
symmetry
45 _ _ _ _ ,~ 45
poles 6 6 2 2 4 4
22
6- pole magnet
r ing + support
30 _ _
1_
30
~
~
~\~ )/
4-pole magnet
ring+ support
l..l!!!l!l::ll-
g
.,
I
0
t-'
til
::j
{/)
~ro
g.
ro
1-i
.....
"'o--I
F ig . l
93,3max
7Z69049 .1
"".....
""""
.....
""
--I
CJl
0'-
0'-
AT1081
MULTI-POLE UNIT
11
Mounting
Before m o unting the multi - pole unit , the lug on the rear e nd of t he coll e t must be r otated
ant i-cl oc kwis e . The unit is slid over the ne ck of the picture tube a nd pre ssed to th e defl ection unit.
Two protrusions on the front of the unit and the corresponding recesses on the back of
the deflection unit , will bring the unit into correct position. By rotating the lug on the
collet clockwise the unit will be clamped.
AOJUSTMENTS
Horizontal colour purity is ohta ined by var ying the fie ld strength of th e 2 - pole m agnet
s itm tcd between the 4-pole a nd 6 -p olc m agm:ts (see Figs land 2) .
Vertica l c o lou1 purity adjustment is not requir e d (s ee data on colour picture tubes).
The static convergence is adjusted by varying the field strength and direction of
the 4-pole and 6 - pole. The 4-pole field moves the outer electron beams (red and
blue) equally in opposite directions (see Fig.3) . The 6 -po le field m oves the outer e lec tron
heams equally in the sa me directi on (see F ig. 4). The centre beam (green) is unaffec ted.
!-kri:":D:o ta l axis or raster symmetry is adjusted by vary ing th e fi e ld Htrength of th e 2pole magnet situated at the rear of the unit (see Fig. 1)'. All thr ee bea m s are equa ll y mo ved in a vertic a l direc tion (see F ig . 5).
---
Fig . 2
eptember 1976
11
E27
----'
AT1081
11
F ig.3
+---- +--
I
I
I
I
I
+---1
I
- - red
- - - blue
-...
...,
ns9047.z
""'
Fig.4
b
I
I
I
I
4--
- - g reen
- - - red- blue
ns""'-'
E28
Se tember 1976
AT1081
Fig. 5
--
11
E29
AT1083/0,1
DEFLECTION UNIT
with built -i n 4-pole coils for symm etriz lng
of rhe lin e and field as tigmat ism
in line
:"5 cm (:!2 in)
.16,5 mm
Deflection angle
1 [ QO
6, 2 A p-p
1, 14mH
3 . 4Ap - p
3,:!6
max. 25 mm / A
ffiQ X .
18 mm /A
1, ..1 Q
APPLICATION
T hi s deflect ion unit has been designed for use with a ll0 colour picture tube type
AS6 .. 500X in CTV receivers in conjunction with:
ctiode - sp lit line output transformer
1in e output transistor
AT4042 / 17 or AT4042j:l8
AT1081
ptember 1976
E-31
AT1083/01
DEFLECTION UNIT
MECHANICAL DATA
Outlines
ring for
axial alignment
radia l
positioning
recess for
abutment
blocks
screwdriver
137,7
--59,7-
--123,7
~ 101 ,8-
---~ 1
1----- '104,5--~~ 1
250-- - - - - - - --.1
F ig. 1
The unit is provided with s oldering pins fo r co nn ection.
E32
September 1976
AT1083/0l
DEFLECTION UNIT
11
MOUNTING
To obtain easy reproducible and accurate alignment of the picture tube and the deflection
unit , the cone of the picture tube has a moul ded indexing ridge to centre the deflection
unit housing.
The deflection unit is brought into correct position by alignment of the protru s ion on the
housing with the location mark on the cone of the tube.
The unit must be .pressed against the cone, so that the housing is indexed by the moulded
ridge on the cone. The unit. is then fixed by tightening the screw in the clampu'tg ring at
the rear. The screw should be tightened with a torque of 1, 2 to 1, 4 Nm.
ELECTRICAL DATA
Line coils, parallel connected
inductance .
resistance at 25 oc
1,14 mH 4%
0, 9 Q 10%
6, 24 A p-p
3, 9 mH 10%
3, 36 Q 7%
3, 4 A p-p
max . 25 mm/A
max. 18 mm/A
1,4 Q
95 C
4
1,5 k0
*)
rl
7
10
*) 4 - pole coi ls
*)
~12
11
7ZIU011.2
eptember 1976
11
E33
---
Al1083/01
DEFLECTION UNIT
11
BEAM CORRECTIONS
With the deflection unit AT1083/01 and the multipole unit AT 1081 mounted on the tube
A56-500X, the following corrections may be required:
Maximum required horizontal displacement of the electron beams with
respect to the phosphor stripes by the purifying magnet of the AT10811)
45J.!m
Static convergence deviations must be corrected by the adjustable fourpole and six-pore fieids of the AT1081 centred around the tube axis.
Maximum required compensation for static convergence
4-pole device: red opposite to blue (in any direction)
6~pole device: red and blue to green (in any direction)
5,5 mm
2, 8 rrim
--
'J'o obtain a symmetrical shape for the horizontal lines at the upper pan
and the lower part of the screen, the unit AT108l comprises an additional two-pole correction magnet giving a displacement of the beam
in the centre of the s creen in vertical direction of maximum
4,5 mm
4,5 mm
With respect tq dynamic convergence, the display system, consisting of picture tube
A56-500X and deflection unit, AT1083/0l is inherently self converging. However, small
corrections should be made to compensate for tolerances and asymmetries in the tube
and deflection unit combination .
For this purpose two types of dynamic magnetic four-pole fields can be used.
One is generated by additional windings on the yoke ring of the deflection unit energized
by adjustable sawtooth currents synchronized with scanning.
The other type is generated by sawtooth and parabolic currents which are synchronized
with scanning and flow through the d~flection coils.
Compensation to be provided by these corrections:
- horizontal red-to- blue distance at the end of the
horizontal axis (line symmetry)
- horizontal re<;l.- to-blue distance at the ends of the
vertical axis (field symmetry)
- vertical red-to- blue distance at the ends of the
horizontal axis in opposite directions (line balance)
- vertical red-to- blue distance at the ends of the
horizontal axis in equal directions (l'ine balance parabola)
- vertfcal red-to- blue distance at the top ~f the
vertical axis (field balance top)
- vertical red-to-blue distance at the bottom of the
vertical axis (field balance bottom)
0 1, 5 mm
l , 5 mm
0 1, 0 mm
0 0, 6 mm
0 1, 2 mm
0 l, 2 mm
E34
11
11
September 197 6
AT1083/0l
DEFLECTION UNIT
Notes
1) Purity adjustment in vertical direction is not required.
2
) This correction is made by feeding a sawtooth current of line freque ncy through the
additional four-po l e windings on the deflection unit.
3) This correction is made by feeding a rectified sawtooth current of field freq.J ency
through the additionai four-pole windings on the deflection unit.
11
AT1085
11
DEFLECTION UNIT
with built-in 4 -pole coils for symmetrizing
of the line and fi e ld ~stigmlltism
in line
51 cm (20 in) or 47 cm (18 in)
36,5 mm
Deflection angle
110
6, 2 A p-p
1, 14 mH
3,4 A p-p
3,36 Q
APPLICATION
This deflec tion unit has been designed for use with 110 c olour picture tubes.
A5 1-SOOX and A47 -SOOX in CTV receivers in conjunction with :
~ptember
AT2076/10 and
BU208A
AT4042 / 17 or AT4042/38
AT1081
1976
11
AT1085
DEFLECTION UNIT
11
DESCRIPTION (see Fig. 1)
The saddle-shaped line and field deflection coils, and the Ferroxcube yoke ring with
4-pole unit, are supported by a plastic cap. This set is bu ilt into a plastic coaxial
housing , which is provided with a plastic axial alignment ring. This ring enables the set
to be axially adjusted over a distance of 5 mm ; after the complete unit has been fastened
on the neck of the .picture tube with a clamping ring. The screw of the clamping ring is
access ible with a strev;driver v ia a rece ss in the axial alignment ring. To correct the
raster orientation w ith the co~let e un it in pos iti.on on the picture tube neck, the coil
assembly can be rotated by .means of the protruding parts on the supporting ring, which
can be 1:eached by the top and bottom rec esses in the coaxial housing. The whole coil
assembly is locked in the required position by pushing the levers down until they block.
The umt meets the self-extinguishing requirements of IEC65 para. 14.4 and UL94, SE 1.
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions in mm
Outlines
ring fo11
axi9l alignment
radial
positioning
recess for
screwdriver
abutment
blocks
137,7
~,.,. ==I
1- - - - - - - - - - 2 0 8 , 3 -- - - - - - -- 1
1+-- - - - -104,5
~--~------~-------250------------------.1
Fig. 1
The unit is provided w ith soldering pins for connection .
E38
11
11
September 1976
AT1085
DEFLECTION UNIT
11
MOUNTING
To obtain easy reproducible and accurate alignment of ~he picture tube and the deflection
unit, the cone of the picture tube has a moulded indexing ridge to centre the deflection
unit housing;
The deflection unit is brought into correct position by aiignment of the protrusion on the
housing with the location mark on the cone, of the tube.
Th e unit must be pressed against the cone , so that the housing is indexed by the moulded
ridge on the cone. The unit is then fixed by tightening the screw in the clamping ring at
the rear. The screw should be tightened with a torque of 1, 2 to 1, 4 Nm .
ELECTRICAL DATA
Line coils , parallel connected
inductance
r esistance at 2 5 oc
Line deflection
curre~t,
1,14 mH 4%
0, 9 Q 10%
edge to edge at 25 kV
6,2Ap-p
3 , 9 mH 10%
.3 ,36 Q 7%
3, 4 A p-p
95 C
4
5
1,5 k0
*)
rl
7
1D
*) 4 - pole coils
*)
,,
12
7211011,2
September 1976
11
---
AJ1085
DEFLECTION UNIT
BEAM CORRECTIONS
With the deflection unit AT1085 and the multipole unit AT 1081 mounted on the tube
A5 1-500X or A47 - 500X the fo llowing corrections m ay be requj.red:
A5 1- 500X
A47 -500X
Maximu m requixed horizontai di.sp.lacement of the electron
beams with respect to the phosphor str ipes by the pur ify ing
magnet of the AT 108 1 1)
45 [lm
45 [lm
Stat ic convergence deviation,; mu t-:t be corrected .by the
adj ustable four -pole .and six-po le fie lds of the AT 1081 .
centred around the tube axis .
Maximum required compensat ion for static conver-gence
4-pole device: red opposite to blue (in a ny direction)
6 - po1e device: red and blue to green (in any d irect ion)
5 mm
2,5 mm
4,5 mm
2 , 3 mm
3,5 mm
4 mm
4 mm
With respect to dynamic convergence, the displa y syste m , con s ist in g of pil::ture tttbe
A5 1-SOOX or A47 -5 00X a nd deflection unit AT1085 is inherently self converging . However,
a s ma ll 'fixed line par abola correct ion of 1, 3 mm for tube A5 1: 500X and of 2 , 6 mm for
tube A47-500X, is rcqvircd and also sma ll correct ions shou ld be made to co mp e nsate for
to leran ces and asymmetr ies in the tube a nd deflection unit combination.
For thi.s purpo!;e two types of dyna mic magnet ic four-pole fields can be used.
One is generat~d by additiona l w indings on the yoke r ing of the deflection unit energized
hy ;;djno;tahJ'e sawtooth currents synchro nized with scanning.
The other type is generated by sawtooth a nd parabo lic currents which are synchron ized
with scanning and flow through the deflection coils .
Co mpensation to be prov ided by thes e corrections :
- horizontal red~to - blu e distance a t t he encl of the
hori:>:ontal Hxis (line symmetry)
- horizontal red-to-blu e dis tance a t the ends of the
vertical axis (field symmetry)
- vert ica l red-to-i1lut> dtRtance at t he e nd s of the
horizontal axis in opposite direct ions (line balance)
- vertical r ed - to - blue d istance at t he e nds of the
horiz;mtal axi::; in equal directions (line ba la nce parabola)
- vert ical r ed-to - blu e distance at the top of the
vertical axis (field balance top)
- vertica l r ed-to - blue d istance at the bottom of the
vertical axis (field balance bottom)
0 1,5 mm
1, 5 mm
0 1,0 mm
0 0,5 mm
0 I mm
0 I mm
11
September I 976
.'3122 13 7 15660
A11085
DEFLECTION UNIT
11
Notes
1) Purity adjustment in vertical direction is not required.
2) This correction is m ade by feeding a sawtooth current of line frequency through the
additional four-pole w indings on the deflectian unit.
3
) This correction is made by feeding a rectifi:.:d ~awrooth current of field frequency
through the additional four-pole windings on the deflection unit.
4 ) This correction is m ade by unbala nciilg the lin <: de t1 e ction coils.
5 ) This correction is made by feeding a parabolic current of line frequency thro ugh the
line deflection co ils .
6 ) This. correction is made hy 1mbalancing the field deflection coils during the first half
of the field scan.
7) This correction is made by unbalancing the field deflection coils durin g the ~ec:ond
half of the field scan.
Application information available on request .
September 1976
11
E41
A.T2063/00
I
LINE OUTPUT TRANSFORMER
,.
QUICK REFERENCE DATA
0 , 05
1,5
22 , 5
25
RtEHT
mA
kV
MQ
1 7
185
480
183
650
mA
lp -p_deflect ion
6, 1
5, 9
RZ 720915-07-01
APPLICATION
This tr a nsformer has been _designed to provide the required scanning amplitude for the
1100 colour picture tube A66 -140X in television rece ivers presenting 625 lines at 50
fields per second (CCIR) or 525 lines at 60 fieid s per second (USA).
It is intended for use in conjunction with:
-deflection unit AT1062 / 0l
-linearity control unit AT4042/06
- line output transistor BU 20 8
-E. H. T. tripler m odule BG1 895 -641.
September 1974
E43
11
AT2063/00
DESCRIPTION
The m agnet ic circuit of the transformer comprises a ferroxc ube U - a nd a ferroxcube
I -c ore pressed t oget her by mea n s of brackets. The primary w indings. the second ary
w in dings a nd the E. H. T. wi nd ing are s ituated on one leg of the core. The E. H. T. winding
is encap sulated in fl ame retard ing polyester e,, ).
The transform er has been pr ovided with four mounting pin s a nd two threaded holes for
mounting.
Exter na l c ircuit connection is m ade to connecting pins, pos it ioned as indicated in Fig. 1,
enabling th e unit to be soldered directly into a printed wiring board (Fig. 2) .
MECHANICAL DATA
M3
i-1-+c:::
I
I
L-,
-~
r-'
l,.::r,,,,
_/._
7,45
4,30
I
Fig. 1
We ight
240 g approximately
mox
Lt-J
82,5
10
--,
--;
r-
T-
95+5
-o
7Z66935
51mox
':' )C omply ing with the self -extinguis hing and non-dripping pr operties of the Amer ican
Underwriter s ' Laboratories rating mentioned in UL94SE - l.
11
October 1972
AT2063/00
Mount in g
T he transfor m er ca n be m ou nted on e ither a prin ted-wir ing board or a m eta l chassis . It
ca n be secured wit h two .1 mm sc r ews .
For m ount ing on a printe d-w irin g boa rd t he fit of the conn ect ing a nd t he f our mounting
pin s in a printed-w ir iqg gr id w ith a pitch of 2, 54 mm is illu st r ated in Fig. 2.
-,,-
e=2,54
15,12 -
J.s _
12x)
'--
"'
rt
) 4
30
- t
28
26
24
22
20
. 55,44
"
"
12
10
+
4
18
1
20t
18
16
12
10
Temperat ure
T he ope r at ing temperatu re of the c ore a nd t he -c oil s s hould not exce ed 105 C, under
worst c ond iti ons, i.e. ta kin g int o a cc ount:
- over voltage
- low at m osph er ic pressur e (at hi gh alt itudes ) impl ying ba d c ooling by convection
-high a mbient temperature (up to 45 oc).
Ampl e c ool a ir c ircul at ion s hou ld be prov id ed ar ound the tra ns f_9rm er .
September 1974
E45
AT2063/00
Distances
The following minimum distances between the transformer and neighbouring conductive
flat surfaces (in proportion to their sharpness protruding parts must have a greater distance) must be maintained:
From the E. H. T. winding, radially
axially
15 mm
10mm
15 mm
The transformer apd the leads a nd components carrying high tension pulses should be
kept free from _.metal particles, solder drops etc.
EHTsupply
IEHT
mA
EHT
kV
RiEHT
MQ
. V B
Power supply
---
Outp~t
trans.istor
Deflection
v 8
V
(pin 8)
0,05
1,5
25
22,5
1, 7
183
185
172
165
Is
mA
480
650
VcEM
1200
1165
+le M
3,9
3, 9
-reM
2,9
2, 7
1defl. p-p
flyback
ratio
(zero line)
6, 1
5,9
Over scan
variation
Idc max .
17,7
1.0
28, 7
27,5
I, 2
E46
11
October 1972
AT2063/00
Circuit dia gr a m
beam
c urrent
Jimiter
---
' 3,3mF +
t 25VlT
1
j
1
~'s ~sov:zsv
4
L_ .,
1
+60Vp
'3 '
-60Vp
-350Vp
Fig.3
*}
October 1972
l.l
E47 .
AT2076110
11
1eht
E.H.T.
max. 1, 5 mA
25 kV
Ri(eht)
2 MQ
6, 5 A
1,12 mH
148 V
785 mA
APPLICATION
This transformer has been des igned to provide the r eq uired scanning amplitude for
20 AX 110 colour picture tube s with a neck diameter of 36, 5 mm in transistor equipped telev is ion receivers presenting' 625 lines at 50 fiel ds per second (CCIR) or 525 lines
at 60 fields per second (USA).
1) For mounting on the printed- wiring board a washer of 20 mm in dia meter has
used. Tightening torque on printed - wiring board: 500 + 100 mNm.
11
to
be
AT2076110
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions (min) and te rminals
smooth solder
joint
133
ma x
----,.--- 11
- --l"r:=-:t:,ct::-=-=-..:.
- - 41- ---it=~-
11 _ _ _ _
_ _ ..lL
= ==='1fT===
i>li::~F=:=::::::
==t t=:::::..:::==.:.FI!~i!E:~=:::
11
11
1-
----
80max - - - ----.1
l.... s.7
4,0
Fig. 1
500 g approximately
S olderability
E50
11
11
Aul!USt 1975
I "
AT2076110
MOUNTING
The transformer may be mounted on either a printed-wiring board pr, under certain
conditions, on a metal chassis. Two securing studs (M3) are provided.
The fit of the connecting and the mounting pins in a printed-wiring grid with a pitch of
2, 54 mm is illustrated in Fig. 2.
-, ,=2.54
I 0,1 in)
35
- - (2,xl-30
28
-1-
I+
26
24
22
20
44
18
16
14
12
f+
10
--
'
Fig.2
Hole pattern for mounting
on a printed-wiring board
(solder side). Grid hole
diameter 1, 3 0, 1 mm.
--
23 ,94
j
20e
18
16
14
12
10
7l7l~14
Whether the transformer is board or chassis mounted, the core must be earthed.
Temperature
The operating temperature of the e. h. t. coil should not exceed +85 C under worst conditions, i.e. taking into account:
- over-voltage on the coils;
- low atmospheric pressure (at high altitudes) implying bad cooling by convection;
- high ambient temperature (up to 45 C).
To satisfy this requirement it may be necessary to provide an ample cool air flow around
the transformer.
.August 1975
.J
AT2076110
Distances
The following minimum distances between the transformer and neighbouring conductive
flat surfaces must be maintained (it should be noticed that edges of conductive parts must
have a greater distance) :
From the e.h.t. coil, radially 10 mm
axially 10 mm
The transformer , and the leads and components c~rrying high voltage pulses, should be
kept free from metal particles , solder drops etc.
E. H. T. supply
Powe,r supply
Ieht
e. h. t.
mA
Ri(eht)
MQ
kV
Deflection
1, 5
22,0
2, 0
]"'
168
148
140
mA
580
785
{ VcEM
1190
1120
+IcM
VB'
1average
Output transistor
0,05
25,2
4,0
3,9
Load inductance
(of line deflection)
mH
Ip-p flyback
(incl. 6% overscan)
.6, 5
11,5
1,12
6, 2
t flyback
J.IS
Over scan
Variation
%
kV
6,15
Auxiliary windings :
picture tube heater voltage V 1-2
6,62
voltages at pin 3
v3
-335 p (+40 V d. c . )
pin 4
v4
pin 6
Vfocus
v6
+160 p
pin 7
V7
+335 p
pin 8
Vs
+235
1)
5,45
6,18
r.m.s.
d . c.
+230 V
1 ) Video supply.
E52
August 1975
AT2076110
APPLICATION CIRCUIT
I.
'
I
'
I
'
1Mn
100nF
'
beam
18 1
~-+-C:::::t-+--~~-++t-~+:~--j---~-------------+ current
lim iter
15
from
from
to
8,2nF I
I1500Vll
driver stage
deflection
coils
33il
power supply
E-W
drive
47~F
163 VI
video supply
230V
123,5WI
!\_ +335V
!\_ +160V
I3,4WI
+14V
v-335V
330pF
Fig. 3
+
2,2
124WI
lmF
6,62 V
r.m .s.
L ___
eptember 1976
E-W drive
14,67W)
_J
FTB
35V
10,6WI
7Z7J 1 1S .2
11
38 V
E53
AT2080(10
11
leht
max . 1. 5 mA
E.H.T.
8,4
Ri(eht)
6, 5 A
1, 12 mH
148 V
780 mA
kV
M~2
APPLICATION
This transformer has been designed to provide the required scanning amplitude for
20AX 110 colour picture tubes with a neck diameter of 36,5 mm in transistor equipped television receivers presenting 625 lines at 50 fields per second (CCIR) or 525 lines
at 60 fields per second (USA).
.It is intended for use in conjunction with:
- deflection unit AT1080, AT1083/01 or AT1085;
- linearity control unit AT4042 / 38
- line output transistor BU208A
- e. h. t. rectifier / multiplier device BG1895 641 ~44
according to circuit diagram of Fig . 3.
September 1976
--
11
---
AT2080/10
DESCRIPTION
The magnetic circuit of the transf:Jrmer comprises Ferroxcube U and I -cores clamped
together with brackets. The primary windings, the secondary windings and the e. h. t.
winding are situated on one leg of the core. The windings are impregnatecj. in fla me
r.etardant polyester , meeting the self-extinguishing requirements of IEC 65, para. 14.4
and UL492, para. 280-SEl. The transformer is provided with four pins and twothreaded
holes for mounting. External circuit connection is made to connecting pins, positioned
as indicated in Fig . 1, enabling the unit to be soldered directly into a printed- wiring
board (Fig. 2).
Dimensions in mm
MECHANICAL DATA
Outlines
...
4,Bmax
69max
11=
Jl
==)
c:
.-4~1
Y111
~
M3
Pf
'11
--+--
82,5
max
~--1-- r-J
---1--
LJJ
+
-- --
15nom
"
../._
7,45
95 +S
0
4 ,30
Fig.1
Mass
E56
~19
51 max
1265976
240 g approximately
11
11
December 1975
AT2080/10
MOUNTING
The transformer may be mounted on either a printed-wiring board or, under certain
conditions , on a metal chassis. It may be secured with M3 screws.
For mounting on a printed- wiring board the fit of the connecting and the mounting pins in
a printed - wiring grid with a pitch of 2, 54 mm is illustrated in Fig. 2.
.., ,-
-15,12-
e=2,54
(0,1 in)
_ 3,5 12")
"'
w.
I+
30
-t
"
26
24
22
20
5144
18
16
14
12
10
+
Fig. 2 Hole patte:r:n for mounting
on a printed- wiring board
(solder side).
Grid hole diameter
1,3 0,1 mm
18
1
20t
18
16
14
12
10
Whether the transformer is board or chassis mounted , the core must be ea.rthed.
Temperature
The operating temperature of the core and the coils should not exceed 105 oc , under
worst conditions, i.e. taking into account:
- overvoltage on the windings
- low atmospheric pressure (at high a ltitudes) implying bad cooling by convection
- high ambient temperature (up to 45 OC).
To satisfy this requirement it may be desired to provide ample cool air circulation
around the transformer.
December 1975
11
F'>7
---
AT2080/10
LI NE OUTPUT TRANSFORMER
Distances
The following minimum distances between the transformer and neighbouring conductive
flat surfaces must be mainta ined (it should be noticed that edges of conductive parts
must have a greater distance):
a. From the e. h. t. winding, radially 15 mm
ax ia ll y 10 mm
b. From the e. h. t. lead
15 mm
The transformer, and the leads and component s carrying high voltage pulses should be
kept free from metal particles , solder drops, etc.
-ELECTRICAL DATA
(typical values)
1eht
E. H. T. supply
e. h. t.
kV
- MQ-
Ri(eht)
Power supply
--
Output transistor
24.9
22,0
VB
167
166
v
B
1average
148
140
570
780
VcEM
1200
ll20
4,0
4,0
6,2
+ 1cM
mA
6,5
flyback
ratio
(average)
fJS
11,6
Over scan
Variat ion
%
%
lp-p
Deflection
1, 5
0,05
mA
Focus -voltage
6
1,5
kV
8, 2'
7,5
8,2
- 320
-155
+ 155
+320
-520'
7,6
Auxiliary windings:
picture-tubeheater voltage
peak voltages at pin 3
pin 4
pin 6
pin 7
pin 8
V 1-2
v3
v4
v6
v7
V8
V
V
V
V
V
V
E58
_ II
11
Sept~mber 1976
AT2080/10
AT2080/10 ~-
68nF
I1600VI
270ka
,.._._c~-J.--i--+----'--J~--_.__--__..----_.__-------+ ~~~r'!'nt
limiter
0,91
8.2nF
from driver
stage
~F
to
deflection
I1600VII
coils
----
powe::~;ply -+--.--r'JJ~n,_..._..cv~.,J,113J---...j..J
+148V
no load '
470 nF
1250VIr
47~F
(63VI
, - . , f . _ - - : - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --
1\_ +320V
Fig . 3
E-W dr iv e
'==,------~1~0.6~W_,_I + 38 V
eptember 1976
11
E59
11
AT 4040/ ..
CONVERGENCE SERIE
CONVERGENCE ADJUSTERS
APPLICATIO N
These adjusters are intended fot- use in conjunction with the convergence unit AT4046/ ..
for convergence a djustment.
MECHANICAL DATA
The converge nce adjusters are provide d with pins for mounting on printed- wiring boards
with holes of cl> 1, 3 + 0. 1 mm. They have a knob at the top for adjustment.
Dimensions in mm
Fig.l.
,...._ _
1
20,5 mo
10,16(4)
r---~
as.--- ~ --1~
~~ ~~~ - ~ I
I ~ - -~
.
I
15
2
Fig.2.
' "'
ptember 1976
- 3
11
--
---
---
AT 4040 I..
CONVERGENCE ADJUSTERS
ELECTRICAL DATA
type numbe r
(typical values)
circuit
diagram
Fig. terminals
L- range
or L
(r.1H)
d.c.
resistance
(11)
0.48
0.48
0.18
catalogue
number
AT4040/3S"')
1- 5
2- 5 '
3- 4
0.17-0.07
0. 07- o. 17
0.05
AT4040/44
3"4
15.6-3.0
11.5
AT4040/49
3- 4
1- 2
l. 06- 0 ..'3.3
0. ,),)- l. 06
2.4
2.4
AT4040/53
3" 4
3.72-0.63
3.65
AT4040/57
3- 4
1-2
0 . .'32-0.10
0.10-0.32
0.66
AT4040/ 56 .
4- 5
1-4
2- 3
o. 024-0.006
0. 006- 0. 024
0.030-0.011
0.11
0.11
0.17
AT4040/58
3- 4
1- 2
8.15 -2 .5
2.5-8.15
20.7
AT4040/6 1
3- 4
33 .5- 7. 2
23. 1
AT4040/63
.3- 4
0.44-0 . 11
0.11-0.44
AT4040/89
1- 2
3- 4
4. 5- 12
4. 5- 12
AT4040/ 92')
.3 - 4
1-2
1- 4
0. 07-0.22
0.07-0.22
0.04
0.65
0. 78
0.58
AT4040/ 93
1- 2
3-4
0.21-0.58
0. 21- o. 58
l. os
l. os
l. 35
l.
35
I
25
25
At a frequency of 15 kHz the current through the convergence a djustment coils has to be
2 . Rd <0. 3 W remains in force .
such tha t the formul a I
rms
c-
E62
11
October 1971
AT 4040/ ..
CONVERGENCE ADJUSTERS
Circuit cliagrams
A
4
7Z66110
7Z66111
7Z66116
7Z66112
7Z66106
ctober 19711
11
---
AT 4040/ ..
CORRECTION SERIES
11
CORRECTION COILS
RZ 30369 13
RZ 30369-2
V 27807
----
V 25546
APPLICATION
The correction coils are mainly intended for use with the transductors AT4041/ .. and the
deflection units AT1027 I . . , AT1029/ . , AT1060/ .. and AT1062 .. for raster correc ti on.
The AT4040/50 is for deflection units with parallel- connectedframe coils, theAT4040/ 55
for series- connected frame coils.
'
The AT4040/31 is also intended for use as the balancing coil between the combine d EHT
and s emi- scan transformer AT2100/ 04 and the semi- scan transforme r AT 210 1/ 02.
The AT4040/38 has also an a uxiliary win ding for convergence.
October 1971
11
E65
AT 4040/ .. .
CORRECTION COILS
11
11
MECHANICAL DATA
Th e coils a re provide d with pins for mounting o n printed - wiring boards witb holes of
cpl , 3 + 0 , 1 mm. They can be a djusted at the top by means of a trimming key.
Dim ensions in mm
1 '-e:;fi""-J"-":j~t:T:..
5.08
. F ig.l
20.2 12el
max 5.08
j 12',
Fig.2
Fig.3
Fig. 4
E66
11
11
September 1974
AT 4040/ ..
CORRECTION COILS
circuit
diagram
L- range
or L
(mH)
F ig. terminals
d.c
resistance
(Q )
catalogue
number
AT4040/31
bridge coil
3- 4
1.1
0 . 82
AT4040/32
phase adjuster
3- 4
1. 6 -4
1. 18
AT 4040/34
2nd harm/anti- S
3-4
0.0.3-0 . 1
0. 18
AT4040/36
balancing coil
3- 4
0. 08- 0 . 56
0.22
AT4040/38
2nd harm
1- 2
3-4
1. 17
6.5
0 . 33
o. 033-0.13
AT4040/ 50
amplitude a djuster
3- 4
0 . 76-3 . 71
1.1
AT4040/55
amplitude a djuster
,)
.) - 4
2.46-11.5
4.1
AT4040/85
balancing coil
1-2
3-4
0 .03-0 .1
0.03-0.1
0 . 23
. 0.23
AT4040/87
phase a djuster
3- 4
1. 8520%
'
Circuit diaBEa ms
A
20
so
4
10
20
7Z66113
7Z66115
so
7Z66109
0 1
A[;:
os
7Z66 114
:)ctober 1971
---
I.I
E67
AT 4041/40
3122137 11660
11
TRANSDUCTOR
The transductor has been developed for 'use in combination with the deflection unit
AT 1062/01 *), and the adjusters AT4040/87 and AT4040/38 for passive north-south
raster correction in 110 colour television tubes, A coil AT4040/31 is used as a series
choke for a passive N -S pincushion correction.
For adjusting the horizontal lines on the picture tube screen (Fig .1 ) the transductor fs
provided with a rod-magnet which can be turned by a screw driver (minimum torque
0, 4 Ncm, maximum torque 2 Ncm) ..
+t
'
----+-t
I
Fig.l
------+
-.
1Z6693B
11
E69
--
AT 4041/40
TRANSDUCTOR
11
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions (mm) and connections
adjustment
~~~;EJ== :1
F ig . 2 nss 4 o -
Weight
20max_ls,1 . 4,2
approximately 20 g
Mounting
The tran sductor is .provided with 8 pins for mounting on a prin ted -wiring board (F ig . 3).
e=2 ,54
--, 1--+--+-+-+-+-+-H--t-+-t-t-t-
-1
l
7e
I I
I I
7Z66939
.- 2e - - s e - 2e -The ambient temperature should not exceed 65 C. By mounting the polycarbonate capac itor and the NTC thermistor (as given in the circuit diagram) close to the tran s du ctor, a
phase -drift can be prevented.
E70
11
11
September 1974
AT 4041/40
TRANSDUCTOR
ELECTRICAL DATA
Transductor measured without rod magnet . With rod magnet VR1 and VR2 can be
changed with minimum + 0, 5 V.
oscillogram
values
Fig.
M2
M4
Im ax
16
20
VRl
16
20
8, 8 V
VR2
16
20
16
20
VR1 -VR2
+
- 9%
8, 8 V + 9%
-
to
max. 0, 6 V
-Measuring circuit
r;:--7l
6
18
si
I
I
I AT4041/40
I
I
I
Ml
M2
Fig . 4 M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
= l.f.generator 3kHz
= tube voltmeter
= oscilloscope
= tube voltmeter
= 1. f. generator 50 Hz
L1
L2
01
R1
R2
I
I
--
= 0, 7 mH
=min . 20 mH
= BA148
= 10 rl, 5 W
= 47 rl, 40 W
o-r..~~--------------~vo~,~.~Ol~,Fig . 5
Test voltage
September 197 4
2000 V d . c.
E7 1
IIITIIl
,,,- ):lo
-t
()
t:r:l
""'
AT4040/87
AT1062/01
r------1
3 ~
...
c:
::j
t:J
;;
41
...........
~
. (l
-350V
$:
15fi
>Ij
0
:::0
en
en
<
t:r:l
:::0
....,
en
>-l
:::0
;:..
TnF
t:r:l
:::0
()
AT4040/31
0
:::0
:::0
t:r:l
()
1\.
'4 - - - 5
L. - - - - - - J
-:;.-;.,;::--'--- _ ~~~9..!_ on
- -CO
-----;;:
/
"
"
'
~
7Z66941
,-r
210 Vp-p
......
'-0
""'
Fig.8
Cl
::0
::l
0
z
w
......
N
N
C1l
>;
c:
()
()
0
C"
;:..
65t:J
"
......
--.)
'\
,,
- - - -- - - - - - - - - -
. ......
......
L_
7Z66942
e--
o0
AT 4042/08
=
==
APPLICATION
This unit has been designed for use in colour TV sets equipped with a 110 deflection an~
gle co~our picture tube, to adjust the linearity of line deflection. It can be used in combination with the unit AT 1062/01 if parallel connected line coils are used.
CONSTRUCTION
The unit consist of a coil, mounted on a ferroxcube rod, two ferroxdure magnets and one
plastoferrite magnet. One magnet has the shape of a ring and is placed around the ferroxcube rod above the coils. One has the shape of a half ring and is placed around the
ferroxcube rod under the coils. The third magnet is cylindrical; it is positioned to and
clamped against the ferroxcube rod opposite the half ring magnet. It is provided with a_
square hole to facilitate turning to adjust the biasing field and, therefore, th~ linearity
of the line deflect ion .
February 1973
11
AT 4042/08
MECHANICAL DATA
Se
/ 11'
'
Se
e = 2 , 54
44-232~,.;----h
_ 10.1 . ..
'
R3min
ad Justable
magnet
_UT\,
M3
_,V
I
----r----- .a
I
'
16
mln
1.5
(2x)
I
1
- -'
, . . - . - - - : U66!19
.C OSLOQ
1 -
---
16m i n -~ 1
5.S
5,0
Fig. 1
ELECTRICAL DATA
-0
./.]
adjustable
magnet
11
1ZIS JU
circuit diagram
MOUNTING
The unit can be mounted either on pr inted-wiring boards by m eans of its two conn ection
pin s a nd two mounting pins, or on metal chassis by bending the two mounting pins and/or
by m ea ns of a screw through an aperature in the casing (see Fig . 3). To prevent distortion
of the magn e tic fi eld, no iron part should approach the magnetic partd n earer than 3 mm .
The coils should be s hunted wi th carbon resistors to damp r inging phenomena; the value
of resistor de pends on applied deflec tion tran sformer .
R7A
11
Seotember 1974
AT4042/17
11
APPLICATION
This unit has been designed for us e in col our TV sets equipped with a ll0 deflection angl e col our picture tube, to adjus t the linearity of line deflection. It can be use d in coml:lination with the unit AT1080 if parallel connected line c oil s a re us e d.
DESCRIPTION
The unit consist of a coil, mounted on a fe rroxcu be rod , two ferroxdure magnets and one
plastoferrite m agnet . One magnet has the shape of a ring and is placed around the
fer r oxcube rod above the coils. One has the s hape of a half ring and is placed around the
ferroxcube rod under the coils . The third magnet is cylindrical ; it is positioned to and
cla mped against the ferroxcube rod oppos ite the half ring magnet. It i s provided with a
squar e hole to facilitate turning to adjust;_ the biasing field and , the r efore, the linearity
of the line deflection.
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimens ions (mm)
18.7
o 2 54(01in)
- 3.4
-""-
15.4
l)\
'
--
F ig. !
October 1974
11
E75
AT4042/17
c:
ELECTRICAL DATA
The correction voltage is pre-adjusted to 30 V at a saw tooth
current of 6, 4 A peak-to-peak, frequency 15625 Hz, fly-back
ratio 18 % (without S-correction), flowing through winding 1-2.
The voltage between pins 2 and 3 (pins 1 and 4 interconnected)
is then 37 V.
c:
7Z69289
MOUNTING
The unit can be mounted either on. printed-wiring boards by' means of its four connection
pins and two mounting pins, or on metal chassis by bending the two mounting pins and/or
by means of a screw through an aperture ln the casing(see Fig. 3). To prevent distortion
of the magnetic field ,. no iron part should approach the magnetic parts nearer than 3 mm.
The coils should be shunted with a carbon resistor to damp ringing phenomena; the value
of resistor depends on applied deflection tran~former (typical value 820 Q with transfor mer AT2080/l0).
--
E76
11
11
October 1974
::!122 13 8 765 70
AT4042/38
11
APPLICATION
This unit hns been des igned for us e in colour TV sets e quipp ed with a 110 deflect ion a n g le colour pictu re tube , to adjust the lin ear it y of line deflection. It ca n be used in combination with the deflection un its AT JOHO. AT JO S:l /0 1 and AT lOSS.
DESCRIPTIO N
T he un it cons is t s of a coil , mou nted on a Ferroxc ube rod, and thr ee f'erroxdure magnets.
Two rin g-shaped magnets are pl aced around the f'erroxcube rod. one nt th e top and one
at the bottom. The third m agnet is positioned aga in st th e Ferroxcube rod opposite the:
bottom mngnet a nd clamped. It is provided w ith a s q ua r e bol e to facilitate ad jus tm ent of
the biasing fi e ld a nd . therefore. the l inea rit y of the lin e deflection.
MECH AN ICA L DAT A -
27 max .___
.Dimensions (mm)
Fig.l
-,,-
24,2
max
18,2
max
-+--cH-+r--++t-t-+__. 11
'
7Z76 15 4
52,2
max
-t - r-'-TH'w=~
12 max
t
-1-
I (4x)
October 1976
11
E 77
AT4042/38
ELECTRICAL DATA
c:
[3
7Z69289
MOUNTING
The unit can be mo unred on printed-wiring boards by means of it s four co nn ect ion pins
(see I' ig. 2) . T o prevent distortion of the mi.lgnetic field. no iron part s ho uld approach
th e magnetic parts nea r er tha n .1 mm. The coil s s houl d be s hunted with a carbon resistor
to d<lmp r in ging phenomena; the va l ue of resistoJ: depends o n app li ed deflect ion transform er (typical value 560 ~ >.w i th transformer AT2076 / 10).
c:
d on t h e printe d - wiring b ?a r d .
E78
11
October 1976
AT4043/15
I
FILTERING COIL
APPLICATION
The coil AT4043/ 15 has been des igned for all-trans i stor colour tel evision sets, t o be
used in the suppl y unit.
MECHANICAL DATA
, -.---32max - - -
-1
r 31 max
:rJ
4,50,4(4x)
+3:!:0,2
7Z72179
F ig . !
September 1974
E79
11
AT4043/15
FILTERING COIL
11
...-..__
I
Mounting
15+01
1Z72180
f-- 2
02min -..._
..+
Fig .2
Hole pa ttern for mounting
on a printed-wiring board,
hole dia met e r 1, 3 + 0 , 1 mm.
f-- 1
e=2 ,54mm
ELECTRICAL DATA
Inductance
2 , 1 mH 15%
Resistanc<;) at 25 C
0 , 27 Q
95 C
0
7Z65969.1
--=
E80
11
11
September 1974
AT4043/35
APPLICATION
The AT4043/35 filter choke has been designed for use in class -0 field time bases .
It can be used in conjunction :_..,ith the TDA260() in both 900 and 1100 colour television
receivers.
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions in mm
The magnetic circuit of the choke .comprises two Ferroxcube U-c ores.
The unit is provided with pins for mounting on a printed-wiring board.
Outlines
-19max-
7169990
Mounting
1,50,1
-,~ .
?Z69991
2min ....
1 ~-+-
r--3
I"
-~
September 1976
-4
2~-
11
AT4043/35
ELECTRICAL DATA
J.lH
Inductance
(1- 2)
22 0
R es istance
(1 - 2)
0; 15 Q
3 ,6 A
100
12%
c
2
7Z69992
en
~
w
.....
N
APPLICATION CIRCUIT
or
g.
.....
w
Cl>
'"1
+ 37 V
.....
+sync.
JlJ
00
.,.
-..]
10 V
0
.....
0
"'a-..]
10!1 12W)
4,7 k!1
12x)
8AV19
t;:
en
en
freq . ......
470
' '
TDA2600
'
680
"'1
AT4043/ 35
12x)
1000 ~F
125 VI
I8
"I
1,5
k!1
D~ I I !
til
::<l
0
8,2
3,3
nF
::r:
0
:><:
dell.
coils
til
!1
8AV19
1.,.1
3,9 k!1
c::J
til
00
w
11~<1
. .
7Z74428
11
IUIIII
,J,
11
)>
-t
~
11
11
w
.........
w
Ut
AT4043/38
11
BRIDGE COIL
APPLICATION
This correction coil has been developed to be used as a bridge transformer in the line
output transformer circuitry of the AT2080/10 in conjunction with the deflection unit
AT1080 (see also data sheet of the AT2080/10).
MECHANICAL OAT A
The magnetic circuit of the coil comprises two Ferroxcube U-cores. The unit is provided
with pins for mounting on a printed-wiring board.
Dimensions (mm)
(
32max---,
-)
--
' r 30max
ITJ
4,50,4 (4x)
-t
7Z65606.1
)eptember 1976
11
E85
---
AT4043/38
BRIDGE COIL
11
-- -1,50,1
'
t- 3
02min
7Z 65178.1
r--.:,&.
l't
t- 4
t-
e=2 ,54mm
Inductance
(primary, 1- 2)
4251JH 10 %
Resistance
< 0,4 Q
400 V
6, 7 A
1, 8 A
100 C
. 7Z65179
11
Octobe r 1974
AT 4043/86
11
BRIDGE COIL
A55126-2
---APPLICATION
The bridge coil AT4043/86 is intended for use in the single-tran s istor ( BU108 ) line -out put circuit for the 110 deflection angle colour television tube A66-140X.
MECHANICAL DATA
The magnetic c ircuit of the bridge coil comprises two ferroxcube U - co r es .
The coil i ~;> provided with pins for mounting on a printe d -wiring board.
November 1971
11
F.R7
AT 4043/86
BRIDGE COIL
Dimensions in mm
l-+-------32max------- .
-i
30max
Il
4,50,4(4x)
7265606.1
-- ....
1,50,1
02min,
---
7265178.1
!',U.
['f
21H-
f-- 4
e=2 ,54mm
ELECTRICAL DATA
~H
Indu ctan ce _
(primary, 3 -4)
Resistan ce
285
350
6 A
I, 75
lOO C
E 88
-11
10 %
S"l
< 0,2
V
A
September I976
AT 4043/87
APPLICATION
The 'tran :;forme r AT4043/87 has been des igne d for all-tra ns is tor bla c k/w hite and
colour te lev i s ion se t s . ln black and white te l ev i s ion se t s it can be use d in the s ingletra ns i s tor (l3U20 5) line - ou tput c ir cuit in co nj unction with the line-out pu t tran s forme r
AT2048/ l 2: in col ou r te lev i s ion set ~ it ca n be use d in the s ingle- tran s is tor (BU20 8)
line - ou t put ci r cu it in conj unc tion with the lin e-o utput tran sforme r AT2063/ ...
Dimens ions in mm
32 ma x ----~
11
E89
AT4043/87
Mounting
-- -1.50,1
7165178.1
f- 3-.t-t-t-t--t-t-t---t -Ge--+----1---':'-+
12!2 min ,H--t-+t--+-H--+--+-+---i-+-1
4.+-+--H+++-1 2
e=2,54mm
ELECTRICAL DATA
Indu ctance (prima r y, 1- 4)
Le akage inductance
(secondary)~' )
76mHl2%
::: 2 , 0fJH
Transformation ratio
29: 1
lOO C
7Z66952
E90
11
11
September 1974
AT 4043/88
11
APPLICATION
The coil AT 4043/88 is intended for use in the s ingle - tran s istor ( BU 208 ) line - output
circuit ; for cir cuit diagram see data on line -output trans former AT 2063/ ..
MECHANICAL DATA
The magnetic circuit of the line centring choke comprises two ferroxcube U - cores .
The coil is provided wi th pins for mounting on a printed -wiring b oard .
Dimensions (mm)
rRS
+----------~gx--------~
max
,- 13-,
max
-1 36,15
---
ma x
27,5
max
j
_ll--;~1
30,5
max
7Z65603
E9 1
AT 4043/88
Mounting
7Z6S604
7
6
3
4
e=2 ,54mm
Jel._
ELECTRICAL DATA
52,5 mH
6,1 Sl
10%
10%
140 mA
Transformatton ratiO
20: 1
100 C
7Z65605
ii9?_ _ _ _
ll ________.._.___..:/~-11
September 1974
AT4044/20
11
11
APPLICATION
This coil has been designed for the c ircuitry around the line output tran sformer
AT 2080/10 in conjunction with the deflection unit AT 1080 (see also the data on
the tra nsformer).
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions (mm)
-
21 .2max-
-B
-~ -
cs==: '+,
1Z690J9
--
Fig. 1.
The coil i s . provided with pins for mounting on a printed-wiring board. It can be adjusted
at the top by means of a trimming key.
-e= 2,54
\
J
Bmin
t
7269040
E9:3_ _ _ ___.]
11
AT4044/20
11
ELECTRICAL DATA
Inductance between 3 and 4
Resistance between 3 and 4
*)
1 to 5, 3 mH
211
95
sO
10
7Z66115
E94
11
Febru ar y 1975
AT4044/26
APPLICATION
This coil has been designed for the circuitry of the four-pol e unit incorporated in the
deflection unit AT1080, for equalization of line and fie l d astigmatism (see also data on
AT1080)
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions (mm)
-20,1max-
- - - - - 43 max - - - --
22,5
max
',
j,
Fig. t
The coil is provided with pins for mounting on a printed-wiring board. It can be adjusted
at the top by means of a trimming key .
e= 2,54
7Z69010
September 1974
C'I)C:
--
AT4044/26
11
ELECTRICAL DATA
Indu ctance between 4 and 1
between 2 and 3
~' )
110 to 30 11H,
30 to 110 11H
Resistance between 4 a nd 1,
ar;d 2 and 3
0 , 23 Q
95
4
7Z690t.2
E96
11
11
September 197 4
AT4044/27
11
APPLICATION
T hi s corre cti on coil has been designed for the c ircu itry of the four- pole unit in corpo rated in the deflection unit AT 1080, for eq ualization of line astigmatism (see
a l s o data on AT1080).
MECHANICAL DATA
1--- - - - 43max - - - --
-20,1max -
22,5
mox
1
7265970
Fig . 1
The coil is provided with pins for mounting on a printed-wiring board . It can be a djuste d
at the top by m ea ns of a trimming key .
e= 2,54
7Z 69070
September 1974
E97
--
AT4044/27
ELECTRICAL DATA
Inductance , measured with 5000 pF in parallel
between 3 and 5
':')
between 4 and 5
'')
33 to 150 jJH
150 to 33 jJH
Resistance at 25 oc
between 1 and 2
between 3 and 4
0 , 23 Q
95 C
0, 18
4
7Z69271
-:--
E98
September 1974
AT4046/27
AT4046/28
CONVERGENCE UNITS
APPLICATION
These units are intended to be used with a 90 or llO 0 shadow mask colour picture tube
in conjunction with the deflection unit AT1027/ ..
or AT1060/ ..
or AT1062/ ..
cir A Tl063/ ..
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions (mm)
21 - , - - max
18,5--..
F'!lOX
--
76 ;;,.; ;
max
Fig.!
7Z65796
Mounting
The housing of the deflection unit AT1027 / .. is so constructed that the convergence units
can easily slide in and then, after they have been properly pushed back, lock.
The units have to be put into the housing with the printed wiring up. To t a ke out the units
the l ocks must be released; this can be done by pushing a screwdriver or the like between
each unit and the housing.
February 1973
~--11 _
E99
--
1--
!:::
AT4046/27
CO:t\TVERGENCE UNITS
AT4046/28
ELECTRICAL DATA
The units have 4 coils , two for horizontal and two for vertical deflection. They are
mounted on a printed - wiring board. The coils can be connected by soldering to the
printed-wiring pads. The units are provided with a permanent magnet for static con vergence with which a shift of > 20 mm can be obtained on 90 picture tubes, and
> 12 mm on 110 picture tubes .
HH
1
Fig. 2
AT4046/27
AT4046/28
0,4 mH
2Q
3 and 7
2 and 6
4,9 mH
22 .6 Q
3 and 7
2 and 6
0,1 mH
0,5Q
2 and 3
2 and 7.
3 and 6
1, 2 mH
5,5 Q
2 and 3
2 and 7 ,
3 and 6
1, 44 H
194 Q
1 and 5
4 and 8
1 ,44 H
194 Q
1 and 5
4 and 8
0. 36 H
48,5 Q
1 and 4
1 and 8,
4 and 5
0 . 36 H
48.5 Q
1 and 4
1 and 8,
4 and 5
Inductance
Resistance
Connecting tags
Tags to be interconnected
- ' - - -R onn
' September
19 ~
AT4046/32
11
CONVERGENCE UNIT
APPLICATION
These units are intended to be used with a 90 or 110 shadow mask colour p icture tube
in conjunction with the deflection unit AT 1027/ ..
or ATi060/ ..
or ATI062/ ..
or ATl06.3/ ..
MECH.ANICAL DATA
Dimensions
(mm~
t T~;,- /t"21 ,4
0,1
,/
"
i
.
---r
/.
-18,5~,
max
+
76
max
Fig. !
--
~.;;
7Z6S797
Mounting
The housing of the deflection unit AT 1027/ . . is so constructed that the convergence units
can easily slide in and then, after they have been properly pushed back, l ock.
The units ha ve to be put into the housing with the printed wiring up. To t ake out the units
the locks must be released; this can be done by pushing a screwdriver or the like between
each unit and the housing.
February 1973
E 101- - - - - - -
!::::
!::::
AT4046/32
CONVERGENCE UNIT
11
ELECTRICAL DATA
The unit s have 4 coils , two for horizontal and two for verti cal deflection. They are
mounted on a printed-wiring board . The coil s can be connected by soldering to the
printed-wiring pads . The unit i s provided with a plastic bush B (see F ig. 1) to accomodate the permanent magnet ~, )for rough static ad justment. Fine adjustmen t can be made
with a d . c . current .
HH
1
F ig . 2
4 , 9 mH
22,6 Q
3 and 7
2 and 6
1,2 mH
5, 5 Q
2 and 3
2 and 7 ,
3 and 6
1, 44 H
194 Q
1 and 5
4 an d 8
0, 36 H
48 . 5 Q
1 and 4
1 and 8 ,
4 and 5
~' ) Separ atel y availabl e under catalogue nu.mber 4312 020 70201.
DLSO
11
DELAY LINE
st~ndard
Nominal frequency
4, 433619 MHz
63,943 f.!S
Dimensions
71 x 7, 5 x 37 , 5 mm
Self-extinguishing properties
APPLICATION
The DLSO is intended for use in decoder circuits of colour television receivers.
DESCRIPTION
A very thin slab of zero TC g lass provided with two transducers is mounted shock proof
in a housing, that satisfies the flame test described in IEC 50 C (secretariat) 11.
Stx pins enable the unit to be soldered dtrectly into a prmted-'ijirmg board.
~ptember
1976
E 103
_.J
-;:::
--
DLSO
DELAY LINE
'
11
MECHANICAL DATA
Dimensions (mm)
1.1
71 max - - .--~
*~- Ill
llfI~2
6,6
l max ._
-,45 '
t-
37,5max
26
u ~
1 -r.~5~2 u
I
_J_1
4,6
F ig .1
~-
I ._..
r---
r--
J~L
max
+I
7Z65314.1
Weight
16 g
Mounting:
The unit can be soldered directly into a printed -wiring board .
_ _ _ ___;E
::.,l04
0 2 4 6
Fig . 2.
19 21
1973
DLSO
DELAY LI NE
11
ELECfRICAL DATA
4, 433619 MHz
Bandwidth at - 3 dB
from~
Insertion lo ss
83dB
15 V
Unwanted reflections,
3T
other reflections
180
- 40 to +70 oc
V
2
, , L,! ~R2
Vl~~[
Fig.3
::::::::1
::::::::1
Cl
total capacitance
390Q
120 pF
Ll
inductive reactance
128 Q
L2
231 Q
- 19 to +36%
20 pF
)eptember 1976
El05
DL51 DL52
DL53 DLSS
11
DELAY LINES
--
March 1973
El07
ITITITI
11
ELECTRICAL DATA ,, measured according to the circuit diagram below at 25 C and at fnom (unless otherwise stated)
til
.....
00
DL51
DL52
DL53
DL55
Catalogue number
Application
European
PAL/SECAM
Brazilian
PAL
NTSC
MHz
4,433619
3,582063
3, 575611
3, 579545
jlS
Bandwidth at -3 dB
MHz
53, 43 to <= 5, 23
52, 7 to <= 4, 4
52, 7 to <= 4, 4
52, 7 to 2: 4, 4
Insertion 1os s .
dB
8 3
8 3
8 3
83
ns
max. 5
typ. 3
max. 5
typ. 3
max. 5
typ . . 3
max. 5
typ . .3
15
15
15
15
3T
dB
5 -22
5-35
180
oc
-40 to +70
tll
~ro
g.
ro
'1
.....
"'a-.J
cc
r- rVI VI
VI.._,
t:l
til
t"'
:>
><!
t"'
z
til
tll
Unwanted reflections,
other reflections
VIVI
w-
Type number
cc
r- r-
::~
"')
-22
- 30
5-22
5-30
5-22
5 -30
180
-40 to +70
-40 to +70
-40 to +70
5
5
g;::
11
Measuring circui ~
t-j
(')
::r
1-'
\()
"""
t'',! ~""
"~
t:J
I:Il
t""'
>
><:
t""'
DL51
DL 52
DL53
I:Il
DL55
en
390
560
560
560
Cl
pF
120
22
22
22
L1
128
337
337
337
L2
inductiv r eactance
231
405
405
405
- 19to+36
- 20 to +33
- 20 to +33
- 20 to +33
20
20
20
20
til
b
'Cl
CO
. pF
.-
U1 U'l
w-
CO
~.-
U'IU'I
U'l....,;)
IUIIII
DL60
11
DELAY liNE
4,4336 19 MH z
63,943 flS
Dimensions
APPLICATION
The. DL60 is inte nded for use in decoder circuits of co lou r te levis ion receivers.
DESCRIPTION
A very thin s lab of zero TC glass provided w ith two tra nsducers is shoc k-p ropf mounted
in a housing that satisfies the flame tes t descr ibed in IEC SO C (s ecreta ria t) ll.
Four pins e nable the unit to be s oldered directly onto a printed-wiring board.
September 1976
11~
DL60
DELAY LINE
11
Dimensions in mm
MECHANICAL DATA
Outlines
, - - - - 3 7 max
ll
-1
28,5max
_j
'?
-1
t _
_,,__
5,5 j5,0
O8 +0,05
0
7,5max
7Z11207.1
E
0
Fig. 1
Mass
7g
Mounting
The unit can be soldered directly onto a printed-wiring board.
Se
t t t tit
Ill
72:11206.1
Fig.2.
Recommended hole pattern for mounting on a printed-wiring board: e = 2, 54 mm. '
The to lera n ce on the distances of the different holes to the 0-line is 0, 1 mm.
Hole diameter is 1, 0 + 0, 1 mm.
September 1976
DL60
DELAY LINE
11
ELECTRICAL DATA
Measured with the circuit of Fig. 3 at 25 oc and f0 (unless otherwise specified)
Nominal frequency (f0 )
4, 4.3.3619 MHz
Bandwidth at -3 dB
from
Insertion loss
9 3 dB
10 V
Spurious signals
.) 'T s ignals
other signals
:5
- 40 to +70 oc
:5
:5
180
R1
V1
--
DL60
Fig. 3.
Terminations
Rl = R2 = 560 Q
Cl=20pF
C2 = 30 pF
Ll = 10,5 jJH
L2= 9,7f!H
September 1976
Ell3
DL60
DELAY LI NE
Application circuit
CHROMA
DEMODULATOR
ss on
~------o----1--,
C1*
DL60
RL
Qz;
I
I
7Z73204
Fig.4
Cl, C2
Ll,
Xl
X2
w0 Ll
1-w 0 2 LlC1
W0
L2
l- w0 2 L2C2
= 350 Q
= .150 Q
f 0 = 4, 4336 19 MHz
Rl14
September 1976
NON -PREFER
TYPES
11
RE~
Type number
Catalogue number
Picture tube
AT1025/05
3122 107 30020
90
90
AT1066/0l
3 122 107 13750
and 110 o
90
Inductance
series connected
parallel connected
3,2
0,63
Resistance
series connected
parallel connected
36
9
Adjustment range
static (with m agnet)
dynamic
AT1025/08
3122 137 11690
mH
mH
Q
3,2
6,5 mm
3,5 mm
at 350 mA per
coil
0,3
2,.81
mH
6,4
6 ,5 mm
3,5 mm
a t 550 mA per
coil
mH
6,5 mm
3,5 mm
at 300 mA per
c oil
March 1973
----
11
H' 1 1"
NON-PREFERRED
TYPES
DEFLECTION UNITS
.--
--
dimensions (mm)
type
, March 1973
amax
bmax
Cmin
AT1027/07
145, 7
172, 3
3 8,2
AT1027/ 09
145 , 7
172, 3
38 , 2
AT1029/ 07
145, 7
172,3
38, 2
AT1029/ 09
145, 7
172,3
38,2
AT1060/ 01
129, 4
203,9
38,2
1<'11'7
1111 fll
I:I:I
......
......
AT1027/07
3122 137 10990
rt>
0'
rt>
'i
......
""'""'
AT1029/09
3122 108 87900
AT1060/0 1
3122 137 10670
2, 95
114
2,95
28
2,95
114
2, 95
28
4,4
25 , 4
Resistance
line deflection coils
field deflect i-on co il s
Q
Q
2, 9
56
2, 9
14
2,9
56
2, 9
14
3,4
15
NTC thermistor
Parallel resistor
Q
Q
50
33
6
12
50
33
6
12
E-H-To
kV
25
25
25
25
25
A p-p
A p-p
2, 6
0 , 415
2, 6
0 , 83
2,6
0 , 415
2, 6
o, 83
3, 3
1,2
22 in , 90
26 in , 90
22 in , 90
26 in , 90
19 in, 90
22 in, 90
19 in , 90
22 in, 90
22 in, 110
26 in , 110
AT2053/02
AT2053/02
AT2053/02
AT2053/02
AT2100/04 and
AT2101 / 02
adjustable linearity
control unit
AT4042/12
AT4042/12
AT4042/12
AT4042/12
AT4042/12
AT4045/o
AT4046/o
AT4045/ o
AT4046/o o
AT4045/o o
AT4046/ o o
AT4045/o
AT4046/o o
AT4045/ oo
AT4046/ o o
convergence units
rt> '
AT1029/07
3122 108 87890
mH
mH
o'
To be used with:
picture tube
C/)
AT1027/09
3122 107 31520
Inductance
line deflection co ils
fie ld deflect ion coils
Sensitivity
in horizontal direction
in vertical direction
"g
'0 0
Z
::;l 0
"'ttm
m"TT
"'m
;g
;g
-m
0
I:I:I
"rl
r-'
I:I:I
...,
()
0
z
c::
z
~
DEFLECTION UNITS
11
NON-PREFERRED
TYPES
Terminal location
AT1027/07
AT1027/09
AT1029/07
AT1029/09
7'----__j
Rear view
Diagram
AT1060/0l
1'
2'
3'
4'
5'
ttril1l
Wo-W
5
_,
VE 71801t. P
Rear view
Diagram
H = line coils
V = field coils
eptember 1974
1". 110
'
NON-PREFERRED
TYPES
TRANS.DUCTORS
I
I
!
i
l
type
AT 404 1/08
AT404 l /14
AT404 1/15
AT404 1/37
11
11
Jl
11
b -
----
I~
m ax . dim en s ion s (mm)
32,5
32 , 5
32 , 5
32,5
. 21 , 5
2 1. 5
21,5
2 1 ,5
30 , 2
28
28
30 , 2
catalogue
number
3122
3122
3 122
3122
107
137
137
137
13420
10530
10540
122 10
T heAT404l/08andthe AT 404 1/37 are intende d for use in conjunction with deflection unit
AT1027/ .. or AT1029/ .. , line output transformer AT2053/ . . , pin-cush i on actjustor
AT4040/ . . and a frame output transformer to correct pin-cushion distortion.
T he transductor AT404l/l4 is intended for use in conjunction with the deflection unit
AT1060/- . and in combination with the transductor AT404l/l5, for active E . -W . correcti on .
.__-II ______..;:;.E=
_II _____________
121
NON-PREFERRED
TYPES
TRANSDUCTORS
11
Terminal location
Bottom views
AT4041/08
AT4041/37
'{ T'J
-u-
lA
,!,
"
"1111
6
.
I
7
()
E.
Diagrams
""'
11
11
li
'3i
23::iE~ .
3
11
11
11
LJ
n
11
'
AT4041/14
-6
10
1--, - /o
I
.5
8
0
10
0
- - - - 1-0
:jC:
H
'7!1[:
10~'[
I
H
VS71801 G
AT4041 /1 5
2
0
/6
,0
1--- -+--.
1--
I~
I
El22
10
:J:[5
9]1
V 6
9
100
vs 718017
March 1973
NON-PREFERREC
TRANSDUCTORS
TYPES
11
Circuit diagrams for AT4041/08 and AT4041/37
Deflection units with parallel connected frame coils
\lp-p
p-p voltage on
BA
CD
AT4041/08
;'\T4041/ 37
350 V
1400 V
55 V
55 V
r-----,
~8
v,_,
,'-
--
L _______
_j
p-p voltage on
BA
CD
AT4041/08
AT4041/37
350 V
1400 V
llOV
llOV
Vp-p
- -- - - -
March 1973
- - - - -- -'
E12 3
ON-PREFERRED
TRANSDUCTORS
TYP~S
11
680rl
r-----,
I
2
4
8
po
L_
680rl
AT 4042/12
to spark gap
AT 4041/14
frame coils
El24
March 1973
NON-PREFERRE I
TYPES
For further information see section "Components for black and white television".
AT4042/ 12 , c atalogue numbe r 3122138 21281
This unit has been designed for use in colour TV sets equipped with a 110 deflection a ngl e colour picture tube , to a dju st the linearity of line defl ection. It c an be
used in combinat ion with the deflection units AT 1060/ .. or AT 1062/ . . .
Dimension s (mm)
/ ~~-,
LJ
j~
1
mo> - -
-~
IS.t..
1'
1 ' - me>
'
'\
\+-+:~~
'- h :-,_
I
18.7
/' . . .
~~ ~. ,
+-+--1-+--J-+--1-t--J-t-+O
-2B.Smax-~
c---r ll 3.2mo-l
mo>
52.2
~t.
r--:::
-t-+-t-t-+H-t-t-1-t- S
adj us table
~ p.- magnet
Sep<emb'" 1974
- ~ ----~---~-~~----~~ ~--
E125
-:-:::
---
ON-PREFERRED
TYPES
Electrical data
When a saw -tooth current of a peak-to peak value of 3 . 3 A,
frequency 15625 I-lz, fly -back ratio Hl % ( without S- correction) flows through the linearity control unit ( coils connected in series, one connection point to earth ) , the correction voltage is 27 V.
--
El26
March 1973
NON-PREFERRE~
TYPES
CONVERGENCE UNITS
AT4050/ll
Type number
AT404S/08
AT404S/07
AT4046/07
AT4046/08
Catalogue number 3 12210883 130 312210883140 312210883150 312210883 160 3122107 13220
Picture tube
ll0
Line c oils ,
series connected
inductance
res istance
0,4 mH
2,5 Q
4 , 8 mH
22 , 6 Q
0,43 mH
2,5 Q
5,2 mH
22 , 6 Q
0 , 155 mH
l Q
parallel connected
inductance
0 , 1 mH
0,6 Q
res istance
1, 2 mH
5, 7 Q
0 , ll mH
0,6 Q
1, 3 mH
5, 7 Q
Field coils ,
series connected
inductance
resistance
1, 40 H
155 Q
1, 40 H
15 5 Q
1, 48 H
194 Q
1 , 52 H
194 Q
parallel connected
inductance
0 , 35 H
39 Q
resistance
0,3S 'H
39 Q
0, -37 H
49 Q
0, 38 H
49 Q
Static coils .
series c onn ected
inductance
res istanc e
Static adjustment
0 , 66 H
125 Q
--
-60 mH
34 Q
d. c. through
frame c oils
d. c . through
fr ame coils
with
m agnet
with
m agnet
d. c. through
static coils
September 1974
'
11
R 1? 7
Contents
page
F. M. tune r s
AP2157/0l
AP2158
FDl
FDlA
A3
All
Al9
Al9
LOUDSPEAKERS
Survey
Introducti on
Loudspeaker types
AD0140/T.
AD0162/T.
AD0199/Z25
AD02l0/Sq .
AD2070/Z .
AD207l/T.
AD227l/T.
AD2090/T.
AD2290/T .
AD2099/Z25
AD3070/Y .
AD3370/Y.
AD3590/X .
AQ3880/X.
AD3890/X .
AD4070/Y.
AD4470/Y.
AD4080/X.
AD4480/X.
AD4085/X.
AD4485/X .
AD4090/X.
AD448l/X4
AD4681/M.
AD468l/X.
AD4682/X.
AD4691/M .
AD469l/X.
AD4692(X.
AD4890/X.
AD5060/Sq .
AD506l/M .
B2
BS
Bl7
B21
B25
B29
B33
B37
B43
B49
B53
B57
B6l
B65
B69
B73
B77
B8l
B85
B89
B93
B97
BlOl
BlOS
Bl09
Bll3
Bll7
Bl 2l
page
Loudspeaker types .
AD5061/ Sq.
AD5081/M .
AD5081/X .
AD5780/M.
AD57il0/X.
AD5790/M .
AD5790/X.
AD6980/M.
AD6980/X .
AD7060/W.
AD7062/M.
AD7063/M.
AD7066/MFI3
AD7066/W .
AD7080/M .
AD7080/X .
AD7091/M .
AD709 1/X. ,
ADSOOO
AD8061/W.
AD8066/W .
AD8067/MF13
AD8067/W.
AD8081/M.
AD8081/X.
97 10/MC
AD1065/M.
ADJ065/W.
AD10100/W.
AD 1265/M .
ADI265/W .
ADJ2l00/HP.
ADJ2 100/M.
AD12 100/W .
!3125
13 129
!3133
13 137
13141
13145
13149
!315:3
13157
13161
13165
13 169
13173
13179
13 18:3
!3187
13 19 1
13195
13 199
13201
13205
13209
13215
13219
B22.'l
13227
132:3 1
132:3 5
132.19
1324.1
13247
13251
13255
13259
Cross-over networks
ADP 1600
ADF2400
ADF500/4500
13265
13267
13269
13272
ELC 1042/05
ELC 1043/05
ELC1043/06
ELC2000
ELC2060
ELC2070
ELC.3082
ea
C 17
C29
C:ll
C49
C67
C8 1
page
Television tuners
12ET5632}
12ET5732 genera l
C9:l
C97
Cl03
12ET5632/ 03
l2ET5732/03
3122 127 10260
.'3122 1.27 10450
:3 122 127 14730
Cl09
Survey
Deflection units
AT1040/l5
AT1071/0l
ATl074
AT2048/12
AT2J02/0l
AT2 140
AT:35 15
AT40%
AT4042/14
AT404.3/87
02
05
011
015
021
027
033
0.19
D45
D49
D5l
053
D59
065
067
Survey
Deflection units
llluc latera l units
Deflection unit
Multi-pol e unit
Deflection units
Line ou tput transformers
Convergence adjuster::;
Correction coi l s
Transductor
Adjustable linea rit y control units
Filtering co il
Class- D filter choke
Bridge coils
AT1062/01
ATI06:3/0l
ATI068/03
ATl068/04
ATJOSO
AT J0 8l
AT1083/0l
ATJ085
AT2063/00
AT2076/ 10
AT2080/ IO
AT4040/ ..
AT4040/ ..
AT404l / 40
AT4042/08
AT4042/17
AT4042/38
AT404.3 /l5
AT4043/35
AT4043/38
AT4043 /8 6
E2
E5
ElI
E IS
E 17
E I9
E25
E3 1
E:l7
E43
E49
E55
E6l
E65
E69
E73
E75
E:77
E79
ESJ
E85
E87
page
Line driver. transformer
Line centring choke
E/W loading coil
Line balance coil
Four- pole adjusting coil
Convergence units
Delay lines
AT4043/87
AT4043/88
AT4044/20
AT4044/26
AT4044/27
AT4046/27
AT4046/28
AT4046/32
DLSO
DL51/DL52/DL53/DL55
DL60
E89
E91
E93
E95
E97
E99
E99
El01
El03
El07
Elll
EllS
Ell7
El21
El25
El27
'
.--.
- B
--- c
--c::
=
-:
!--=
-!:
t::
FM
tuners
Loudspeakers
Television tuners and aerial input as~emblies
'
Argentina: i'APESA l.y.C., Av. Crovara 2550, Tablada, Prov. de BUENOS AIRES, Tel. 652-7438 / 7478.
Australia: PHI LIPS INDUSTRIES HOLDINGS LTD., Elcoma Division, 67 Mars Road, LANE COVE , 2066, N.S.W., Tel. 421261.
Austria: 0STERREICHISCHE PHI LIPS BAUELEMENTE lndustrie G.m.b.H., Triester Str. 64, A-11 01 WIEN, Tel. 62 91 11.
Belgium: M.B.L.E., 80, rue des Deux G~res , B-1 070 BRUXELLES, Tel523 00 00.
Brazil: IBRAPE, Caixa Postal7383, Av. Paulista 2073-S / Loja, SAO PAULO, SP, Tel. 287-7144.
Canada: PHILIPS ELECTRONICS LTD., Electron Devices Div. , 601 Milner Ave., SCARBOROUGH , Ontario, M1 B 1MS, Tel. 292-5161 .
Chile: PHI LIPS CHILENA S.A., Av. Santa Maria 0760, SANTIAGO, Tel. 39-40 01 .
Colombia: SADAPE S.A. , P.O. Box 9805 Calle 13, No. 51+ 39, BOGOTA D.E. 1., Tel. 600600.
Denmark: MINIWATI A / S, Emdrupvej 115A, DK-2400 K0BENHAVN NV., Tel. (01 ) 6916 22.
Finland: OY PHI LIPS AB , Elcoma Divis ion , Kaivokatu 8, SF-001 00 HELSINKI1 0, Tel. 1 72 71.
France: R.T.C. LA RADIOTECHNIOUE-COMPELEC, 130.Avenue Ledru Rollin, F-75540 PARIS 11 , Tel. 355-44-99.
Germany: VALVO, UB Bauelemente der Philips G.m.b.H., Valvo Haus. Burchardstrasse 19, D-2 HAMBURG 1, Tel. (040) 3296-1 .
Greece: PHILIPS S.A. HELLENIQUE , Elcoma Division , 52, Av. Syngrou, ATHENS , Tel. 915 311.
Hong Kong: PHILIPS HONG KONG LTD., Comp. Dept. , Philips lnd . Bldg ., Kung Yip St. , K.C.T.L. 289, KWAI SHUNG , N.T. Tel.12-245121 .
India: PHI LIPS INDIA LTD., Elcoma Div., Band Box House, 254-D, Dr. Annie Besant Rd., Prabhadevi, BOMBAY-25-DD , Tel. 457 311-5.
Indonesia: P.T. PHILIPS-RALIN ELECTRONICS, Elcoma Division , 'Timah ' Building, Jl. Jen . Gatot Subroto, JAKARTA, Tel. 44163 .
Ireland: PHILIPS ELECTRICAL (IRELAND) LTD., Newst ead , Clonskeagh, DUBLIN 14, Tel. 69 33 55.
Italy: PHI LIPS S.P.A., Selione Elcoma , Piazza IV Novembre 3, 1-20124 MILANO, Te l. 2-6994 .
Japan: NIHON PHI LIPS CORP., Shuwa Shinagawa Bldg., 26-33 Takanawa 3-chome, Minato-ku, TOKYO (108), Tel. 448-5611 .
(IC Products) SIG NETICS JAPAN , LTO., TOKYO , Tel. (03) 230-1521 .
Korea: PHILIPS ELECTRONICS (KOREA) LTD. , Philips House. 260-1991taewon-dong , Yongsan-ku , C.P.O. Box 3680, SEOUl:, Tel. 44-4202.
Mexico: ELECTRONICA S.A. de C. V. , Varsovia No. 36, MEXICO 6, D.F., Tel. 5: 33-11 -80.
Netherlands: PHI LIPS NEDERLAND B.V., Aid . Elonc< , Boschdijk525, NL-4510 EINDHOVEN ,Tel. (040) 79 33 33 .
New Zealand: Philips Electricallnd . Ltd., Elcoma Divi"ion , 70-72 Kingsford Smith Street, WELLINGTON, Tel. 873156.
Norway: ELECTRONICA A / S., Vitam inveien 11 , P.O. t) ox 29, Grefsen, OSLO 4, Tel. (02) 15 OS 90.
Peru: CADESA, Jr. llo, No. 216, Apartado 10132, LIMI , Tel. 27 7317 .
Philippines: ELDAC, Phi lips Industrial Dev.lnc., 2246 Pasong Tame, MAKATI-RIZAL, Tel. 86-89-51 to59 .
Portugal: PHI LIPS PORTUGESA S.A.R.L. , Av. En g. Duharte Pacheco 6, LISBOA 1, Tel. 68 31 21 .
Singapore: PHILIPS SINGAPORE PTE LTD ., Elcoma Div., POB 340, ToaPayoh CPO, Lorong 1, Toa Payoh , SINGAPORE 12, Tel. 53 8811 .
South Africa: EDAC (Pty.) Ltd., South Park Lane, New Doornfontein, JOHANNESBURG 2001 , Tel. 24 / 6701 .
Spai n: COPRESA S.A., Balmes 22, BARCELONA 7, Tel. 301 63 12.
Sweden: A.B. ELCOMA, Lidingovageo '0, S-1 0250 STOCKHOLM 27, Tel. 08 / 67 97 80.
SWitzerland: PHI LIPS A. G., Elcoma Dept. , Edenstrasse
CH-8027 ZORICH , Te l. 01 / 44 2211 .
Ta iwan: PHI LIPS TAIWAN LTD. , 3rd Fl .. San Min Building , 57-1 , Chung Shan N. Rd , Section 2, P.O. Box 22978, TAIPEI, Tel. 5513101 -5.
Turkey: TORK PHI LIPS TICARET A.S., EMET Department, Giimiissuyu Cad. 78-80, Beyoglu, ISTANBUL, Tel. 45 32 50.
United Kingdom : MULLARD LTD., Mullard House, Torrington Place, LONDON WC1 E 7HD, Te l. 01-580 6633.
United States: (Active devices & Materials) AMPERE X SALES CORP., 230, Duffy Avenue , Hl CKSVILLE, N.Y. 11802,1el. (516) 931-6200.
(Passive devices) MEPCO / ELECTRA INC ., Columbia Rd., MORRISTOWN , N.J. 07960, Tel. (201) 539-2000.
(IC Products) SIGN ETICS CORPORATION , 811 East ArquesAvenue , SUNNYVALE , California 94086, Tel. (408) 739-7700.
Uruguay: LUZILECTRON S.A., Rondeau 1567, pi so 5, MONTEVIDEO , Tel. 9 43 21 .
Venezuela: IN D. VENEZOLANAS PHI LIPS S.A. , Elcoma Dept., A. Ppal de Ios Ruices, Edit. Centra Colgate, Apdoo1167, CARACAS , Tel. 36 0511 .
2o,